Mercedes - CLA - Owners Manual - 2019 - 2019

Your Operator's Manual Digital form inside the vehicle Familiarize yourself with the contents of the Operator's Manual directly via your vehicle's multimedia system (Menu item "Vehicle"). Booklet inside the vehicle In addition to the vehicle's Operator's Manual, you can obtain the complete multimedia system Supplement from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Digital form via the Internet You can find the Operator's Manual on the Mercedes-Benz homepage. Digital form as an App The Mercedes-Benz Guides App is available for free on the Apple® App store or Google Play. Apple® iOS Android™ CLA É1175842505_ËÍ 1175842505 Order no. P117 0196 13 Part no. 117 584 25 05 Edition A2019 CLA Operator's Manual Operator's Manual Mercedes-Benz Symbols In this Operator's Manual you will find the following symbols: G WARNING Warning notes make you aware of dangers which could pose a threat to your health or life, or to the health and life of others. H Environmental note Environmental notes provide you with information on environmentally aware actions or disposal. ! Notes on material damage alert you to dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle. i Practical tips or further information that could be helpful to you. This symbol indicates an instruction X that must be followed. Several of these symbols in succession X indicate an instruction with several steps. This symbol tells you where you can (Y page) find more information about a topic. Dis‐ This text indicates a message on the play multifunction display/multimedia display. Publication details Internet Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites: http://www.mbusa.com (USA only) http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only) Editorial office ©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Daimler AG. Vehicle manufacturer Daimler AG Mercedesstraße 137 70327 Stuttgart Germany As at 06.10.2017 Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz We urge you to read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this Operator's Manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the MercedesBenz Limited Warranty. The equipment or product designation of your vehicle may vary depending on: RModel ROrder RCountry specification RAvailability Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: RDesign REquipment RTechnical features The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The following are integral components of the vehicle: RPrinted Operator's Manual RMaintenance Booklet REquipment-dependent supplements Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all documents on to the new owner. You can also use the Mercedes-Benz Guides App: Your Operator's Manual: Digital form inside the vehicle The Digital Operator's Manual provides comprehensive and specifically adapted information on your vehicle's equipment and multimedia system. It contains informative animations, individual language settings and an intuitive search function. Booklet inside the vehicle In addition to this manual and the aforementioned digital media, you also have the option to obtain a comprehensive printed version of the Supplement for your multi- media system from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Digital form via the Internet The Operator's Manual on the Internet provides easy access to all information regarding your vehicle and multimedia system. It also provides helpful animations, interesting background information and a wide array of search options. Digital form as an App Using the Mercedes-Benz Guides App, you can view all the information on your vehicle and multimedia system via mobile Internet or download it independently of network access. Available for smartphones or tablets. You can also use the Mercedes-Benz Guides App: Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides App may not yet be available in your country. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Daimler Company 1175842505 É1175842505_ËÍ 2 Contents Index ....................................................... 4 Digital Operator's Manual .................. 23 Introduction ........................................... 23 Operation ............................................... 23 Introduction ......................................... Protecting the environment ................... Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ............... Operator's Manual ................................. Service and vehicle operation ................ Operating safety .................................... QR code for rescue card ........................ Data storage .......................................... Information on copyright ....................... 24 24 24 25 25 27 29 29 31 At a glance ........................................... Cockpit .................................................. Instrument cluster ................................. Multifunction steering wheel ................. Center console ...................................... Door control panel ................................. Overhead control panel ......................... 32 32 33 34 35 38 39 Safety ................................................... Panic alarm ............................................ Occupant safety .................................... Children in the vehicle ........................... Pets in the vehicle ................................. Driving safety systems ........................... Protection against theft ......................... 40 40 40 54 60 61 68 Opening and closing ........................... SmartKey ............................................... Doors ..................................................... Trunk ..................................................... Side windows ......................................... Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel ...................................................... 70 70 76 78 82 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... Correct driver's seat position ................ Seats ..................................................... Steering wheel ....................................... 91 91 91 96 86 Mirrors ................................................... 97 Memory function ................................. 100 Lights and windshield wipers .......... Exterior lighting ................................... Interior lighting .................................... Replacing bulbs ................................... Windshield wipers ................................ 101 101 104 105 108 Climate control ................................. Overview of climate control systems ... Operating the climate control systems .................................................... Air vents .............................................. 111 111 Driving and parking .......................... Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... Driving ................................................. DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ......... DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................... Automatic transmission ....................... Refueling ............................................. Parking ................................................ Driving tips .......................................... Driving systems ................................... 122 122 122 On-board computer and displays .... Important safety notes ........................ Displays and operation ........................ Menus and submenus ......................... Display messages ................................ Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ............................... 178 178 178 181 193 Multimedia system ........................... General notes ...................................... Important safety notes ........................ Function restrictions ............................ Operating system ................................ 231 231 231 231 232 116 121 129 130 131 139 142 145 150 220 Stowage and features ...................... 239 Loading guidelines ............................... 239 Stowage areas ..................................... 239 Contents Features .............................................. 244 Maintenance and care ...................... Engine compartment ........................... ASSYST PLUS ...................................... Care ..................................................... 260 260 264 265 Breakdown assistance ..................... Where will I find...? .............................. Flat tire ................................................ Battery (vehicle) .................................. Jump-starting ....................................... Towing and tow-starting ...................... Fuses ................................................... 273 273 274 279 282 284 287 Wheels and tires ............................... Important safety notes ........................ Operation ............................................ Winter operation .................................. Tire pressure ....................................... Loading the vehicle .............................. All about wheels and tires ................... Changing a wheel ................................ Wheel and tire combinations ............... Emergency spare wheel ....................... 290 290 290 292 293 301 304 310 315 315 Technical data ................................... Information regarding technical data ... Vehicle electronics .............................. Identification plates ............................. Service products and filling capacities ...................................................... Vehicle data ......................................... 317 317 317 318 319 325 3 4 Index 1, 2, 3 ... 4ETS (Electronic Traction System) see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) 4MATIC Display message ............................ 217 4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) .................................................. 161 12 V socket see Sockets A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Display message ............................ 194 Function/notes ................................ 61 Important safety notes .................... 61 Warning lamp ................................. 222 Accident Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 54 Activating media mode General notes ................................ 237 Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification ................. 116 Active Brake Assist Activating or deactivating .............. 187 Display message ............................ 200 Function/notes ................................ 62 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Activating ....................................... 154 Calling up a speed ......................... 155 Cruise control lever ....................... 154 Deactivating ................................... 156 Display message ............................ 211 Displays in the multifunction display ................................................ 157 Displays on the instrument cluster .................................................. 157 Driving tips .................................... 158 Function/notes ............................. 152 Important safety notes .................. 153 Setting a speed .............................. 156 Setting the specified minimum distance ......................................... 156 Stopping ........................................ 155 Storing a speed .............................. 155 Active Parking Assist Canceling ....................................... 169 Detecting parking spaces .............. 166 Display message ............................ 210 Exiting a parking space .................. 168 General notes ................................ 165 Important safety notes .................. 165 Parking .......................................... 167 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 68 Adaptive Damping System Function/notes ............................. 162 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Display message ............................ 206 Function/notes ............................. 103 Switching on/off ........................... 104 Additional speedometer ................... 189 Additives (engine oil) ........................ 322 Address book see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 231 Adjusting the volume Multimedia system ........................ 232 Air bags Deployment ..................................... 52 Display message ............................ 202 Front air bag (driver, front passenger) ....................................... 46 Important safety notes .................... 45 Introduction ..................................... 45 Knee bag .......................................... 46 Occupant Classification System (OCS) ............................................... 47 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ............................................... 41 Side impact air bag .......................... 47 Window curtain air bag .................... 47 Air vents Important safety notes .................. 121 Rear ............................................... 121 Setting the center air vents ........... 121 Setting the side air vents ............... 121 Air-conditioning system see Climate control Alarm ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 68 Switching off (ATA) .......................... 68 Switching the function on/off (ATA) ................................................ 68 Index Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) AMG Adaptive sport suspension system ................................................ 161 Performance Seat ............................ 95 AMG adaptive sport suspension system General Information ....................... 161 AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 190 AMG Performance exhaust system ..................................................... 128 Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-skid chains see Snow chains Anti-theft alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Ashtray ............................................... 246 Assistance display (on-board computer) .................................................. 187 Assistance menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 186 ASSYST PLUS Displaying a service message ........ 264 Driving abroad ............................... 265 Hiding a service message .............. 264 Information about Service ............. 265 Resetting the service interval display ................................................ 265 Service message ............................ 264 Special service requirements ......... 265 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Activating/deactivating ................... 68 Function ........................................... 68 Switching off the alarm .................... 68 ATTENTION ASSIST Activating/deactivating ................. 187 Display message ............................ 209 Function/notes ............................. 173 Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 184 Audio system see Digital Operator's Manual Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center see Qualified specialist workshop Authorized workshop see Qualified specialist workshop AUTO lights Display message ............................ see Lights Automatic car wash (care) ............... Automatic engine start (ECO start/ stop function) .................................... Automatic engine switch-off (ECO start/stop function) .......................... Automatic headlamp mode .............. Automatic transmission Accelerator pedal position ............. Changing gear ............................... DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... Drive program ................................ Drive program display .................... Driving tips .................................... DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............................................... DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. Emergency running mode .............. Engaging drive position .................. Engaging neutral ............................ Engaging park position (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. Engaging park position automatically ............................................... Engaging reverse gear ................... Engaging the park position ............ Holding the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients .............................. Kickdown ....................................... Manual shifting .............................. Oil temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... Overview ........................................ Problem (malfunction) ................... Pulling away ................................... Selector lever ................................ Starting the engine ........................ Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... Transmission position display ........ Transmission position display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... Transmission positions .................. 206 265 127 127 101 134 134 131 135 131 134 129 130 139 133 132 133 132 132 132 135 135 137 190 131 139 126 133 125 137 133 131 134 5 6 Index Automatic transmission emergency mode ....................................... 139 B Back button ....................................... 232 Backup lamp Display message ............................ 205 BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 61 Battery (SmartKey) Checking .......................................... 73 Important safety notes .................... 73 Replacing ......................................... 73 Battery (vehicle) Charging ........................................ 281 Display message ............................ 208 Important safety notes .................. 279 Jump starting ................................. 282 Replacing ....................................... 281 Belt see Seat belts Belt warning ......................................... 44 Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 188 Display message ............................ 210 Notes/function .............................. 174 Bluetooth® Searching for a mobile phone ........ 235 Searching for a mobile phone (device manager) ........................... 236 see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 231 Telephony ...................................... 235 Brake Assist System see BAS (Brake Assist System) Brake fluid Display message ............................ 199 Notes ............................................. 322 Brake force distribution see EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Brake lamp Replacing bulbs ............................. 107 Brake lamps Display message ............................ 204 Brakes ABS .................................................. 61 BAS .................................................. 61 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 322 Braking assistance appropriate to the situation ..................................... 63 Display message ............................ 194 EBD .................................................. 67 Hill start assist ............................... 126 HOLD function ............................... 158 Important safety notes .................. 147 Maintenance .................................. 148 Parking brake ................................ 143 Riding tips ...................................... 147 Warning lamp ................................. 221 Braking assistance appropriate to the situation Function/notes ................................ 63 Breakdown assistance Where will I find...? ........................ 273 see Flat tire see Tow-starting see Towing away Brightness control (instrument cluster lighting) ................................... 33 Buttons on the steering wheel ......... 179 C California Important notice for retail customers and lessees .......................... 25 Calling up a malfunction see Display messages Car see Vehicle Care Car wash ........................................ 265 Carpets .......................................... 272 Display ........................................... 270 Exhaust pipe .................................. 270 Exterior lights ................................ 269 Gear or selector lever .................... 271 Interior ........................................... 270 Matte finish ................................... 267 Notes ............................................. 265 Paint .............................................. 267 Plastic trim .................................... 270 Power washer ................................ 266 Rear view camera .......................... 269 Index Roof lining ...................................... 272 Seat belt ........................................ 271 Seat cover ..................................... 271 Sensors ......................................... 269 Steering wheel ............................... 271 Trim pieces .................................... 271 Washing by hand ........................... 266 Wheels ........................................... 268 Windows ........................................ 268 Wiper blades .................................. 269 Wooden trim .................................. 271 Cargo compartment enlargement ... 242 Cargo tie down rings ......................... 243 CD see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 231 CD player (on-board computer) ........ 185 Center console Lower section .................................. 36 Upper section .................................. 35 Central locking Automatic locking (on-board computer) ............................................. 189 Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 70 Change of address .............................. 26 Change of ownership .......................... 26 Changing a wheel Wheels and tires ............................ 311 Child Restraint system .............................. 56 Child seat Forward-facing restraint system ...... 59 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors ............................................ 57 On the front-passenger seat ............ 58 Rearward-facing restraint system .... 59 Top Tether ....................................... 57 Child-proof locks Important safety notes .................... 59 Rear doors ....................................... 60 Children Special seat belt retractor ............... 55 Children in the vehicle Important safety notes .................... 54 Cigarette lighter ................................ 247 Cleaning Mirror turn signal ........................... 269 Climate control Air-conditioning system ................. 112 Automatic climate control (dualzone) .............................................. 114 Controlling automatically ............... 117 Cooling with air dehumidification .. 116 Defrosting the windows ................. 119 Defrosting the windshield .............. 118 General notes ................................ 111 Indicator lamp ................................ 117 Information about using automatic climate control ..................... 115 Maximum cooling .......................... 119 Notes on using the air-conditioning system ..................................... 113 Overview of systems ...................... 111 Problem with the rear window defroster ........................................ 120 Problems with cooling with air dehumidification ............................ 117 Refrigerant ..................................... 324 Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 324 Setting the air distribution ............. 117 Setting the air vents ...................... 121 Setting the airflow ......................... 118 Setting the temperature ................ 117 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ............................................ 120 Switching on/off ........................... 116 Switching residual heat on/off ...... 120 Switching the rear window defroster on/off ............................ 119 Switching the ZONE function on/off ............................................ 118 Cockpit Overview .......................................... 32 see Instrument cluster COMAND display Cleaning ......................................... 270 Combination switch .......................... 102 Compass Calibrating ..................................... 258 Calling up ....................................... 258 Magnetic field zone maps .............. 258 Setting ........................................... 258 Connecting a USB device see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 231 7 8 Index Consumption statistics (on-board computer) .......................................... 182 Controller ........................................... 232 Convenience closing feature .............. 84 Convenience opening feature ............ 83 Coolant (engine) Checking the level ......................... 263 Display message ............................ 207 Filling capacity ............................... 323 Important safety notes .................. 323 Temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 190 Temperature gauge ........................ 179 Warning lamp ................................. 227 Cooling see Climate control Copyright ............................................. 31 Cornering light function Display message ............................ 204 Cruise control Activation conditions ..................... 151 Cruise control lever ....................... 151 Deactivating ................................... 152 Display message ............................ 212 Driving system ............................... 150 Function/notes ............................. 150 Important safety notes .................. 151 Setting a speed .............................. 152 Storing and maintaining current speed ............................................. 151 Cup holder Center console .............................. 245 Important safety notes .................. 244 Rear compartment ......................... 246 Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ..................................................... 28 Customer Relations Department ....... 28 D Dashboard see Instrument cluster Data see Technical data Daytime running lamps Display message ............................ 206 Function/notes ............................. 101 Switching on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 189 Declarations of conformity ................. 27 Decorative film Cleaning instructions ..................... 267 Diagnostics connection ...................... 28 Digital Operator's Manual Help ................................................. 23 Introduction ..................................... 23 Digital speedometer ......................... 183 DIRECT SELECT lever Automatic transmission ................. 131 Display messages ASSYST PLUS ................................ 264 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 193 Driving systems ............................. 209 Engine ............................................ 207 General notes ................................ 193 Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 193 Lights ............................................. 204 Safety systems .............................. 194 SmartKey ....................................... 218 Tires ............................................... 213 Vehicle ........................................... 215 Distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Distance recorder ............................. 182 Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 229 Distance warning function Function/notes ................................ 62 Warning lamp ................................. 229 Doors Automatic locking (on-board computer) ............................................. 189 Automatic locking (switch) ............... 77 Central locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ....................................... 70 Control panel ................................... 38 Display message ............................ 218 Emergency locking ........................... 77 Emergency unlocking ....................... 77 Important safety notes .................... 76 Opening (from inside) ...................... 76 Drinking and driving ......................... 146 Drive program Automatic transmission ................. 135 Display ........................................... 133 Index Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 131 Driver's door see Doors Driving Towing vehicles ............................. 129 Driving abroad Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 265 Driving on flooded roads .................. 150 Driving safety system Active Brake Assist .......................... 62 Braking assistance appropriate to the situation ..................................... 63 Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 61 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 68 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 61 Distance warning function ............... 62 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) ............................................. 67 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 64 Important safety information ........... 61 Overview .......................................... 61 STEER CONTROL ............................. 68 Driving system DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL ............ 162 Parking assist PARKTRONIC .......... 162 RACE START (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ........................................ 160 Start-off assist ............................... 159 Driving systems Active Parking Assist ..................... 165 AMG adaptive sport suspension system ........................................... 161 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 173 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 174 Cruise control ................................ 150 Display message ............................ 209 HOLD function ............................... 158 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 176 Lane Tracking package .................. 174 Rear view camera .......................... 169 Driving tips Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ............................ 152, 158 Automatic transmission ................. 134 Brakes ........................................... 147 Break-in period .............................. 122 Checking brake lining thickness .... Downhill gradient ........................... Drinking and driving ....................... Driving in winter ............................. Driving on flooded roads ................ Driving on wet roads ...................... Exhaust check ............................... Fuel ................................................ General .......................................... Hydroplaning ................................. Icy road surfaces ........................... Limited braking efficiency on salted roads ....................................... Snow chains .................................. The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ..... Wet road surface ........................... DVD video Operating (on-board computer) ..... see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. DYNAMIC SELECT button Climate control (3-zone automatic climate control) ............................. Climate control (air-conditioning system) .......................................... DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................................................... DYNAMIC SELECT controller ............ DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................. 149 147 146 150 150 149 146 146 145 149 150 148 293 122 148 185 231 116 113 129 130 130 E EASY-PACK tailgate see Tailgate EASY-VARIO-PLUS system Cargo compartment enlargement .. 242 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Display message ............................ 196 Function/notes ................................ 67 ECO display Function/notes ............................. 146 On-board computer ....................... 182 ECO start/stop function Automatic engine start .................. 127 Automatic engine switch-off .......... 127 9 10 Index Deactivating/activating ................. 128 General information ....................... 127 Important safety notes .................. 127 Introduction ................................... 126 Electronic Stability Program see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Emergency Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 54 Emergency release Driver's door .................................... 77 Vehicle ............................................. 77 Emergency spare wheel General notes ................................ 316 Important safety notes .................. 315 Removing ....................................... 316 Emergency Tensioning Devices Activation ......................................... 52 Emissions control Service and warranty information .... 25 Engine Check Engine warning lamp ........... 226 Display message ............................ 207 ECO start/stop function ................ 126 Engine number ............................... 319 Irregular running ............................ 128 Jump-starting ................................. 282 Starting (important safety notes) ... 124 Starting problems .......................... 128 Starting the engine with the SmartKey ....................................... 125 Starting with the Start/Stop button ................................................. 125 Switching off .................................. 143 Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 287 Engine electronics Problem (malfunction) ................... 128 Engine oil Adding ........................................... 262 Additives ........................................ 322 Checking the oil level ..................... 261 Checking the oil level using the dipstick .......................................... 261 Display message ............................ 208 Filling capacity ............................... 322 Notes about oil grades ................... 322 Notes on oil level/consumption .... 261 Temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 190 Entering an address see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 231 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 191 Characteristics ................................. 65 Deactivating/activating (button in Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............. 66 Deactivating/activating (except Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) ................. 65 Deactivating/activating (onboard computer, except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 187 Display message ............................ 194 Function/notes ................................ 64 General notes .................................. 64 Important safety information ........... 64 Trailer stabilization ........................... 67 Warning lamp ................................. 223 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ...................................................... 64 Exhaust see Exhaust pipe Exhaust check ................................... 146 Exhaust pipe Cleaning ......................................... 270 Exterior lighting Cleaning ......................................... 269 see Lights Exterior mirrors Adjusting ......................................... 97 Dipping (automatic) ......................... 98 Folding in when locking (on-board computer) ...................................... 190 Folding in/out (automatically) ......... 98 Folding in/out (electrically) ............. 98 Out of position (troubleshooting) ..... 98 Setting ............................................. 98 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 100 Storing the parking position ............. 99 Eyeglasses compartment ................. 240 Index F Favorites Overview ........................................ 233 Filler cap see Refueling Flat tire MOExtended tires .......................... 275 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 274 TIREFIT kit ...................................... 276 see Emergency spare wheel Flexible Fuel vehicles ........................ 320 Floormats ........................................... 259 Frequencies Mobile phone ................................. 317 Two-way radio ................................ 317 Fuel Additives ........................................ 321 Consumption statistics .................. 182 Displaying the current consumption ................................................ 182 Displaying the range ...................... 182 Driving tips .................................... 146 E10 ................................................ 320 Fuel gauge ....................................... 33 Grade (gasoline) ............................ 320 Important safety notes .................. 320 Problem (malfunction) ................... 142 Refueling ........................................ 139 Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 320 Fuel filler flap Opening ......................................... 141 Fuel level Calling up the range (on-board computer) ...................................... 182 Fuel tank Capacity ........................................ 320 Problem (malfunction) ................... 142 Fuses Allocation chart ............................. 289 Before changing ............................. 288 Fuse box in the engine compartment .............................................. 288 Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell .......................................... 289 Important safety notes .................. 287 G Garage door opener Clearing the memory ..................... 257 General notes ................................ 255 Important safety notes .................. 255 Opening/closing the garage door .. 257 Problems when programming ........ 257 Programming (button in the rearview mirror) ................................... 255 Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 256 Gasoline ............................................. 320 Gear indicator (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 190 Genuine parts ...................................... 24 Glove box ........................................... 240 Google™ Local Search see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 231 H HANDS-FREE ACCESS .......................... 80 Hazard warning lamps Display message ............................ 218 Switching on/off ........................... 103 Head restraints Adjusting ......................................... 94 Adjusting (manually) ........................ 94 Adjusting (rear) ................................ 95 Headlamps Fogging up ..................................... 104 see Automatic headlamp mode Heating see Climate control High beam flasher ............................. 102 High-beam headlamps Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 103 Display message ............................ 205 Replacing bulbs ............................. 107 Switching on/off ........................... 102 Hill start assist .................................. 126 HOLD function Activating ....................................... 159 Activation conditions ..................... 159 Deactivating ................................... 159 Display message ............................ 209 Function/notes ............................. 158 11 12 Index Home address see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 231 Hood Closing ........................................... 261 Display message ............................ 217 Important safety notes .................. 260 Opening ......................................... 260 Horn ...................................................... 32 Hydroplaning ..................................... 149 I Ignition lock see Key positions Immobilizer .......................................... 68 Indicator lamp Replacing bulbs (rear) .................... 107 Indicator lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Indicators see Turn signals Instrument cluster Overview .......................................... 33 Settings ......................................... 188 Warning and indicator lamps ........... 33 Instrument cluster lighting .............. 178 Interior lighting Control ........................................... 105 Overview ........................................ 104 Reading lamp ................................. 104 iPod® see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 231 J Jack Storage location ............................ 274 Using ............................................. 312 Jump starting (engine) ...................... 282 K Key positions Start/Stop button .......................... 123 KEYLESS-GO Convenience closing feature ............ 84 Deactivation ..................................... 71 Locking ............................................ 71 Unlocking ......................................... 71 Kickdown Driving tips .................................... 135 Manual gearshifting ....................... 139 Knee bag .............................................. 46 L Lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 188 Display message ............................ 210 Function/information .................... 176 Lane Tracking package ..................... 174 Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 191 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors ................................................ 57 License plate lamp (display message) ................................................... 205 Light sensor (display message) ....... 206 Lights Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 103 Automatic headlamp mode ............ 101 Fogged up headlamps .................... 104 Hazard warning lamps ................... 103 High beam flasher .......................... 102 High-beam headlamps ................... 102 Light switch ................................... 101 Low-beam headlamps .................... 102 Parking lamps ................................ 102 Rear fog lamp ................................ 102 Setting exterior lighting ................. 101 Standing lamps .............................. 102 Switching the daytime running lamps on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 189 Turn signals ................................... 102 Loading guidelines ............................ 239 Locking see Central locking Locking (doors) Automatic ........................................ 77 Emergency locking ........................... 77 From inside (central locking button) .................................................. 76 Index Locking centrally see Central locking Locking verification signal (onboard computer) ............................... 190 Low-beam headlamps Display message ............................ 204 Replacing bulbs ............................. 106 Switching on/off ........................... 102 Lumbar support Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support .................................................. 95 M M+S tires ............................................ 292 Malfunction message see Display messages Matte finish (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 267 Mechanical key Function/notes ................................ 72 Inserting .......................................... 72 Locking vehicle ................................ 77 Removing ......................................... 72 Unlocking the driver's door .............. 77 Memory card (audio) ......................... 185 Memory function ............................... 100 Mercedes me connect Call priority .................................... 251 Display message ............................ 199 Downloading destinations (COMAND) ..................................... 251 Downloading routes ....................... 254 General notes ................................ 248 Geo fencing ................................... 254 Info call button .............................. 250 Mercedes-Benz emergency call ..... 249 Recovering a stolen vehicle ........... 253 Remote Vehicle Health Check ....... 253 Roadside Assistance call button .... 250 Search & Send ............................... 252 Self-diagnosis ................................ 248 Speed alert .................................... 254 System .......................................... 248 Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 255 Vehicle remote locking .................. 253 Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 252 Message memory (on-board computer) .................................................. 193 Messages see Display messages Mirror turn signal Cleaning ......................................... 269 Mirrors see Exterior mirrors see Rear-view mirror see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) Mobile phone Connecting (Bluetooth® interface) .............................................. 235 Connecting (device manager) ........ 236 Frequencies ................................... 317 Installation ..................................... 317 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 185 Transmission output (maximum) .... 317 Modifying the programming (SmartKey) ........................................... 72 MOExtended tires .............................. 275 Mounting wheels Lowering the vehicle ...................... 314 Mounting a new wheel ................... 313 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 311 Raising the vehicle ......................... 312 Removing a wheel .......................... 313 Securing the vehicle against rolling away ........................................ 312 MP3 Operation ....................................... 185 see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 231 Multifunction display Function/notes ............................. 181 Permanent display ......................... 189 Multifunction steering wheel Operating the on-board computer .. 179 Overview .......................................... 34 Multimedia system Switching on and off ...................... 232 Music files see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 231 13 14 Index N Navigation Entering a destination .................... Menu (on-board computer) ............ see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ....................................................... 233 183 231 122 O Occupant Classification System (OCS) Conditions ....................................... 48 Faults ............................................... 51 Operation ......................................... 48 System self-test ............................... 50 Occupant safety Air bags ........................................... 45 Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 54 Belt warning ..................................... 44 Children in the vehicle ..................... 54 Important safety notes .................... 40 Introduction to the restraint system .................................................. 40 Occupant Classification System (OCS) ............................................... 47 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ............................................... 41 Pets in the vehicle ........................... 60 Restraint system warning lamp ........ 41 Seat belt .......................................... 41 Odometer ........................................... 182 On-board computer AMG menu ..................................... 190 Assistance graphic menu ............... 187 Assistance menu ........................... 186 Audio menu ................................... 184 Convenience submenu .................. 190 Display messages .......................... 193 Displaying a service message ........ 264 Factory settings ............................. 190 Important safety notes .................. 178 Instrument cluster submenu .......... 188 Lighting submenu .......................... 189 Menu overview .............................. 181 Message memory .......................... 193 Navigation menu ............................ 183 Operation ....................................... 179 RACETIMER ................................... 191 Service menu ................................. 188 Settings menu ............................... 188 Standard display ............................ 182 Telephone menu ............................ 185 Trip menu ...................................... 182 Vehicle submenu ........................... 189 Video DVD operation ..................... 185 Opening and closing the side trim panels ................................................. 107 Operating safety Declaration of conformity ................ 27 Important safety notes .................... 27 Operating system see On-board computer Operation Digital Operator's Manual ................ 23 Operator's Manual Vehicle equipment ........................... 25 Outside temperature display ........... 178 Overhead control panel ...................... 39 Override feature Rear side windows ........................... 60 P Paint code number ............................ 318 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 267 Panic alarm .......................................... 40 Panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel Important safety notes .................... 86 Operating ......................................... 87 Operating the roller sunblinds for the sliding sunroof ........................... 88 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 89 Reversing feature ............................. 87 Parking Important safety notes .................. 142 Parking brake ................................ 143 Parking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side .................................................. 99 Rear view camera .......................... 169 Index Parking aid see Exterior mirrors see Rear view camera Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Deactivating/activating ................. 164 Driving system ............................... 162 Function/notes ............................. 162 Important safety notes .................. 162 Problems (malfunctions) ................ 165 Sensor range ................................. 163 Warning display ............................. 164 Parking assistance see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Parking brake Applying automatically ................... 144 Applying or releasing manually ...... 144 Display message ............................ 196 Electric parking brake .................... 143 Emergency braking ........................ 145 General notes ................................ 143 Releasing automatically ................. 145 Warning lamp ................................. 226 Parking lamps Switching on/off ........................... 102 PASSENGER AIR BAG Display message ............................ 202 Indicator lamps ................................ 41 Problem (malfunction) ................... 202 Pets in the vehicle ............................... 60 Phone book see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 231 Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 270 Power washers .................................. 266 Power windows see Side windows Protection against theft ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 68 Immobilizer ...................................... 68 Protection of the environment General notes .................................. 24 Pulling away Automatic transmission ................. 126 General notes ................................ 126 Hill start assist ............................... 126 Q QR code Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1 Rescue card ..................................... 29 Qualified specialist workshop ........... 28 R RACE START Important safety notes .................. 160 RACE START (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................................................... 160 RACE TIMER (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 191 Radio Selecting a station ......................... 184 see Digital Operator's Manual Radio mode see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 231 Radio-wave reception/transmission in the vehicle Declaration of conformity ................ 27 Rain closing feature (panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel) .... 88 Reading lamp ..................................... 104 Rear compartment Setting the air vents ...................... 121 Rear fog lamp Display message ............................ 205 Replacing bulbs ............................. 107 Switching on/off ........................... 102 Rear lamps see Lights Rear seats Folding the backrest forwards/ back ............................................... 242 Rear view camera "Reverse parking" function ............ 171 Cleaning instructions ..................... 269 Display in the multimedia system .. 170 Function/notes ............................. 169 General notes ................................ 169 Switching on/off ........................... 170 Rear window defroster Problem (malfunction) ................... 120 Switching on/off ........................... 120 15 16 Index Rear-view mirror Anti-glare (manual) .......................... 97 Dipping (automatic) ......................... 98 Reflective safety jacket .................... 273 Refrigerant (air-conditioning system) Important safety notes .................. 324 Refueling Fuel gauge ....................................... 33 Important safety notes .................. 139 Refueling process .......................... 140 see Fuel Remote control Garage door opener ....................... 255 Programming (garage door opener) .......................................... 255 Replacing bulbs Brake lamp .................................... 107 High-beam headlamps ................... 107 Important safety notes .................. 105 Installing/removing the cover (front wheel arch) .......................... 106 Low-beam headlamps .................... 106 Overview of bulb types .................. 105 Rear fog lamp ................................ 107 Turn signals (front) ......................... 107 Turn signals (rear) .......................... 107 Reporting safety defects .................... 28 Rescue card ......................................... 29 Reserve (fuel tank) see Fuel Reserve fuel Display message ............................ 208 Warning lamp ................................. 226 see Fuel Residual heat (climate control) ........ 120 Restraint system Display message ............................ 201 Introduction ..................................... 40 Warning lamp ................................. 226 Warning lamp (function) ................... 41 Reverse gear (selector lever) ........... 133 Reversing feature Roller sunblind ................................. 88 Side windows ................................... 83 Tailgate ............................................ 78 Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 26 Roller sunblind Panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel ..................................... 88 Roof carrier ........................................ 244 Roof lining and carpets (cleaning guidelines) ......................................... 272 Roof load (maximum) ........................ 325 Route guidance see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 231 S Safety Children in the vehicle ..................... 54 see Occupant safety Safety system see Driving safety systems SD card Inserting ........................................ 237 Inserting/removing ........................ 237 Removing ....................................... 237 SD memory card see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 231 Search & Send see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 231 Seat Correct driver's seat position ........... 91 Seat belts Adjusting the height ......................... 44 Cleaning ......................................... 271 Correct usage .................................. 43 Fastening ......................................... 44 Important safety guidelines ............. 42 Introduction ..................................... 41 Releasing ......................................... 44 Warning lamp ................................. 220 Warning lamp (function) ................... 44 Seats Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 93 Adjusting (manually) ........................ 93 Adjusting (Performance Seat) .......... 95 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support .................................................. 95 Adjusting the head restraint ............ 94 Cleaning the cover ......................... 271 Index Folding the backrest (rear compartment) forwards/back .............. 242 Important safety notes .................... 91 Seat heating problem ...................... 96 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 100 Switching seat heating on/off ......... 95 Section Trunk ............................................... 78 Securing cargo .................................. 243 Selector lever Cleaning ......................................... 271 Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 269 Service center see Qualified specialist workshop Service Center see Qualified specialist workshop Service menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 188 Service message see ASSYST PLUS Service products Brake fluid ..................................... 322 Coolant (engine) ............................ 323 Engine oil ....................................... 322 Fuel ................................................ 319 Important safety notes .................. 319 Refrigerant (air-conditioning system) ............................................... 324 Washer fluid ................................... 323 Setting the air distribution ............... 117 Setting the airflow ............................ 118 Setting the date/time format see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 231 Setting the language see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 231 Setting the time see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 231 Settings Factory (on-board computer) ......... 190 On-board computer ....................... 188 SETUP (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 191 Side impact air bag ............................. 47 Side marker lamp (display message) ................................................... 206 Side windows Cleaning ......................................... 268 Convenience closing feature ............ 84 Convenience opening feature .......... 83 Important safety information ........... 82 Opening/closing .............................. 83 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 85 Resetting ......................................... 85 Reversing feature ............................. 83 SIRIUS services see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 231 Sliding sunroof see Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel SmartKey Changing the battery ....................... 73 Changing the programming ............. 72 Checking the battery ....................... 73 Convenience closing feature ............ 84 Convenience opening feature .......... 83 Display message ............................ 218 Door central locking/unlocking ....... 70 Important safety notes .................... 70 KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 71 Loss ................................................. 74 Mechanical key ................................ 72 Positions (ignition lock) ................. 123 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 74 Starting the engine ........................ 125 SmartKey positions (ignition lock) .. 123 Smartphone Starting the engine ........................ 125 SMS see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 231 Snow chains ...................................... 293 Sockets Center console .............................. 247 General notes ................................ 247 Rear compartment ......................... 248 Trunk ............................................. 248 Sound Switching on/off ........................... 232 Special seat belt retractor .................. 55 17 18 Index Specialist workshop ............................ 28 Speed, controlling see Cruise control Speedometer Activating/deactivating the additional speedometer ........................ 189 Digital ............................................ 183 In the Instrument cluster ................. 33 Segments ...................................... 178 Selecting the display unit ............... 188 SPORT handling mode Deactivating/activating (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................ 66 Warning lamp ................................. 224 Standing lamps Display message ............................ 205 Switching on/off ........................... 102 Start-off assist Activating ....................................... 160 Important safety notes .................. 159 Start/Stop button Removing ....................................... 124 Starting the engine ........................ 125 Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function Starting (engine) ................................ 124 STEER CONTROL .................................. 68 Steering Display message ............................ 218 Steering assistant STEER CONTROL see STEER CONTROL Steering wheel Adjusting (manually) ........................ 96 Button overview ............................... 34 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 179 Cleaning ......................................... 271 Important safety notes .................... 96 Paddle shifters ............................... 137 Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 137 Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 191 Stowage compartments Armrest (front) ............................... 240 Armrest (under) ............................. 241 Center console .............................. 240 Center console (rear) ..................... 241 Cup holders ................................... 244 Eyeglasses compartment ............... Glove box ....................................... Important safety information ......... Map pockets .................................. Stowage net ................................... Stowage net ....................................... Stowage well beneath the trunk floor .................................................... Summer tires ..................................... Sun visor ............................................ Suspension setting AMG adaptive sport suspension system ........................................... Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ................................................. Switching on media mode Via the device list .......................... 240 240 239 241 241 241 243 292 246 161 120 237 T Tachometer ........................................ 178 Tail lamps Display message ............................ 205 see Lights Tailgate Limiting the opening angle ............... 81 Obstruction detection ...................... 78 Opening dimensions ...................... 325 Opening/closing automatically from outside .................................... 79 Tank see Fuel tank Tank content Fuel gauge ....................................... 33 Technical data Capacities ...................................... 319 Information .................................... 317 Tires/wheels ................................. 315 Vehicle data ................................... 325 Telephone Accepting a call (multifunction steering wheel) .............................. 186 Authorizing a mobile phone (connecting) ......................................... 235 Authorizing a mobile phone via the device manager (connecting) ......... 236 Connecting a mobile phone (device manager) ........................... 236 Index Connecting a mobile phone (general information) ............................ Display message ............................ Introduction ................................... Menu (on-board computer) ............ Number from the phone book ........ Redialing ........................................ Rejecting/ending a call ................. see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. Temperature Coolant .......................................... Coolant (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... Engine oil (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... Outside temperature ...................... Setting (climate control) ................ Transmission oil (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... Through-loading feature ................... Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... Tire pressure Calling up (on-board computer) ..... Checking manually ........................ Display message ............................ Maximum ....................................... Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... Notes ............................................. Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... Recommended ............................... Tire pressure loss warning system General notes ................................ Important safety notes .................. Restarting ...................................... Tire pressure monitor Checking the tire pressure electronically ........................................ Function/notes ............................. General notes ................................ Important safety notes .................. Radio type approval for the tire pressure monitor ........................... Restarting ...................................... Warning lamp ................................. Warning message .......................... TIREFIT kit .......................................... Important safety notes .................. 235 218 185 185 186 186 186 231 179 190 190 178 117 190 241 191 297 296 213 296 277 295 278 293 296 297 297 299 297 297 298 300 300 230 299 276 276 Storage location ............................ Tire pressure not reached .............. Tire pressure reached .................... Tires Aspect ratio (definition) ................. Average weight of the vehicle occupants (definition) .................... Bar (definition) ............................... Changing a wheel .......................... Characteristics .............................. Checking ........................................ Curb weight (definition) ................. Definition of terms ......................... Direction of rotation ...................... Display message ............................ Distribution of the vehicle occupants (definition) ............................ DOT (Department of Transportation) (definition) ............................. DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............................................... GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) (definition) ..................................... General notes ................................ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (definition) ........................................... GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) (definition) .............................. Important safety notes .................. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment (definition) ...... Information on driving .................... Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... Labeling (overview) ........................ Load bearing index (definition) ...... Load index ..................................... Load index (definition) ................... M+S tires ....................................... Maximum load on a tire (definition) ............................................... Maximum loaded vehicle weight (definition) ..................................... Maximum permissible tire pressure (definition) ............................. Maximum tire load ......................... Maximum tire load (definition) ....... MOExtended tires .......................... 274 277 278 310 308 308 310 308 290 309 308 311 213 310 308 308 309 315 309 309 290 309 290 309 305 310 307 309 292 309 309 309 307 309 292 19 20 Index Optional equipment weight (definition) ............................................ 310 PSI (pounds per square inch) (definition) ........................................... 310 Replacing ....................................... 310 Service life ..................................... 291 Sidewall (definition) ....................... 310 Speed rating (definition) ................ 309 Storing ........................................... 311 Structure and characteristics (definition) ..................................... 308 Summer tires ................................. 292 Temperature .................................. 305 TIN (Tire Identification Number) (definition) ..................................... 310 Tire bead (definition) ...................... 310 Tire pressure (definition) ................ 310 Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 309 Tire size (data) ............................... 315 Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating .................... 305 Tire tread ....................................... 291 Tire tread (definition) ..................... 310 Total load limit (definition) ............. 310 Traction ......................................... 304 Traction (definition) ....................... 310 Tread wear ..................................... 304 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards ...................................... 304 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (definition) .................... 309 Wear indicator (definition) ............. 310 Wheel rim (definition) .................... 309 see Flat tire Top Tether ............................................ 57 Tow-starting Emergency engine starting ............ 287 Important safety notes .................. 284 Installing the towing eye ................ 285 Removing the towing eye ............... 286 Towing Permitted towing methods ............ 287 Towing a trailer ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 67 Towing away Important safety guidelines ........... 284 Installing the towing eye ................ 285 Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 287 Removing the towing eye ............... 286 Transporting the vehicle ................ 287 With both axles on the ground ....... 286 With the front axle raised ............... 286 Towing eye ......................................... 274 Traffic reports see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 231 Transmission see Automatic transmission Transmission position display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 131 Transporting the vehicle .................. 287 Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 271 Trip computer (on-board computer) .................................................. 182 Trip odometer Calling up ....................................... 182 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 183 Trunk Emergency release .......................... 82 Emergency release button ............... 82 Important safety notes .................... 78 Opening (automatically from outside) ................................................. 79 Opening (from outside the vehicle, HANDS-FREE ACCESS) .............. 80 Opening automatically from inside ............................................... 81 Opening/closing (manually from outside) ............................................ 79 Trunk lid Display message ............................ 217 see Tailgate Turn signals Display message ............................ 204 Replacing bulbs (front) ................... 107 Switching on/off ........................... 102 Two-way radio Frequencies ................................... 317 Installation ..................................... 317 Transmission output (maximum) .... 317 Type identification plate see Vehicle identification plate Index U Unlocking Emergency unlocking ....................... 77 From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) ............................. 76 Upshift indicator (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 190 USB devices Connecting to the Media Interface ............................................... 238 V Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 246 Vehicle Correct use ...................................... 28 Data acquisition ............................... 29 Display message ............................ 215 Equipment ....................................... 25 Individual settings .......................... 188 Limited Warranty ............................. 29 Loading .......................................... 301 Locking (in an emergency) ............... 77 Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 70 Lowering ........................................ 314 Maintenance .................................... 26 Parking for a long period ................ 145 Pulling away ................................... 126 Raising ........................................... 312 Reporting problems ......................... 28 Securing from rolling away ............ 312 Transporting .................................. 287 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 77 Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 70 Vehicle data ................................... 325 Vehicle data Roof load (maximum) ..................... 325 Vehicle dimensions ........................... 325 Vehicle emergency locking ................ 77 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle identification plate .............. 318 Vehicle tool kit .................................. 274 Ventilation Setting the vents ........................... 121 Video Operating the DVD ......................... 185 see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 231 VIN Seat ............................................... 319 Type plate ...................................... 318 W Warning and indicator lamps ABS ................................................ 222 Active Brake Assist ........................ 229 Brakes ........................................... 221 Check Engine ................................. 226 Coolant .......................................... 227 Distance warning ........................... 229 ESP® .............................................. 223 ESP® OFF ....................................... 224 Fuel tank ........................................ 226 Overview .......................................... 33 PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 41 Reserve fuel ................................... 226 Restraint system ............................ 226 Seat belt ........................................ 220 SPORT handling mode ................... 224 Tire pressure monitor .................... 230 Warranty .............................................. 25 Washer fluid Display message ............................ 218 Weather display (COMAND) see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 231 Wheel and tire combinations Tires ............................................... 315 Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 314 Wheel chock ...................................... 312 Wheels Changing a wheel .......................... 310 Checking ........................................ 290 Cleaning ......................................... 268 Emergency spare wheel ................. 315 Important safety notes .................. 290 Information on driving .................... 290 Interchanging/changing ................ 310 Mounting a new wheel ................... 313 Removing a wheel .......................... 313 Storing ........................................... 311 Tightening torque ........................... 314 Wheel size/tire size ....................... 315 21 22 Index Wheels and tires Changing a wheel .......................... 311 Window curtain air bag Display message ............................ 201 Operation ......................................... 47 Windows see Side windows Windshield Defrosting ...................................... 118 Windshield washer system Adding washer fluid ....................... 263 Important safety notes .................. 323 Windshield wipers Display message ............................ 218 Problem (malfunction) ................... 110 Replacing the wiper blades ............ 109 Switching on/off ........................... 108 Winter driving Slippery road surfaces ................... 150 Snow chains .................................. 293 Winter operation General notes ................................ 292 Winter tires M+S tires ....................................... 292 Wiper blades Cleaning ......................................... 269 Important safety notes .................. 109 Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 271 Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop Z ZONE function Switching on/off ........................... 118 Digital Operator's Manual Introduction The printed Operator's Manual provides information about the safe operation of your vehicle. The Digital Operator's Manual provides comprehensive and specifically adapted information on your vehicle's equipment and multimedia system. You can call up the Digital Operator's Manual via the multimedia system. i You will not incur any costs when calling up the Digital Operator's Manual. The Digital Operator's Manual works without connecting to the Internet. There are three ways to access the topics of the Digital Operator's Manual: RVisual search The visual search allows you to explore your vehicle "virtually". Starting from either the vehicle exterior view or interior view, you can access many of the different topics covered by the Digital Operator's Manual. To access the vehicle interior section, select the "Vehicle interior" view. RKeyword search The keyword search allows you to search for a keyword by entering characters. RContents You can select individual sections in the contents. i The Digital Operator's Manual is deactivated for safety reasons while driving. Operation Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual Press the Ø button in the center console. The overview relating to the vehicle appears. X Select the "Operator's Manual" menu item by turning 3 or pressing 7 the controller. X Confirm 7 the message about the warning and safety notes. The basic menu for the Digital Operator's Manual appears. X Operating the Digital Operator's Manual General notes Please observe the information about the operation of the controller (Y page 232). Content pages The content pages can be accessed by means of a visual search, a keyword search or using the contents. To scroll forwards/backwards: turn 3 the controller. X To display in full-screen or animation: slide 8 the controller to the left :. X To select information texts or save bookmarks: slide 9 the controller to the right ;. X To select a link: slide 6 the controller downwards =. X To exit a content page: select % symbol ?. X To call up the basic menu of the Digital Operator's Manual: select Þ symbol A. X To switch functions to the multimedia system using the buttons on the center console: press the $, %, Õ or Ø button. The selected menu appears. The Digital Operator's Manual remains open in the background. X 23 24 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts Introduction Protecting the environment General notes H Environmental note Daimler's declared policy is one of comprehensive environmental protection. The objectives are for the natural resources that form the basis of our existence on this planet to be used sparingly and in a manner that takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into account. You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner. Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tire wear are affected by these factors: Roperating conditions of your vehicle Ryour personal driving style You can influence both factors. You should bear the following in mind: Operating conditions: Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con- sumption. make sure that the tire pressures are correct. Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. Rremove roof racks once you no longer need them. Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals. Ralways have service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Personal driving style: Ralways Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle is stationary. Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. frequent, sudden acceleration and braking. Ravoid Rchange gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. off the engine in stationary traffic. Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consumption. Rswitch Environmental concerns and recommendations Wherever the Operator's Manual requires you to dispose of materials, first try to regenerate or reuse them. Observe the relevant environmental rules and regulations when disposing of materials. In this way you will help to protect the environment. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts H Environmental note Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. They are covered by the same Limited Warranty entitlements as new parts. ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi- ces, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: Rdoors Rdoor pillars Rdoor sills Rseats Rcockpit Rinstrument cluster Rcenter console Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint systems. Have aftermarket accessories installed at a qualified specialist workshop. You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant Service and vehicle operation Service and vehicle operation Warranty Operator's Manual The Limited Warranty for your vehicle applies in accordance with the warranty terms and conditions in the Service and Warranty Information booklet. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will replace and repair all factory-installed parts in accordance with the following warranty terms and conditions: RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty REmission System Warranty REmission Performance Warranty RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon laws) Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories warranties. These are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Vehicle equipment i Should you lose your Service and Warranty i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of this Operator's Manual going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safetyrelevant systems and functions. The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The original purchase agreement lists all systems installed in your vehicle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle. Information booklet, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. The new Service and Warranty Information booklet will be posted to you. Information for customers in California Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price, if after a reasonable number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following occurs: (1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is likely to cause Z Introduction systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to strict quality control. Every part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should be used. More than 300,000 different genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are available for Mercedes-Benz models. All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts delivery centers provide quick and reliable parts service. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts (Y page 318). 25 Introduction 26 Service and vehicle operation death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times, and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing of the need for its repair. (2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than category (1) has been subject to repair four or more times and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz in writing of the need for its repair. (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days. Please send your written notice to: Customer Assistance Center Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC 3 Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 Maintenance Always bring the Maintenance Booklet with you when taking the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Your customer service advisor will enter every service into your Maintenance Booklet on your behalf. Roadside Assistance The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program offers technical help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) (USA) 1-800-387-0100 (Canada) For additional information, refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" section in the Service and Warranty Booklet (Canada). You will find both in the vehicle document wallet. Change of address or change of ownership In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of Address Change" in the Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service Center (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contacting you in a timely manner should the need arise. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all literature in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. If you have purchased a used car, please send us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in the Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. Vehicle operation outside the USA and Canada When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe the following points: RService facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available. RLead-free fuel for vehicles with a catalytic converter may not be available. Leaded fuel can cause damage to the catalytic converter. RThe fuel may have a considerably lower octane number. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage. Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For details, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the following addresses. In the USA Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Operating safety Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or any required repairs carried out, this can result in malfunctions or system failures. There is a risk of an accident. Always have the prescribed service/maintenance work as well as any required repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire. When driving on an unpaved road or off-road, check the vehicle underside regularly. In particular, remove trapped plant parts or other flammable material. Contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately if damage is detected. G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their function and/or the function of other networked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function as intended and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Never tamper with the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. You should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high curb or an unpaved road Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a curb, a speed bump or a pothole in the road Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or parts of the chassis In situations like this, the body, the underbody, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no longer withstand the loads they are designed to. If the underbody paneling is damaged, combustible materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can gather between the underbody and the underbody paneling. If these materials come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, they can catch fire. In such situations, have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If on continuing your journey you notice that driving safety is impaired, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Declarations of conformity USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the two following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment." Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device." Z Introduction Operating safety 27 28 Operating safety Introduction Diagnostic connector The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic equipment at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it may affect the operation of vehicle systems. As a result, the operating safety of the vehicle could be affected. There is a risk of an accident. Only connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, which is approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another. ! If the engine is switched off and equipment on the diagnostics connection is used, the starter battery may discharge. Connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions test during the main inspection. Qualified specialist workshop An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a qualified specialist workshop. It has the necessary specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out the work required on your vehicle. This is especially the case for work relevant to safety. Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet. Always have the following work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center: Rwork relevant to safety Rservice and maintenance work Rrepair work Ralterations, installation work and modifications Rwork on electronic components Correct use If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information when driving your vehicle: Rthe safety notes in this manual Rtechnical data for the vehicle Rtraffic rules and regulations Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the problem diagnosed and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem again with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if necessary, contact us at one of the following addresses. In the USA Customer Assistance Center Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC 3 Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada Customer Relations Department Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Reporting safety defects USA only: Data storage Limited Warranty ! Observe the notes in this Operator's Manual regarding the correct operation of your vehicle and possible damage to the vehicle. Damage to the vehicle which is caused by violation of these notes is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or the new or used-vehicle warranty. QR code for rescue card The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card contains the most important information about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric cables. You can find more information under www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code. Data storage Data storage A wide range of electronic components in your vehicle contain data memories. These data memories temporarily or permanently store technical information about: Rthe vehicle's operating state Rincidents Rmalfunctions In general, this technical information documents the state of a component, a module, a system or the surroundings. These include, for example: Roperating conditions of system components. For example, fluid levels Rthe vehicle's status messages and those of its individual components, e.g. number of wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration in movement, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal position Rmalfunctions and defects in important system components, e.g. lights, brakes Rvehicle reactions and operating conditions in special driving situations, e.g. air bag deployment, intervention of stability control systems Rambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature This data is of an exclusively technical nature and can be used to: Rassist in recognizing and rectifying malfunctions and defects Ranalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an accident Roptimize vehicle functions The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's movements. When your vehicle is serviced, technical information can be read from the event data memory and malfunction data memory. Services include, for example: Rrepair services Rservice processes Rwarranties Rquality assurance The vehicle is read out by employees of the service network (including the manufacturer) using special diagnostic testers. More detailed information is obtained from it, if required. Z Introduction The following text is reproduced as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov 29 Introduction 30 Data storage After a malfunction has been rectified, the information is deleted from the malfunction memory or is continually overwritten. When operating the vehicle, situations are conceivable in which this technical data, in connection with other information (if necessary, under consultation with an authorized expert), could be traced to a person. Examples include: Raccident reports Rdamage to the vehicle Rwitness statements Further additional functions that have been contractually agreed upon with the customer allow certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehicle as well. The additional functions include, for example, vehicle location in case of an emergency. COMAND/Mercedes me connect If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or Mercedes me connect, additional data about the vehicle's operation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, and the location of the vehicle is compiled through COMAND or the Mercedes me connect system. For additional information, please refer to the COMAND User Manual or Digital Operator's Manual and/or the Mercedes me connect Terms and Conditions. Event data recorders This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data relating to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: RHow various systems in your vehicle were operating RWhether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened RHow far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed to read data that is recorded by an EDR, and special equipment is required. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the special equipment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data may be used in civil and criminal matters as a tool in accident reconstruction, accident claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel. MBUSA will not share EDR data with others without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the lessee. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law. Warning: The EDR is a component of the Restraint System Module. Tampering with, altering, modifying or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the Restraint System Module and other systems. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted. This means that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of February 2013, 13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs. RHow Information on copyright 31 Information on copyright Introduction General information Information on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle and its electronic components is available on the following website: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource Registered trademarks RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue- tooth SIG Inc. is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. RDolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarks of DOLBY Laboratories. RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered trademarks of Daimler AG. RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls. RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. RLogic7® is a registered trademark of Harman International Industries. RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. RSIRIUS® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio Inc. RHD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiquity Digital Corporation. RGracenote® is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc. RZAGAT Survey® and related brands are registered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC. RDTS™ Z 32 Cockpit At a glance Cockpit Function Page : Steering wheel paddle shifters 137 ; Combination switch 102 = Instrument cluster 33 ? Horn A DIRECT SELECT lever 131 B Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning display C Overhead control panel Function Page D Climate control systems 111 E Ignition lock 123 F Adjusts the steering wheel G Cruise control lever 151 H Electric parking brake 143 I Light switch 101 164 J Diagnostics connection 39 K Opens the hood 96 28 260 Instrument cluster 33 At a glance Instrument cluster Function : ; Function Page Speedometer with segments Warning and indicator lamps: L Low-beam headlamps T Parking lamps K High-beam headlamps ÷ ESP® Electric parking brake applied (red) F (USA only) ! (Canada only) ! Electric parking brake (yellow) · Distance warning å ESP® OFF ! ABS malfunctioning Braking $ (USA only) J (Canada only) 178 #! Turn signals 102 102 102 102 223 226 226 229 223 222 221 Page = Multifunction display 181 ? Tachometer 6 Restraint system ü Seat belt not fastened M SPORT handling mode (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) R Rear fog lamp ; Check Engine h Tire pressure monitor 178 41 220 Coolant temperature gauge Warning and indicator lamps: ? Coolant too hot/cold 179 A B C 224 102 226 230 227 Fuel level indicator Warning and indicator lamps: æ Reserve fuel 226 Instrument cluster lighting 178 34 Multifunction steering wheel At a glance Multifunction steering wheel Function : Multifunction display ; Multimedia system display = ~ Rejects or ends a call 6 Makes or accepts a call Further telephone functions W X Adjusts volume 8 Mute ? Switches on voiceoperated control for navigation or the Voice Control System Function Page 181 185 i In vehicles with multimedia system Audio 20 you can find further information: Ron the multimedia system in the Digital Operator's Manual Ron voice-controlled navigation in the manufacturer's operating instructions ? ò Opens the menu list 9 : Selects a menu a Confirms the selection % Back Operates the on-board computer ? Switches off voiceoperated control for navigation or the Voice Control System i In vehicles with multimedia system Page 179 COMAND you can find further information: Ron the multimedia system in the Digital Operator's Manual Ron the DVD changer or single DVD drive in the Digital Operator's Manual Ron the Voice Control System in the separate operating instructions Center console 35 Center console At a glance Center console, upper section Function : Multimedia system; see the Digital Operator's Manual ; c Seat heating Mercedes-AMG vehicles: AMG adaptive sport suspension system (left side) Mercedes-AMG vehicles: adjusts the exhaust flap of the AMG performance exhaust system (right side) = c Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Function Page 95 161 128 164 Page ? è ECO start/stop function 126 A £ Hazard warning lamps 103 B PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamps 41 C DYNAMIC SELECT button å Mercedes-AMG vehicles: ESP® 129 66 36 Center console At a glance Center console, lower section Function : Page Ashtray Cigarette lighter Socket Stowage compartment 246 247 247 239 ; Cup holder 244 = Cup holder 244 Function ? Stowage compartment with Media Interface A Multimedia system controller; see Digital Operator's Manual Page 239 37 At a glance Center console i Mercedes-AMG vehicles Function Function Page Page ? DYNAMIC SELECT controller 130 Ashtray Cigarette lighter Socket Stowage compartment 246 247 247 239 A Cup holder 244 B Stowage compartment with Media Interface 239 ; Selector lever 133 C = Manual gearshifting (permanent setting) Multimedia system controller; see Digital Operator's Manual 137 : 38 Door control panel At a glance Door control panel Function Function Page Page : Opens the door 76 B ; % & Unlocks/locks the vehicle W Opens/closes the side windows 83 76 C = r45= Saves the seat and exterior mirror settings 100 n Activates/deactivates the override feature for the side windows in the rear passenger compartment 60 ? Adjusts the seats electrically 93 q Opens the trunk 81 A 7Zö\ Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors in/out electrically 97 D Overhead control panel 39 At a glance Overhead control panel Function Function Page : u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off 104 ; p Switches the righthand reading lamp on/off 104 = | Switches the front interior lighting/automatic interior lighting control off 104 ? ï MB Info call button 250 A Rear view mirror 98 B Sets the compass 258 C Buttons for the garage door opener 255 D F Breakdown assistance call button 250 Page E G Emergency call/SOS button 249 F Eyeglasses compartment 240 G 3 Opens/closes the panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel with roller sunblinds 87 H c Switches the front interior lighting on 104 I p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off 104 Occupant safety 40 Safety Panic alarm To activate: press and hold the ! button : for approx. one second. A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed. X To deactivate: press ! button : again. or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS‑GO X Press the Start/Stop button. The SmartKey must be in the vehicle. X Occupant safety Introduction to the restraint system The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. The restraint system can also reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants are subjected during an accident. The restraint system comprises: RSeat belt system RAir bags RChild restraint system RChild seat securing systems The components of the restraint system work in conjunction with each other. They can only deploy their protective function if, at all times, all vehicle occupants: Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly (Y page 43) Rhave the seat and head restraint adjusted properly (Y page 91) As the driver, you also have to make sure that the steering wheel is adjusted correctly. Observe the information relating to the correct driver's seat position (Y page 91). You also have to make sure that an air bag can inflate properly if deployed (Y page 45). An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag increases the level of protection for vehicle occupants in the event of an accident. For example, if, in the event of an accident, the protection offered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bags are not deployed. When an accident occurs, only the air bags that increase protection in that particular accident situation are deployed. However, seat belts and air bags generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. Information on restraint system operation can be found under "Triggering of the Emergency Tensioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 52). See "Children in the vehicle" for information on children traveling with you in the vehicle as well as on child restraint systems (Y page 54). Important safety notes G WARNING Modifications to the restraint system may cause it to no longer work as intended. The restraint system may then not perform its intended protective function and may fail in an accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Never modify parts of the restraint system. Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic components or their software. If it is necessary to modify components of the restraint system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center for details. USA only: for further information contact our Customer Assistance Center at 1-800 FOR-MERCEDES (1‑800‑367‑6372). Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use driving aids which have been approved specifically for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Restraint system warning lamp The functions of the restraint system are checked after the ignition is switched on and at regular intervals while the engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in good time. The 6 restraint system warning lamp on the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are in operational readiness. A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint system warning lamp: Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switched on Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with the engine running Rlights up again while the engine is running G WARNING If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or may not deploy as intended during an accident. This can affect for example the Emergency Tensioning Device or the air bag. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Have the restraint system checked and repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front air bag. RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 seconds, subsequently both indicator lamps are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy in the event of an accident. RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front-passenger front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. Depending on the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger front air bag must either be deactivated or enabled; see the following points. You must make sure of this both before and during a journey. RChildren in a child restraint system: whether the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or deactivated depends on the installed child restraint system, and the age and size of the child. Therefore, be sure to observe the notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 47) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 54). There you will also find instructions on rearward and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat. RAll other persons: depending on the classification of the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or deactivated (Y page 47). Be sure to observe the notes on "Seat belts“ (Y page 41) and "Air bags" (Y page 45). There you can also find information on the correct seat position. Seat belts Introduction PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp : and PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ; are part of the Occupant Classification System (OCS). Seat belts are the most effective means of restricting the movement of vehicle occupants in the event of an accident or the vehicle rolling over. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior or being ejected from the vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle Z 41 Safety Occupant safety Safety 42 Occupant safety occupant in the best position in relation to the air bag. The seat belt system comprises: RSeat belts REmergency Tensioning Devices for the front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear RSeat belt force limiters for the front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outlet quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extracted any further. The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens the seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt close against the body. However it does not pull the vehicle occupant back in the direction of the backrest. The Emergency Tensioning Device does not correct an incorrect seat position or the routing of an incorrectly fastened seat belt. When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps to reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant. The seat belt force limiters for the front seats are synchronized with the front air bags, which absorb part of the deceleration force. This can reduce the force exerted on the vehicle occupants during an accident. ! If the front-passenger seat is not occupied, do not engage the seat belt tongue in the buckle on the front-passenger seat. Otherwise, in the event of an accident the Emergency Tensioning Device and the side impact air bag, in addition to other systems, may be triggered and have to be replaced. Important safety notes The use of seat belts and child restraint systems is required by law in: Rall 50 states Rthe U.S. territories Rthe District of Columbia Rall Canadian provinces Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle occupants should correctly fasten their seat belts before starting the journey. G WARNING If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. An incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. The components of the restraint system work in conjunction with each other. They can only deploy their protective function if, at all times, all vehicle occupants: Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly (Y page 43) Rhave the seat and head restraint adjusted properly (Y page 91) G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. G WARNING Persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without an additional and suitable restraint system. If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. An incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. For this reason, always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable additional restraint systems. Occupant safety G WARNING The seat belts may not perform their intended protective function if: Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely dirty, bleached or dyed Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia reels have been modified. Seat belts may be damaged in an accident, although the damage may not be visible, e.g. due to splinters of glass. Modified or damaged seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices could accidentally trigger or fail to deploy when necessary. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt anchorages and inertia reels. Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn out and clean. Following an accident, have the seat belts checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Only use seat belts that have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Sports seat or AMG Performance seat: this seat is designed for the standard three-point seat belt. If you install another multi-point seat belt, e.g. sport or racing seat belts, the restraint system cannot provide the best level of protection. G WARNING If you feed seat belts through the opening in the seat backrest, the seat backrest may be damaged or may even break in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Only use the standard three-point seat belt. Never modify the seat belt system. Proper use of the seat belts Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 42). All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seat belt correctly before beginning the journey. Also make sure that all vehicle occupants are always wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicle is in motion. When fastening the seat belt, always make sure that: Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is inserted only into the belt buckle belonging to that seat Rthe seat belt is pulled tight across your body Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. Rthe seat belt is not twisted Only then can the forces which occur be distributed over the area of the belt. Rthe shoulder section of the belt is routed across the center of your shoulder The shoulder section of the seat belt should not touch your neck or be routed under your arm or behind your back. Where possible, adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height. Rthe lap belt is taut and passes across your lap as low down as possible The lap belt must always be routed across your hip joints and not across your abdomen. This applies particularly to pregnant women. If necessary, push the lap belt down to your hip joint and pull it tight using the shoulder section of the belt. Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, pointed or fragile objects If you have such items located on or in your clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, store these in a suitable place. Ronly one person is using a seat belt Z Safety If a child younger than twelve years old and under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child. Ralways observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 54) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions Ralways observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant classification system (OCS)". (Y page 47) 43 Occupant safety Safety 44 Infants and children must never travel sitting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event of an accident, they could be crushed between the vehicle occupant and seat belt. Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants Also ensure that there are never objects between a person and the seat, e.g. cushions. Seat belts are only intended to secure and restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the "Loading guidelines" for securing objects, luggage or loads (Y page 239). Fastening and adjusting the seat belts Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 42) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (Y page 43). The shoulder section of the seat belt must always be routed across the center of the shoulder. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary. X To raise: slide the belt outlet up. The belt outlet will engage in various positions. X To lower: hold belt outlet release = and slide the belt outlet down. X Let go of belt outlet release = in the desired position and make sure that the belt outlet engages. All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are equipped with a special seat belt retractor to securely fasten child restraint systems in the vehicle. Further information can be found under "Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 55). Releasing seat belts ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfill their protective function and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Press the release button in the belt buckle, hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the belt back. Basic illustration Adjust the seat (Y page 91). The seat backrest must be in an almost upright position. X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt outlet. X Engage seat belt tongue ; in belt buckle :. X If necessary, pull up on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body. X Belt warning for the driver and front passenger The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts. It may light up continuously or flash. In addition, there may be a warning tone. Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt has already been fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds each time the engine is started. If the front doors are closed and the driver's or front-passenger seat belt has not been fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up again after the six seconds. As soon as the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are fastened or a front door is opened again, the 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out. If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after the engine is started, an additional warning tone will sound. The warning tone switches off after six Occupant safety Air bags Introduction The installation point of an air bag can be recognized by the AIRBAG marking. An air bag complements the correctly fastened seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. The air bag provides additional protection in applicable accident situations. Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The different air bag systems function independently from one another (Y page 52). However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities. It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury caused by an air bag due to the high speed at which the air bag must be deployed. Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not sit in the correct seat position, the air bag cannot protect as intended and could even cause additional injury when deployed. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. To avoid hazardous situations, always make sure that all of the vehicle's occupants: Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly, including pregnant women Rare sitting correctly and maintain the greatest possible distance to the air bags Rfollow the following instructions Always make sure that there are no objects between the air bag and the vehicle's occupants. RAdjust the seats properly before beginning your journey. Always make sure that the seat is in an almost upright position. The center of the head restraint must support the head at about eye level. RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats as far back as possible. The driver's seat position must allow the vehicle to be driven safely. ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside. This allows the air bag to be fully deployed. RAlways lean against the backrest while driving. Do not lean forward or lean against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the air bags. RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dashboard, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the air bag. RFor this reason, always secure persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint systems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot be worn correctly. If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also observe the following notes: RAlways secure children under twelve years of age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable child restraint systems. RChild restraint systems should be installed on the rear seats. ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat when the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit, the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated (Y page 41). RAlways observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 47) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 54) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Z Safety seconds or once the driver's seat belt is fastened. If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) once and the driver's and frontpassenger seat belts are not fastened, a warning tone sounds. A warning tone also sounds with increasing intensity for 60 seconds or until the driver or front passenger have fastened their seat belts. If the driver or front passenger unfasten their seat belts during the journey, the seat belt warning is activated again. 45 Safety 46 Occupant safety Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an air bag from functioning correctly. Before starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make sure that: Rthere are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an air bag Rthere are no objects between the seat, door and B-pillar Rthere are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side windows, rear side trim or side walls Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place G WARNING If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer function correctly. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects to it. G WARNING Sensors to control the air bags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not performed correctly to the doors or door paneling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the function of the sensors being impaired. The air bags might therefore not function properly anymore. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. Always have work on the doors or door paneling carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Front air bags ! Do not place heavy objects on the front- passenger seat. This could cause the system to identify the seat as being occupied. In the event of an accident, the restraint systems on the front-passenger side may be triggered and have to be replaced. Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the steering wheel. Front-passenger front air bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove box. When deployed, the front air bags offer additional head and thorax protection for the occupants in the front seats. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp informs you about the status of the frontpassenger front air bag (Y page 41). The front-passenger front air bag will only deploy if: Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensor readings, detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied (Y page 47). The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is not lit (Y page 48) Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a high accident severity Knee bags Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steering column and front-passenger knee bag ; under the glove box. The driver's and front-passenger knee bags are triggered together with the front air bags. Occupant safety Side impact air bags G WARNING Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or prevent deployment of the air bags integrated into the seats. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. In addition, the operation of the occupant classification system (OCS) could be adversely affected. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the respective seat by Mercedes-Benz. Front side impact air bags : and rear side impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer bolster of the seat backrest. When deployed, the side impact air bag offers additional thorax protection. It also offers additional pelvis protection for occupants in the front seats. However, it does not protect the: RHead RNeck RArms If the restraint system control unit detects a side impact, the side impact air bag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side deploys under the following conditions: Rthe OCS system detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied or Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle, the side impact air bag on the front-passenger side deploys if an appropriate accident situation occurs. In this case, deployment is independent of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or not. Window curtain air bags Safety The driver's and front-passenger knee bags offer additional thigh, knee and lower leg protection for the occupants in the front seats. 47 Window curtain air bags : are integrated into the side of the roof frame and deployed in the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar. When deployed, the window curtain air bag enhances the level of protection for the head. However, it does not protect the chest or arms. If the restraint system control unit detects a side impact, the window curtain air bag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. If the system determines that they can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be deployed in other accident situations (Y page 52). Occupant Classification System (OCS) Introduction The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the person in the front-passenger seat. Depending on that result, the front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag are either enabled or deactivated. The system does not deactivate: Rthe side impact air bag Rthe window curtain air bag Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices Z 48 Occupant safety Safety Requirements To be classified correctly, the front passenger must sit: Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly Rin an almost upright position with their back against the seat backrest Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possible If the front passenger does not observe these conditions, OCS may produce a false classification, e.g. because the front passenger: Rtransfers their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised from the seat cushion If it is absolutely necessary to install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the correct positioning of the child restraint system. Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. a cushion. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the frontpassenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be subjected to a load by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function correctly. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Occupant Classification System operation (OCS) : PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp ; PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp The indicator lamps inform you whether the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated or enabled. X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, or turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. The system carries out self-diagnostics. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds. The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front air bag. RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 seconds, subsequently both indicator lamps are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy in the event of an accident. RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front-passenger front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. If the status of the front-passenger front air bag changes while the vehicle is in motion, an air bag display message appears in the instrument cluster (Y page 202). When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always pay attention to the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp. Be aware of the status of the front-passenger front air bag both before and during the journey. G WARNING If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the frontpassenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: Rthe classification of the person in the front- passenger seat is correct and the front- passenger front air bag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved back as far back as possible. Rthe person is seated correctly. Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front-passenger front air bag is correct. G WARNING If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front-passenger front air bag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the air bag. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that the front-passenger front air bag has been deactivated. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE FRONT AIRBAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the child can occur. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp stays off, do not install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. You can find more information on OCS under "Problems with the Occupant Classification System" (Y page 51). G WARNING If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and you position the front-passenger seat too close to the dashboard, in the event of an accident, the child could: Rcome into contact with the vehicle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example Rbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt sash guide. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt sash guide and the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. If OCS determines that: front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated. RThe front-passenger seat is occupied by a child of up to twelve months old, in a standard child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. But even in the case of a twelve-month-old child, in a standard child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp can go out after the system self-test. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is activated. The result of the classification is dependent on, among other factors, the child restraint system and the child's stature. It is recommended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. RThe front-passenger seat is occupied by a person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after the system self-test depending on the result of the classification or, alternatively, goes out. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, move the front-passenger seat RThe Z 49 Safety Occupant safety Safety 50 Occupant safety as far back as possible. Alternatively, a person of smaller stature can sit on a rear seat. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature should not use the front-passenger seat. RThe front-passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person of adult stature, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp goes out after the system self-test. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is activated. If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 54). When the Occupant Classification System (OCS) is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint system warning lamp on the instrument cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously. The frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated in this case and does not deploy during an accident. Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized MercedesBenz Center for this purpose. If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the seat cushion are damaged, have the necessary repair work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat accessories that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not mean that the front-passenger front air bag will also deploy. The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the occupant on the front-passenger seat. Depending on that result, the front-passenger front air bag is either enabled or deactivated. Self-check G DANGER If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do not both light up during the self-test, the system is malfunctioning. The front-passenger front air bag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with high deceleration. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. In this case the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the self-test, the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident. In this case, the front-passenger front air bag cannot perform its intended protective function, e.g. when a person is seated in the frontpassenger seat. That person could, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: Rthe classification of the person in the front- passenger seat is correct and the frontpassenger front air bag is enabled or deactivated in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat Rthe person is seated properly with a correctly fastened seatbelt Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit when it should not, the frontpassenger seat must not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat. Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could affect OCS operation. This could result in the front-passenger air bag not functioning as intended during an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the frontpassenger seat. The backrest of the forwardfacing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the backrest of the front-passenger seat. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. After the self-test, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp displays the status of the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 48). If the front-passenger front air bag is enabled, the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up for 60 seconds and then goes out. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp displays the status of the front-passenger front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. For more information about the OCS, see "Problems with the Occupant Classification System" (Y page 51). Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 50). Z 51 Safety Occupant safety 52 Occupant safety Safety Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The PASSENGER AIR The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incorBAG OFF indicator lamp rect. lights up and remains lit, X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the person even though the fronton the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 48). passenger seat is occuX If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the frontpied by an adult or a perpassenger seat may not be used. son of a stature correX Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedessponding to that of an Benz Center. adult. The PASSENGER AIR OCS is malfunctioning. BAG OFF indicator lamp X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child does not light up and/or seat. does not stay on. X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on The front-passenger seat the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the is: forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary, Runoccupied adjust the position of the front-passenger seat. Roccupied by the weight of a child up to X Make sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted. twelve months old in a X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat child restraint system belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the child restraint system being pulled too tightly. X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system. Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the child restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accordingly. X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the seat. X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is recommended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized MercedesBenz Center. Deployment of Emergency Tensioning Devices and air bags Important safety notes G WARNING The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has been deployed. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a deployed air bag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. G WARNING A deployed air bag no longer offers any protection and cannot provide the intended protection in an accident. There is an increased risk of injury. Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have a deployed air bag replaced. It is important for your safety and that of your passenger to have deployed air bags replaced and to have any malfunctioning air bags repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags continue to perform their protective function for the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash. G WARNING Emergency Tensioning Devices that have deployed pyrotechnically are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Have pyrotechnically triggered Emergency Tensioning Devices replaced immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered or air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang, and some powder may also be released. The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard, but it may cause short-term breathing difficulties in people with asthma or other respiratory problems. Provided it is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties. Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. National guidelines must be observed during disposal. In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ Perchlorate/index.cfm. Method of operation During the first stage of a collision, the restraint system control unit evaluates important physical data relating to vehicle deceleration or acceleration, such as: Rduration Rdirection Rintensity Based on the evaluation of this data, the restraint system control unit triggers the Emergency Tensioning Devices during a head-on or rear-end collision. An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be triggered, if: Rthe ignition is switched on Rthe components of the restraint system are operational. You can find further information under "Restraint system warning lamp" (Y page 41) Rthe seat belt buckle tongue has engaged in the belt buckle of the respective front seat The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the rear passenger compartment are triggered independently of the lock status of the seat belts. If the restraint system control unit detects a more severe accident, further components of the restraint system are activated independently of each other in certain frontal collision situations: RFront air bags as well as driver's and frontpassenger knee bags RWindow curtain air bag, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt Depending on the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger front air bag is either disabled or enabled. The front-passenger front air bag can be deployed in an accident only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (Y page 41). Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. At the first deployment threshold the front air bag fills with gas. If the second deployment threshold is then reached within a few milliseconds, the front air bag is filled with the maximum quantity of gas. The activation threshold of the Emergency Tensioning Devices and the air bags is determined by evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration which occurs at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. Deployment should take place in good time at the start of the collision. The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the direction of the force are essentially determined by: Rthe distribution of forces during the collision Rthe collision angle Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle Rthe characteristics of the object with which the vehicle has collided Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred do not play a deciZ 53 Safety Occupant safety Safety 54 Children in the vehicle sive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor do they provide an indication of air bag deployment. The vehicle can be deformed considerably, without an air bag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of deceleration is not high. Conversely, air bags may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. This is the case if, for example, very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body members are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs as a result. If the restraint system control unit detects a side impact or if the vehicle rolls over, the applicable components of the restraint system are deployed independently of each other depending on the apparent type of accident. RSide impact air bags on the side where the impact takes place, independently of the Emergency Tensioning Device and the use of the seat belt on the driver's seat and outer seats in the second row The side impact air bag on the frontpassenger side deploys under the following conditions: - the OCS system detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied or - the seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat RWindow curtain air bag on the side of impact, independently of the use of the seat belt and independently of whether the frontpassenger seat is occupied REmergency Tensioning Devices, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection in this situation RWindow curtain air bags on the driver's and front-passenger side in certain situations when the vehicle rolls over, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The different air bag systems work independently of each other. How the air bag system works is determined by the severity of the accident detected, especially the vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the apparent type of accident: RHead-on collision RSide impact RRollover Automatic measures after an accident Immediately after an accident, the following measures are implemented, depending on the type and severity of the impact: Rthe hazard warning lamps are switched on Rthe emergency lighting is activated Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked Rthe front side windows are lowered Rthe engine is switched off and the fuel supply is cut off Rvehicles with Mercedes me connect: automatic emergency call Children in the vehicle Important safety notes Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat. Children are generally better protected there. If a child younger than twelve years old and under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child. Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes in this section in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Ralways observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant classification system (OCS)". (Y page 47) Children in the vehicle If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshift the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. G WARNING If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If the child restraint system is subjected to direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Children may burn themselves on these parts, particularly on the metal parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury. If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with you, always ensure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Protect it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, let it cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children. Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 42) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (Y page 43). A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 40 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where a three-point seat belt can be properly fastened without a booster seat. Special seatbelt retractor G WARNING If the seat belt is released while driving, the child restraint system will no longer be secured properly. The special seat belt retractor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot be immediately refastened. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate the special seat belt retractor and secure the child restraint system properly. All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driver's seat belt, are equipped with a special seat belt retractor. When activated, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belt cannot slacken once the child seat is secured. Installing a child restraint system: X Make sure you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt outlet. X Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle. Activating the special seat belt retractor: X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia reel retract it again. While the seat belt is retracting, you should hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt retractor is enabled. X Push the child restraint system down so that the seat belt is tight and does not loosen. Removing the child restraint system and deactivating the special seat belt retractor: X Make sure you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. X Press the release button of the seat belt buckle and guide the seat belt tongue back towards the belt sash guide. The special seat belt retractor is deactivated. Z Safety G WARNING 55 56 Children in the vehicle Safety Child restraint system The use of seat belts and child restraint systems is required by law in: Rall 50 states Rthe U.S. territories Rthe District of Columbia Rall Canadian provinces If you install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the center rear seat, the rear arm rest must be folded back as far as possible. You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. G WARNING If the child restraint system is installed incorrectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions and the notes on use. Please ensure, that the base of the child restraint system is always resting completely on the seat cushion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under or behind the child restraint system. Only use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with genuine covers. G WARNING If the child restraint system is installed incorrectly or is not secured, it can come loose in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be thrown about, striking vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always install child restraint systems properly, even if they are not being used. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. You will find further information on stowing objects, luggage or loads under "Loading guidelines" (Y page 239). G WARNING Child restraint systems or their securing systems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident can no longer protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Replace child restraint systems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident as soon as possible. Have the securing systems on the child restraint system checked at a qualified specialist workshop, before you install a child restraint system again. The securing systems of child restraint systems are: Rthe seat belt system Rthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings Rthe Top Tether anchorages If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child on the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the information on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 47). There you will also find information on deactivating the frontpassenger front air bag. All child restraint systems must meet the following standards: RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2 Confirmation that the child restraint system corresponds to the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system. This confirmation can also be found in the installation instructions that are included with the child restraint system. Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system. Children in the vehicle 57 G WARNING For LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems in which the child is secured using the safety belt integrated in the child restraint system, the maximum permissible weight of the child and child restraint system together is 73 lbs (33 kg). If the child and the child restraint system together weigh more than 73 lbs (33 kg), the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with integrated safety belt no longer offers sufficient protection. The LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing system may be overloaded, and the child may not be restrained in an accident, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. If the child and the child restraint system together weigh more than 73 lbs (33 kg), use only a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system in which the child is also secured with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available. Regularly check that the permissible gross weight of the child together with the child restraint system is still maintained. Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. Before every trip, make sure that the LATCHtype (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged correctly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings ! When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat belt for the middle seat does not get trapped. The seat belt could otherwise be damaged. X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings :. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) is a standardized securing system for specially designed child restraint systems on the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems are installed on the left and right of the rear seats. Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may also be used and can be installed using the vehicle's seat belt system. Install the child seat according to the manufacturer's instructions. Top Tether Introduction Top Tether provides an additional connection between the child restraint system secured with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) system and the vehicle. This helps reduce the risk of injury even further. If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt, this should always be used. Important safety notes G WARNING If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they could fold forwards in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. As a result, child restraint systems cannot perform their intended protective function. Rear seat backrests that are not locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Z Safety LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing system Children in the vehicle 58 Always lock rear seat backrests after installing a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock verification indicator. Adjust the rear seat backrests so that they are in an upright position. Safety If the rear backrest is not engaged and locked, the red lock verification indicator will be visible (Y page 242). Top Tether anchorages Vehicles without adjustable head restraints: X or X Top Tether belt with one belt strap: route Top Tether belt A centrally over head restraint :. Top Tether belt with two belt straps: route one Top Tether belt A to the left and one to the right past the side of head restraint :. All vehicles: Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with Top Tether. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. X Hook Top Tether hook ? of Top Tether belt A into Top Tether anchorage =. Make sure that: RTop Tether hook ? is hooked into Top Tether anchorage = as shown. RTop Tether belt A is not twisted. RTop Tether belt A is routed between the seat backrest and cargo compartment cover if the cargo compartment cover is installed. X X Tension Top Tether belt A. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. Vehicles with adjustable head restraints: X The Top Tether anchorage points are installed in the rear compartment behind the head restraints on the parcel shelf. X Press down the rear of cover ; in the direction of the arrow. Cover ; is raised slightly at the front. X Fold cover ; up. Vehicles with adjustable head restraints: X X Move head restraint : up. Route Top Tether belt A under head restraint : between the two head restraint bars. If necessary, move head restraint : back down again slightly . Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt A. Child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat General notes Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install the child restraint system on a rear seat. If it is absolutely necessary to install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 47). Children in the vehicle Rearward-facing child restraint system If it is absolutely necessary to install a rearwardfacing child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat, always make sure that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit (Y page 41) is the frontpassenger front air bag deactivated. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Forward-facing child restraint system If it is absolutely necessary to install a forwardfacing child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as possible. Fully retract the seat cushion length. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be subjected to a load by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forward and down from the vehicle belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt outlet and the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Child-proof locks Important safety notes G WARNING If children are traveling in the vehicle, they could: Ropen doors, thus endangering other people or road users Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always activate the child-proof locks and override feature if children are traveling in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Override feature for: rear doors (Y page 60) Rthe rear side windows (Y page 60) Rthe G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Rshift G WARNING If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Z Safety You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as a result of: Ran incorrectly categorized person in the frontpassenger seat Rthe unintentional deactivation of the frontpassenger front air bag Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child restraint system, e.g. too close to the dashboard 59 60 Pets in the vehicle Safety G WARNING If the child restraint system is subjected to direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Children may burn themselves on these parts, particularly on the metal parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury. If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with you, always ensure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Protect it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, let it cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Child-proof locks for the rear doors Override feature for the rear side windows X To activate/deactivate: press button :. If indicator lamp ; is lit, operation of the rear side windows is disabled. Operation is only possible using the switches in the driver's door. If indicator lamp ; is off, operation is possible using the switches in the rear compartment. Pets in the vehicle You secure each door individually with the childproof locks on the rear doors. A door secured with a child-proof lock cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened from the outside. X To activate: press the child-proof lock lever up in the direction of arrow :. X Make sure that the child-proof locks are working properly. X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock lever down in the direction of arrow ;. G WARNING If you leave animals unsupervised or unsecured in the vehicle, they may press buttons or switches, for instance. In this way, animals may: Ractivate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example Rswitch systems on or off and thereby endanger other road users Furthermore, unsecured animals may be flung around inside the vehicle in the event of an accident or abrupt steering or braking maneuver, and thereby injure vehicle occupants. There is a risk of accident and injury. Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle. Always secure animals properly when driving, for instance with a suitable pet carrier. Driving safety systems Overview of driving safety systems In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems: RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (Y page 61) RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 61) RActive Brake Assist (Y page 62) RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (Y page 64) REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) (Y page 67) RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 68) RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 68) Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are inattentive, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for maintaining the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for staying in lane. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. The driving safety systems described only work as effectively as possible when there is adequate contact between the tires and the road surface. Please pay special attention to the notes on tires, recommended minimum tire tread depths, etc. (Y page 291). In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible. The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out when the engine is running. ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph (8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you only brake gently. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 61). G WARNING If ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking characteristics would be severely affected. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 222) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 194). Braking If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal vigorously until the braking situation is over. X To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force. If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving. X BAS (Brake Assist System) ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) General information ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking. General information BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance. Z Safety Driving safety systems 61 Driving safety systems 62 Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- Safety tion (Y page 61). G WARNING If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. There is a risk of an accident. In an emergency braking situation, depress the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. Braking Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. X Active Brake Assist General information i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 61). Active Brake Assist consists of a distance warning function with an autonomous braking function and a situation-dependent brake boosting effect. Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with the vehicle traveling in front or reduce the effects of such a collision. If Active Brake Assist detects that there is a risk of collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. If you do not react to the visual collision warning or the warning tone, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situation, Active Brake Assist supports you with a situation-dependent brake boosting effect. Important safety notes Detection of hazardous situations can be particularly impaired if: RThere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors RThere is snow or heavy rain RThere is interference by other radar sources RThere are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages RA narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a motorcycle RA vehicle is traveling in front on a different line RYou are driving a new vehicle or servicing on the Active Brake Assist system has just been carried out Observe the important safety notes in the "Breaking-in notes" section (Y page 122). Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at low speeds where no visible damage to the front of the vehicle is apparent. Activating/deactivating Active Brake Assist is active after every ignition cycle. You can activate or deactivate Active Brake Assist (Y page 187) in the on-board computer. When deactivated, the distance warning function and the autonomous braking function are also deactivated. If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the assistance graphic display. Distance warning function General information The distance warning function can help you to minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. If the distance warning function detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (Y page 61). G WARNING The distance warning function does not react: Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering Rto Driving safety systems G WARNING The distance warning function cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, the distance warning function may: Rgive an unnecessary warning give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and do not rely solely on the distance warning function. Rnot Function Starting at a speed of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), the distance warning function warns you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound, and the · distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. X Brake immediately in order to increase the distance from the vehicle in front. or X Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so. Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the system to display a warning. With the help of the radar sensor system, the distance warning function can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), the distance warning function can also react to stationary obstacles, such as stopped or parked vehicles. Autonomous braking function If the driver does not react to the distance warning signal in a critical situation, Active Brake Assist can assist the driver with the autonomous braking function. The autonomous braking function: Rgives the driver more time to react to critical driving situations Rcan help the driver to avoid an accident or Rcan reduce the effects of an accident Vehicles without Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: the autonomous braking function is available in the following speed ranges: R4 - 65 mph (7 - 105 km/h) for moving objects R4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary objects Vehicles with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: the autonomous braking function is available in the following speed ranges: R4 - 124 mph (7 - 200 km/h) for moving objects R4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary objects Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the autonomous braking function to intervene. Situation-dependent braking assistance General information i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 61). With the help of the radar sensor system, Active Brake Assist can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. If Active Brake Assist detects a risk of collision with the vehicle in front, it calculates the brake pressure necessary to avoid a collision. If you apply the brakes forcefully, situation-dependent braking assistance adapts to the situation and automatically increases the brake pressure to a degree appropriate to the traffic situation. Situation-dependent braking assistance provides braking assistance in hazardous situations at speeds above 4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor technology to assess the traffic situation. Z Safety The distance warning function may not give warnings in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Always adapt your speed to suit the prevailing road and traffic conditions. 63 Safety 64 Driving safety systems Situation-dependent braking assistance is capable of reacting to moving objects that have already been detected as such at least once over the period of observation, up to vehicle speeds of around 155 mph (250 km/h). Situation-dependent braking assistance can also detect stationary objects, up to vehicle speeds of around 44 mph (70 km/h). X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will work normally again if: Ryou release the brake pedal Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle Situation-dependent braking assistance is then deactivated. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (Y page 61). G WARNING Active Brake Assist does not react: Rto persons, bicycles, motorcycles or animals Rto approaching vehicles Rto cross traffic Ron bends As a result, Active Brake Assist cannot intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be prepared to brake. G WARNING Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist might: Rintervene unnecessarily Rnot intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. Due to the nature of the system, complex but non-critical driving conditions may also cause Active Brake Assist to intervene. Even if Active Brake Assist is not available due to a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the brake system is still available with full brake boosting effect and BAS. ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) General notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 61). ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. power transmission between the tires and the road surface. If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilize the vehicle during braking. ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 61). ETS traction control is part of ESP®. On vehicles with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP®. Traction control brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example if the road surface is slippery on one side. In addition, more drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. Traction control remains active, even if you deactivate ESP®. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 61). G WARNING If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Driving safety systems Vehicles without 4MATIC: when towing your vehicle with the front axle raised, it is important that you observe the notes on ESP® (Y page 286). If the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up continuously, ESP® is deactivated. If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp and the å warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 223) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 194). Only use wheels with the recommended tire sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly. Characteristics of ESP® General information If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp goes out before beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically active. If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. If ESP® intervenes: ESP® Do not deactivate under any circumstances. X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. X ECO start/stop function The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically when the vehicle stops moving. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. ESP® remains in its previously selected status. Example: if ESP® was deactivated before the engine was switched off, ESP® remains deactivated when the engine is switched on again. Deactivating/activating ESP® (except Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 61). You can select between the following states of ESP®: RESP® RESP® is activated. is deactivated. G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction on loose surfaces. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. ! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an extended period with ESP® deactivated. You could otherwise damage the drivetrain. Deactivating/activating ESP® You can deactivate or activate ESP® via the onboard computer (Y page 187). ESP® deactivated: The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. ESP® activated: The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Z Safety Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. 65 66 Driving safety systems Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated ESP® If is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP®: Safety RESP® no longer improves driving stability. torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin. RTraction control is still activated. RActive Brake Assist is no longer available; nor is it activated if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP®. RSTEER CONTROL is no longer active. RESP® still provides support when you brake firmly. REngine In the following situations, it may be better to activate SPORT handling mode or deactivate ESP®: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel Ron specially designated roads when the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics are desired Driving in SPORT handling mode or without ESP® requires an extremely qualified and experienced driver. i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. Deactivating/activating ESP® (Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) ! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an Important safety notes Deactivating/activating ESP® i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- extended period with ESP® deactivated. You could otherwise damage the drivetrain. tion (Y page 61). You can select between the following states of ESP®: RESP® is activated. handling mode is activated. RESP® is deactivated. RSPORT G WARNING When SPORT handling mode is activated, there is a greater risk of skidding and accidents. Only activate SPORT handling mode in the situations described in the following. G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. To activate SPORT handling mode: briefly press button :. The M SPORT handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The SPORT handling mode message appears in the multifunction display. X To deactivate SPORT handling mode: briefly press button :. The M SPORT handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X Driving safety systems Characteristics of activated SPORT handling mode If SPORT handling mode is activated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP® only stabilizes the vehicle to a limited degree. When SPORT handling mode is activated: RESP® only improves driving stability to a limited degree. RTraction control is still activated. RThe engine's torque is only restricted to a limited degree and the drive wheels may start to spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction on loose surfaces. RESP® still provides support when you brake firmly. Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster does not flash. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability. torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction on loose surfaces. RTraction control is still activated. RActive Brake Assist is no longer available; nor is it activated if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP®. RESP® still provides support when you brake firmly. REngine ESP® trailer stabilization General information If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to swerve, ESP® assists you in this situation. ESP® slows the vehicle down by braking and limiting the engine output until the vehicle/trailer combination has stabilized. Important safety notes G WARNING If road and weather conditions are poor, trailer stabilization will not be able to prevent the vehicle/trailer combination from swerving. Trailers with a high center of gravity can tip over before ESP® can detect this. There is a risk of an accident. Always adapt your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions. If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer combination) begins to lurch, you can only stabilize the vehicle/trailer combination by depressing the brake firmly. ESP® trailer stabilization is active above speeds of about 65 km/h. ESP® trailer stabilization does not work if ESP® is deactivated or disabled because of a malfunction. EBD (electronic brake force distribution) General information EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 61). G WARNING If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Z Safety To deactivate ESP®: press button : until the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. The ÷ OFF message appears in the multifunction display. X To activate ESP®: briefly press button :. The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ ESP® ON message appears in the multifunction display. X 67 68 Protection against theft Safety You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Please observe the information on warning and indicator lamps (Y page 222) (Y page 222) as well as on display messages (Y page 196). ADAPTIVE BRAKE To activate with the SmartKey: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X To activate with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off and open the driver's door. X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. X When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been left inside the vehicle. i The immobilizer is always deactivated when you start the engine. In the event that the engine cannot be started (yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and offers increased braking comfort. In addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has the HOLD function (Y page 158) and hill start assist (Y page 126). STEER CONTROL General information ATA (anti-theft alarm system) STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilization. This steering assistance is provided in particular if: Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake Rthe vehicle begins to skid Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 61). No steering assistance is provided from STEER CONTROL, if: RESP® is malfunctioning steering is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electrical power steering. Rthe Protection against theft Immobilizer The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct SmartKey. To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system is armed after approximately 15 seconds. X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed and you open: Ra door Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key Rthe trunk lid Rthe hood Protection against theft X or 69 To stop the alarm with the SmartKey: press the % or & button on the SmartKey. The alarm is stopped. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 123). X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The alarm is stopped. X or Safety X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO: grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. The alarm is stopped. Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle. The alarm is stopped. The alarm is not stopped, even if you close the open door that triggered it, for example. X i If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, the Mercedes me connect emergency call system automatically sends a message to the Customer Center. This is done either by text message or data connection. The emergency call system sends the message or data provided that: Ryou have subscribed to the Mercedes me connect service Rthe Mercedes me connect service has been activated properly Rthe necessary mobile phone network is available Z 70 SmartKey SmartKey Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: the SmartKey may not be detected, e.g. when starting the engine using the Start/Stop button. SmartKey functions the vehicle's equipment Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Opening and closing Roperate Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position j the engine There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies for the Digital Vehicle Key if the "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect. Rstart G WARNING If you attach heavy or large objects to the SmartKey, the SmartKey could be unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This could cause the engine to be switched off. There is a risk of an accident. Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. ! Keep the SmartKey away from strong mag- netic fields. Otherwise, the remote control function could be affected. Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicinity of powerful electrical installations. Do not keep the SmartKey: Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function: do not keep the SmartKey in the trunk. Otherwise, : & To lock the vehicle ; F To open the trunk lid = % To unlock the vehicle If you do not open the vehicle within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking: Rthe vehicle is locked again. Rprotection against theft is reactivated. X To lock: press the & button. The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks: Rthe doors Rthe trunk lid Rthe fuel filler flap The turn signals flash once when unlocking and three times when locking. When the locator lighting is activated via the multimedia system, it lights up when it is dark after the vehicle is unlocked with the remote control; see Digital Operator's Manual. You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked. The audible signal can be activated and deactivated using the on-board computer (Y page 190). X To open the trunk lid automatically: press and hold the F button until the trunk lid opens (Y page 79). SmartKey KEYLESS-GO General notes Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a SmartKey in the vehicle. 71 Make sure that you do not touch the inner surface of the door handle. X Convenience closing feature: touch recessed sensor surface ; for an extended period. Further information on the convenience closing feature (Y page 84). You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the SmartKey with you. You can combine the functions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the & button on the SmartKey. The driver's door and the door at which the handle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance between the SmartKey and the corresponding door handle must not be greater than three feet (one meter). A check which periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey determines whether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example: Rwhen starting the engine Rwhile driving Rwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESS Rwhen the external door handles are touched Rduring convenience closing To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle. X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface : or ;. X X To unlock the trunk lid: pull trunk lid handle :. Deactivating and activating If you do not intend to use the vehicle for a longer period of time, you can deactivate KEYLESSGO. The SmartKey will then use very little power, thereby conserving battery power. For the purposes of activation/deactivation, the vehicle must not be nearby. X To deactivate: press the & button on the SmartKey twice in rapid succession. The indicator light on the SmartKey flashes twice briefly then one long flash, then KEYLESS-GO is deactivated (Y page 73). X To activate: press any button on the SmartKey. or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated features are available again. KEYLESS-GO start function General notes Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a SmartKey in the vehicle. Z Opening and closing Locking and unlocking SmartKey 72 Opening and closing Changing the settings of the locking system You can change the settings of the locking system. This means that only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel on your own. X To change the setting: press and hold the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery indicator lamp flashes twice (Y page 73). If the setting of the locking system is changed within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle The SmartKey now functions as follows: X To unlock: press the % button once. X To unlock centrally: press the % button twice. X To lock centrally: press the & button. The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as follows: X To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door. X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the front-passenger door or the rear door. X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor surface on one of the door handles. X To restore the factory settings: press and hold the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice (Y page 73). Mechanical key General notes If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door or the trunk lid, the antitheft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 68). There are several ways to turn off the alarm: To deactivate the alarm with the key: press the % or & button on the key. or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. or X To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESS-GO: press the Start/Stop button in the ignition lock. The SmartKey must be in the vehicle. or X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESSGO. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked automatically. X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X Removing the mechanical key Push release catch : in the direction of the arrow and at the same time remove mechanical key ; from the SmartKey. For further information about: RUnlocking the driver's door (Y page 77) RUnlocking the trunk (Y page 82) RLocking the vehicle (Y page 77) X Inserting the mechanical key X Push mechanical key ; completely into the SmartKey until it engages and release catch : is back in its basic position. SmartKey Important safety notes G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. National guidelines must be observed during disposal. In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/ HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Replacing the battery You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 72). X Press mechanical key ; into the opening in the SmartKey in the direction of the arrow until battery tray cover : opens. When doing so, do not hold cover : shut. X Remove battery tray cover :. X Checking the battery Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your palm until battery = falls out. X Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. X Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other contaminants. X Insert the front tabs of battery tray cover : and then press to close it. X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey (Y page 72). X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on the vehicle. X Press the & or % button. The battery is working properly if battery check lamp : lights up briefly. The battery is discharged if battery check lamp : does not light up briefly. X Change the battery (Y page 73). i If the SmartKey battery is checked within the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: X Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle i You can get a battery at any qualified specialist workshop. Z Opening and closing SmartKey battery 73 74 SmartKey Opening and closing Problems with the SmartKey Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You cannot lock or unlock the vehicle using the SmartKey. The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function: try to lock/unlock the vehicle again using the SmartKey's remote control function. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % or & button. If this does not work: X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 73) and replace it if necessary (Y page 73). X Unlock (Y page 77) or lock (Y page 77) the vehicle using the mechanical key. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function: try to lock/unlock the vehicle again using the SmartKey's remote control function. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % or & button. X If this does not work: Unlock (Y page 77) or lock (Y page 77) the vehicle using the mechanical key. X The SmartKey is faulty. X Unlock (Y page 77) or lock (Y page 77) the vehicle using the mechanical key. X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. You can no longer lock or The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. unlock the vehicle using X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 73) and replace it if necessary KEYLESS-GO. (Y page 73). If this does not work: X Unlock (Y page 77) or lock (Y page 77) the vehicle using the mechanical key. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. Unlock (Y page 77) or lock (Y page 77) the vehicle using the mechanical key. X SmartKey Problem 75 Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning. Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey. X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote control function: X Unlock (Y page 77) or lock (Y page 77) the vehicle using the mechanical key. X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low started using the Smart- X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior Key. lighting, and try to start the engine again. If this does not work: X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 281). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 282). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine cannot be started using the Start/ Stop button. The SmartKey is in the vehicle. The vehicle is locked. Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again. X The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 73) and replace it if necessary (Y page 73). If this does not work: X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. X You have lost a SmartKey. You have lost the mechanical key. Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well. X X X X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. If necessary, have the locks changed as well. Z Opening and closing X 76 Doors Doors Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: the vehicle's equipment Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Opening and closing Roperate Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position j the engine There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies for the Digital Vehicle Key if the "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect. Rstart You should preferably place luggage or loads in the cargo compartment. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 239). Unlocking and opening doors from the inside ! The side windows will not open/close if the battery is discharged or if the side windows have iced up. It will then not be possible to close the door. Do not attempt to force the door closed. You could otherwise damage the door or the side window. When a door is opened, the side window on that side opens slightly. When the door is closed, the side window closes again. To unlock and open a front door: pull door handle ;. If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up. The door is unlocked and opens. X To unlock a rear door: pull up locking knob :. The door is unlocked and can be opened. X To open a rear door: pull door handle ;. X You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. You can only open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 60). If the vehicle has previously been locked with the SmartKey from the outside, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 68). Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from the inside. This can be useful if you wish to lock the vehicle before pulling away, for example. X X To unlock: press button :. To lock: press button ;. If all the doors and the trunk lid are closed, the vehicle locks. Doors You could therefore lock yourself out if: Rthe vehicle is being pushed Rthe vehicle is being towed Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer You can also switch the automatic locking function on and off using the on-board computer (Y page 189). Unlocking the driver's door (mechanical key) If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (Y page 68). X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 72). X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. Automatic locking feature Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. The door is unlocked. X Turn the mechanical key back and remove it. X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey (Y page 72). X To deactivate: press and hold button : for approximately five seconds until a tone sounds. X To activate: press and hold button ; for approximately five seconds until a tone sounds. If you press one of the two buttons and do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has already been selected. The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning. X Locking the vehicle (mechanical key) If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key. X Open the driver's door. X Close the front-passenger door, the rear doors and the trunk lid. Z Opening and closing Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be locked or unlocked. You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. You can open the rear doors from inside the vehicle unless they are secured by the child-proof lock (Y page 60). If the vehicle has previously been locked with the SmartKey from the outside, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 68). If a locked door is opened from the inside, the previous unlock status of the vehicle will be taken into consideration if: Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking button for the central locking, or Rif the vehicle was locked automatically The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's door had been previously unlocked, only the door which has been opened from the inside is unlocked. 77 Trunk 78 Press the locking button on the driver’s door (Y page 76). X Check whether the locking knobs on the front-passenger door and the rear doors are still visible. Press down the locking knobs by hand, if necessary. X Close the driver's door. X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 72). X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. Opening and closing X G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey. ! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. X Turn the mechanical key back and remove it. X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lid are locked. X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey (Y page 72). X i If you lock the vehicle as described above, the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not armed. Trunk Important safety notes G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 325). You should preferably place luggage or loads in the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 239). Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You could otherwise lock yourself out. The trunk lid can be: Ropened and closed manually from outside Ropened automatically from outside Ropened automatically from inside Ropened from the inside using the emergency release Tailgate obstruction detection with reversing feature On vehicles with an EASY-PACK tailgate, the tailgate is equipped with automatic obstacle recognition with a reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts the tailgate when automatically opening or closing, this procedure is stopped. If the tailgate is stopped during the closing process, the tailgate automatically opens again slightly. The automatic obstruction detection with reversing feature is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attentiveness when opening and closing the tailgate. Trunk G WARNING 79 Closing The reversing feature does not respond: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closing movement The reversing feature cannot prevent someone from becoming trapped in these situations in particular. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If somebody becomes trapped: Rpress the F button on the SmartKey, or Rpull or press the remote operating switch on the driver's door or Rpress the closing button/STOP button in the tailgate or Rpull the handle on the tailgate Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is also possible to stop the closing process by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper. Opening/closing from outside Opening Pull down the trunk lid using handle :. Let the trunk lid drop into the lock. X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the & button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO. X X Opening automatically from outside Important safety notes G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open. ! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. i The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be found under "Vehicle data" (Y page 325). Press the % button on the SmartKey. Pull handle :. X Lift the trunk lid. X X Opening automatically You can open the trunk lid automatically using the SmartKey or the handle in the trunk lid. X Press and hold the F button on the SmartKey until the trunk lid opens. or X If the trunk lid is unlocked, pull the trunk lid handle and let it go again immediately. Z Opening and closing Rover 80 Trunk HANDS-FREE ACCESS Opening and closing Important safety notes G WARNING The vehicle exhaust system can become very hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury. Always ensure that you make the kicking movement only within the detection range of the sensors. ! If the SmartKey is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situations, for example, could lead to the unintentional opening of the trunk lid: Rwhen using an automatic car wash Rwhen using a power washer Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. i You can also deactivate KEYLESS-GO. Fur- ther information on deactivating and activating KEYLESS-GO (Y page 71). General notes With KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you can open the trunk lid without using your hands. This is useful if you have your hands full. To do this, make a kicking movement under the bumper with your foot. Observe the following points: RCarry your KEYLESS-GO key about your person. The SmartKey must be at the rear of the vehicle in the detection range of KEYLESSGO. RWhen making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing firmly on the ground and that there is sufficient clearance to the rear of the vehicle. You could otherwise lose your balance, for example on ice. RAlways ensure that you only make the kicking movement within the detection range of sensors :. RStand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the rear area while doing so. RDo not come into contact with the bumper while making the kicking movement. Otherwise, the sensors may not function correctly. RHANDS-FREE ACCESS does not function during engine start. RDirt caused by road salt or snow around sensors : may restrict functionality. Using the HANDS-FREE ACCESS with a prosthetic leg may restrict functionality. RIf a KEYLESS-GO key is at the rear of the vehicle in the detection range of KEYLESS-GO, HANDS-FREE ACCESS could be triggered. The trunk lid could thus be opened unintentionally, for example, when you: - set something down or lift something up behind the vehicle. - polish the rear of the vehicle. Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key about your person in these situations or in situations similar to these. This will prevent the unintentional opening of the trunk lid. Trunk 81 X To open: kick your foot into sensor detection zone : below the bumper. X If the trunk lid does not open after several attempts: wait at least ten seconds then move your leg under the bumper once again. X If you hold your foot under the bumper for too long, the trunk lid does not open. Repeat the leg movement more quickly if this occurs. Opening automatically from inside Important safety notes G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open. ! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be found under "Vehicle data" (Y page 325). Opening You can open the trunk lid from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked. To open: pull remote operating switch : for the trunk lid until the trunk lid opens. Limiting the opening angle of the tailgate General notes ! Make sure there is sufficient clearance to open the tailgate fully when setting the opening angle. The tailgate could otherwise be damaged. Ideally, set the opening angle outside. You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate. This could be useful, for example, if there is insufficient space above the tailgate. It is possible to limit the tailgate in the top half of its opening range. To open the tailgate fully, pull the handle on the outside of the tailgate again after it has stopped automatically. This does not delete the stored position. Activating To open the tailgate: pull the handle on the tailgate. X To stop the opening procedure at the desired position: Rpress the closing button in the tailgate, or Rpull the handle on the outside of the tailgate again, or Rpress the tailgate button on the SmartKey X To store the position: press and hold the closing button on the tailgate until you hear a short tone. The opening angle limiter is activated. The tailgate will now stop in the stored position when opening. X Z Opening and closing Operation Side windows 82 Deactivating X Press and hold the closing button on the tailgate until two short tones sound. Emergency release for the trunk General notes Opening and closing ! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 325). If the trunk lid can no longer be unlocked: Rusing the SmartKey, or Rusing the remote operating switch in the door control panel: Use the emergency release inside the trunk lid. You can reach the emergency release via the trunk. Opening Press emergency release button : briefly. The trunk lid unlocks and opens. The trunk lid can be unlocked and opened with the trunk lid emergency release when the vehicle is stationary or while driving. The trunk lid emergency release does not open the trunk lid if the battery is disconnected or discharged. Trunk lid emergency release light: REmergency release button : flashes for 30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened. REmergency release button : flashes for 60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed. X Side windows Important safety notes G WARNING Fold the rear seat backrest forwards (Y page 242). X Insert a suitable tool ;, e.g. a screwdriver, into opening : in the paneling. The trunk lid is released. X Open the trunk lid. X Emergency release button You can open the trunk lid from inside the vehicle with the emergency release button. While opening the side windows, body parts could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side window moves. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody touches the side window during the opening procedure. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or pull the switch to close the side window again. G WARNING While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again. Side windows 83 Side window reversing feature The side windows are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts a side window from traveling upwards during the automatic closing process, the side window opens again automatically. During the manual closing process, the side window only opens again automatically after the corresponding switch is released. The automatic reversing feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention when closing a side window. G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rwhile adjusting This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If someone becomes trapped, press the W button to open the side window again. Opening and closing the side windows The switches for all side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch on each door for the corresponding side window. The switches on the driver's door take precedence. : ; = ? Front left Front right Rear right Rear left Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). X To open manually: press and hold the corresponding switch. X To open fully: press the switch beyond the pressure point and release it. Automatic operation is started. X To close manually: pull the corresponding switch and hold it. X To close fully: pull the switch beyond the pressure point and release it. Automatic operation is started. X To interrupt automatic operation: press/ pull the corresponding switch again. i If you press/pull the switch beyond the point of resistance, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing/ pulling the switch again. X i You can continue to operate the side win- dows after you switch off the engine or remove the SmartKey. This function remains active for five minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened. i When the override feature for the side windows is activated (Y page 60), the side windows cannot be operated from the rear. Convenience opening Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function: you can ventilate the vehicle before you start driving. Z Opening and closing G WARNING If children operate the side windows they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. Activate the override feature for the rear side windows. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Opening and closing 84 Side windows The SmartKey can also be used to carry out the following functions simultaneously: Runlock the vehicle Ropen the side windows Ropen the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblind The convenience opening feature can only be operated using the SmartKey. The "convenience opening" feature is also available when the vehicle is unlocked. X Press and hold the % button until the side windows and the panorama sunroof are in the desired position. If the roller sunblind of the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed, the roller sunblind is opened first. X Press and hold the % button once more until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel reaches the desired position. X To interrupt convenience opening: release the % button. Convenience closing feature Important safety notes G WARNING When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Observe the complete closing procedure when the convenience closing feature is operating. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function: you can do the following at the same time: Rlock the vehicle Rclose the side windows Rclose the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel On vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the roller sunblind. i Notes on the automatic reversing feature for: RThe side window (Y page 83) panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel (Y page 87) RThe roller sunblind (Y page 88) RThe Using the SmartKey Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESSGO start function: for the following operations, point the tip of the SmartKey at the handle on the driver's door. The SmartKey must be close to the driver's door handle. i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESSGO start function: the SmartKey must be in close proximity to the vehicle. X Press and hold the & button until the side windows and the panorama sliding sunroof are fully closed. X Make sure that all the side windows and the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed. X On vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: X Press and hold the & button again until the roller sunblind of the panorama sliding sunroof closes. X To interrupt convenience closing: release the & button. Using KEYLESS-GO The driver's door and the door at which the handle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. The gap between the SmartKey and the corresponding door handle should not be greater than 3 ft (1 m). Side windows Make sure that all the side windows are closed. X Make sure that all the side windows and the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed. X On vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle again until the roller sunblind of the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel closes. X To interrupt convenience closing: release recessed sensor surface : on the door handle. Resetting the side windows If a side window can no longer be closed fully, you must reset it. X Close all the doors. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). X Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 83). X Hold the switch for an additional second. If the side window opens again slightly: X Immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 83). X Hold the switch for an additional second. X If the respective side window remains closed after the button is released, then it has been set correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the steps above. Problems with the side windows G WARNING If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window. Z Opening and closing Touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle until the side windows and the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed. i Make sure you only touch recessed sensor surface :. X 85 Opening and closing 86 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions A side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide. X X Remove the objects. Close the side window. A side window cannot be If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again closed and you cannot slightly: see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed without the automatic reversing feature. The side windows cannot The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. be opened or closed X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 73) and replace it if necessary using the convenience (Y page 73). opening/closing feature. Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel Important safety notes In the following section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. G WARNING While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, body parts in close proximity could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the opening and closing procedures. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or Rduring automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction The opening or closing procedure will be stopped. G WARNING If children operate the sliding sunroof they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. G WARNING At high speeds the raised sliding sunroof automatically lowers slightly at the rear. This could trap you or other persons. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody reaches into the sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst the vehicle is in motion. If somebody becomes trapped, immediately pull back the sliding sunroof switch. The sliding sunroof lifts during opening. ! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may occur. Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel ! The weather can change abruptly. It could start to rain or snow. Make sure that the sliding sunroof is closed when you leave the vehicle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged if water enters the vehicle interior. i Resonance noises can occur in addition to the usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is open. They are caused by minor pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. Change the position of the sliding sunroof or open a side window slightly to reduce or eliminate these noises. The closing process is stopped. G WARNING If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof closes with increased force. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. There is a risk of injury or becoming trapped. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the button immediately, or Rbriefly push the button in any direction dur- Sliding sunroof reversing feature In the following section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. The sliding sunroof is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the sliding sunroof opens again automatically. However, the automatic reversing feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention when closing the sliding sunroof. ing automatic closing. The closing process is stopped. Operating the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel Opening and closing G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rover the last 1/6 in (4 mm) of the closing movement Rduring resetting Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again manually immediately after automatic reversing This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or Rpress the switch in any direction during the automatic closing process : To raise ; To open = To close/lower The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can only be operated when the roller sunblind is open. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction. If you press/pull the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop Z Opening and closing Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be damaged. 87 Opening and closing 88 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel automatic operation by pressing/pulling the switch again. After opening the sliding sunroof, the roller sunblind closes slightly automatically. This reduces drafts in the vehicle interior. If the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it lowers slightly automatically at higher speeds. The noise level in the vehicle interior is reduced as a result. At low speeds it raises again automatically. You can also temporarily deactivate automatic lowering. To do so, press the 3 switch. The sliding sunroof raises again automatically. You can continue to operate the sliding sunroof after switching off the engine or removing the SmartKey from the ignition lock. This function remains active for five minutes or until you open a front door. The sliding sunroof cannot be opened if a roof carrier is installed. In order to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior, you can raise the sliding sunroof. If contact is made with a roof carrier approved by Mercedes-Benz, the sliding sunroof lowers slightly but remains raised at the rear. Rain-closing feature The rain-closing feature is only available for vehicles with a rain sensor. When the SmartKey is in position g in the ignition lock or is removed, the sliding sunroof closes automatically: Rif it starts to rain. Rat extreme outside temperatures. Rafter six hours. Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel remains raised at the rear in order to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior. If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is obstructed while being closed by the rain-closing feature, it opens again slightly. The rain-closing feature is then deactivated. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel does not close if: Rit is raised at the rear. Rit is blocked. Rno rain is falling on the area of the windshield being monitored by the rain sensor. If the vehicle, for example, is under a bridge or in a carport, the field of the sensor may be covered. Operating the roller sunblind for the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel Important safety notes G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame or sliding sunroof during automatic opening or closing. There is a risk of injury. When opening or closing, make sure that no body parts are in the sweep of the roller sunblind. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction The opening or closing procedure will be stopped. Rduring The roller sunblind shields the vehicle interior from sunlight. The roller sunblind can only be opened and closed when the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed. Roller sunblind reversing feature The roller sunblind is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts the roller sunblind during the closing process, the roller sunblind opens again automatically. The automatic reversing feature is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness when closing the roller sunblind. G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rwhen closing the roller sunblind again man- ually immediately after automatic reversal This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the sweep area. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease 89 Resetting the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel or the roller sunblind the switch immediately, or Rpress the switch in any direction during the Opening and closing : Opens ; Opens = Closes Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction. If you press/pull the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling the switch again. After opening the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel, the roller sunblind automatically closes slightly. This reduces drafts in the vehicle interior. X Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel or the roller sunblind if the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel or the roller sunblind does not move smoothly. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow : until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is fully closed. X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional second. X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow : until the roller sunblind is fully closed. X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional second. X Make sure that the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblind can be fully opened and closed again. X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above. Problems with the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel G WARNING If you do not reset the sliding sunroof after a malfunction or a voltage drop, then the reversing feature will malfunction or not work. The sliding sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. In such or similar situations always make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. Always reset the sliding sunroof after a malfunction or a voltage drop. Z Opening and closing automatic closing process The closing process is stopped. 90 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel ! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact a Opening and closing qualified specialist workshop. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to the point of resistance until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed with more force. If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to the point of resistance until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed without the automatic reversing feature. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel cannot be opened or closed using the convenience opening/closing feature. The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 73) and replace it if necessary (Y page 73). Seats G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. Ryou should have a good overview of traffic conditions Rthe seat belt is pulled snugly against the body and is routed across the center of your shoulder and across your hips in the pelvic area i Further related subjects: RAdjusting the (Y page 93) seats manually RAdjusting the (Y page 96) steering wheel manually RAdjusting the (Y page 93) RFastening the (Y page 44) seats electrically seat belt correctly RAdjusting the rear-view mirrors (Y page 97) mirror and exterior RVehicles with a memory function: saving the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror settings using the memory function (Y page 100) Seats Important safety notes Observe the following when adjusting steering wheel :, seat belt ; and driver's seat =: Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag as possible are sitting in a normal upright position Ryour thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion Ryour legs are not entirely stretched and you can depress the pedals properly Rthe back of your head is supported at eye level by the center of the head restraint Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent Ryou can move your legs freely Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly Ryou G WARNING Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies for the Digital Vehicle Key if the "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The seats can still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in the ignition lock. G WARNING When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury. Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Correct driver's seat position 91 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors 92 Seats G WARNING If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could move forwards as far as the next catch during movement such as braking or abrupt changes of direction. As a result, you would be pushed against your seat belt by the unsecured driver's seat. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. The seat belt cannot protect as intended and could result in additional injury. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Before every journey, make sure that the driver's seat is fully engaged. Observe the safety notes on "Air bags" (Y page 45) and "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 54). G WARNING If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in motion. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Always make sure that the driver's seat is engaged before starting the vehicle. G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While moving the seats, make sure that your hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system. ! To prevent damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following notes: not spill liquids onto the seats. Dry the seats as soon as possible if liquid does get spilled on the seats. RIf the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. Also, do not use the seat heating to dry the seats. RClean the seat covers as recommended; see the "Interior care" section. RDo not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place pointed objects on the seat cushions such as knives, nails or tools. Where possible, use the seats only for carrying passengers. RWhen operating the seat heating, do not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, protective covers, child seats or booster seats. RWhen the seat heating is switched on, the seat surface can be damaged as a result of objects being placed on the seats, for example, seat cushions, child seats and protective covers not approved by Mercedes-Benz. RDo ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell under or behind the seats when moving the seats back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged. i Further related subjects: RCargo compartment enlargement (folding down the rear seats) (Y page 242) Seats Adjusting the seats manually Vehicles without the seating comfort package 93 Seat fore-and-aft adjustment: X Lift handle : and slide the seat forwards or rearwards. X Release lever : again. Make sure that you hear the seat engage in position. Seat height: X Pull handle ? upwards or push it down repeatedly until the seat has reached the desired height. Seat fore-and-aft adjustment: X Lift handle : and slide the seat forwards or backwards. X Release lever : again. Make sure that you hear the seat engage in position. Backrest angle: X Relieve the pressure on the backrest. X Turn handwheel = forwards or backwards. Seat height: X Pull handle ; upwards or push it down repeatedly until the seat has reached the desired height. Seat cushion angle: X Adjust the angle so that your thighs are lightly supported. X Turn handwheel = forwards or backwards. Seat cushion length: Lift handle ; and slide the front part of the seat cushion forwards or backwards. X Release lever ; again. The seat cushion engages. X Adjusting the seats electrically Vehicles with the seating comfort package : ; = ? Seat height Seat cushion angle Seat fore-and-aft adjustment Backrest angle i You can store the seat settings using the memory function (Y page 100). Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Backrest angle: X Relieve the pressure on the backrest. X Turn handwheel A forwards or backwards. 94 Seats Adjusting the head restraints Important safety notes Adjusting the head restraints manually Adjusting the head restraint height G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING If the head restraints are not installed or not adjusted correctly, they cannot provide protection as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. Always drive with the head restraints installed. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired position. X To lower: press release catch : in the direction of the arrow and push the head restraint down to the desired position. X Adjusting the fore/aft position of the head restraint Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the head restraint so that it is as close as possible to your head. General notes For vehicles with sports seats you cannot adjust the front head restraints or the outer rear head restraints. With this function you can adjust the distance between the head restraint and the back of the seat occupant's head. X To move forwards: pull the head restraint forwards in the direction of the arrow until it engages. There are several notches. X To move backwards: press and hold release button : and push the head restraint backwards. X When the head restraint is in the desired position, release the button and make sure that the head restraint is engaged in position. Seats 95 Rear seat head restraints To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired position. X To lower: press release catch : and push the head restraint down until it is in the desired position. X Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support You can adjust the contour of the front seat backrests individually to provide optimum support for your back. Adjusting the side bolsters of the seat cushion X To set the side bolsters of the seat cushion narrower: press button :. X To set the side bolsters of the seat cushion wider: press button ;. Adjusting the side bolsters of the seat backrest X To set the side bolsters of the seat backrest narrower: press button =. X To set the side bolsters of the seat backrest wider: press button ?. Switching the seat heating on/off Switching on/off : ; = ? Raises the backrest contour Softens the backrest contour Lowers the backrest contour Hardens the backrest contour AMG Performance Seat Vehicles with electrically adjustable seats: to adjust the contour of the seat and for improved lateral support, you can individually adjust the front seats. G WARNING Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to become very hot. The health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on repeatedly. ! When the seat heating is switched on, the seat surface can be damaged as a result of objects being placed on the seats, for example, seat cushions, child seats and protective covers not approved by Mercedes-Benz. Ensure that there are no objects on the seat surface when the seat heating is switched on. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Adjusting the rear seat head restraint height 96 Steering wheel Seats, steering wheel and mirrors The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes. The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off. Problems with the seat heating Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The seat heating has The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consumswitched off prematurely ers are switched on. or cannot be switched X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the on. rear window defroster or interior lighting. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating will switch back on automatically. Steering wheel Important safety notes G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of injury. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies for the Digital Vehicle Key if the "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect. Adjusting the steering wheel G WARNING If the steering wheel is unlocked while the vehicle is in motion, it could change position unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Mirrors Before starting off, make sure the steering wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion. 97 Exterior mirrors Adjusting the exterior mirrors G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: : Release lever ; Adjusts the steering wheel height = Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore- and-aft adjustment) X Push release lever : down completely. The steering column is unlocked. X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. X Push release lever : up completely. The steering column is locked. X Check if the steering column is locked. When doing so, try to push the steering wheel up or down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft direction. the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side reduces the size of the image. Visible objects are actually closer than they appear. This means that you could misjudge the distance from road users traveling behind, e.g. when changing lane. There is a risk of an accident. For this reason, always make sure of the actual distance from the road users traveling behind by glancing over your shoulder. Mirrors Rear view mirror Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). X Exterior mirror on the front-passenger side: press button ;. Exterior mirror on the driver's side: press button :. The indicator lamp in the corresponding button lights up in red. The indicator lamp goes out again after some time. You can adjust the selected exterior X X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever : forwards or back. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Radjust Mirrors 98 mirror using button = as long as the indicator lamp is lit. X Press button = up, down, or to the right or left until you have adjusted the exterior mirror to the correct position. You should have a good overview of traffic conditions. The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field of vision. After the engine has been started, the exterior mirrors are automatically heated at low outside temperatures. Heating takes a maximum of ten minutes. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors i You can also heat up the exterior mirrors manually by switching on the rear window defroster. Folding the exterior mirrors in or out electrically Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). X Briefly press :. X Folding the exterior mirrors in or out automatically If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 190): Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside. Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automatically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door. i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in manually, they do not fold out. Exterior mirror pushed out of position Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). X Briefly press :. Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. X i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are always folded out fully while driving. They could otherwise vibrate. i If you are driving faster than 30 mph (47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exterior mirrors. Resetting the exterior mirrors If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function in the on-board computer (Y page 190). If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of position, proceed as follows: X Vehicles without electrically folding exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror into the correct position manually. X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors: press and hold mirror-folding button (Y page 98) until you hear the mirror click into place. The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual (Y page 97). Automatic anti-glare mirrors G WARNING Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. There is a risk of injury. Mirrors 99 If you come into contact with the electrolyte, observe the following: RRinse The "Automatic anti-glare mirrors" function is only available if the vehicle is equipped with the "Mirrors package". The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on the driver's side automatically go into anti-glare mode if: Rthe ignition is switched on and Rincident light from headlamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view mirror The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting is switched on. Parking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side Setting and storing the parking position You can set the front-passenger side exterior mirror such that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. You can store this position. : Button for the driver's side exterior mirror ; Button for the front-passenger side exterior mirror = Button for the exterior mirror setting ? Memory button M Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock or start the engine (Y page 123). X Press button ;. X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the default parking position. X Use button = to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the curb. The parking position is stored. i If you shift the transmission to another position, the front-passenger side exterior mirror returns to the driving position. X X Calling up a stored parking position setting Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). X Adjust the front-passenger side exterior mirror using the corresponding button (Y page 97). X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position: Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) Rabout ten seconds after you have disengaged reverse gear Rwhen you use button : to select the exterior mirror on the driver's side X Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors off the electrolyte from your skin immediately with water. RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out of your eyes thoroughly with clean water. RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. RIf electrolyte comes into contact with your skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with electrolyte. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. 100 Memory function Memory function Important safety notes RSeat and backrest position side: position of the exterior mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger sides RDriver's Seats, steering wheel and mirrors G WARNING If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary. G WARNING When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the memory function is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. If somebody becomes trapped, immediately release the memory function position button. The adjustment process is stopped. G WARNING Children could become trapped if they activate the memory function, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies for the Digital Vehicle Key if the "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect. The memory function can be used at any time, e.g. even when the SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. Storing settings With the memory function, you can store up to three different settings, e.g. for three different people. The following settings are stored as a single memory preset: Adjust the seat (Y page 93). Adjust the exterior mirror on the driver's side (Y page 97). X Briefly press the M memory button and then press preset position button 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. The settings are stored in the selected preset position. A tone sounds when the settings have been completed. X X Calling up a stored setting X Press and hold the relevant preset position button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat and exterior mirrors are in the stored position. i The setting procedure is interrupted as soon as you release the storage position button. Exterior lighting General notes For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some countries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obligations. Setting the exterior lighting Setting options Exterior lighting can be set using the: switch Rcombination switch (Y page 102) Ron-board computer (Y page 189) Rlight Light switch Operation 1 W Left-hand standing lamps 2 X Right-hand standing lamps 3 T Parking lamps, license plate and instrument cluster lighting 4 à Automatic headlamp mode, controlled by the light sensor 5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps B R Rear fog lamp If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. X Turn the light switch to the à position. The exterior lighting (except the parking/standing lamps) switches off automatically if you: Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey in position g Automatic headlamp mode à is the preferred light switch position: RThe light setting is automatically selected according to the brightness of the ambient light (exception: poor visibility due to weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray). RWith the SmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: the parking lamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. RWith the engine running: if you have activated the Daytime Running Lights function via the on-board computer, the daytime running lamps or the parking lamps and the low-beam headlamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. X To switch on the automatic headlamp mode: turn the light switch to the à position. G WARNING When the light switch is set to Ã, the lowbeam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident. In such situations, turn the light switch to L. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's lighting at all times. Canada only: The daytime running lamps improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day. The daytime running lamps function is required by law in Canada. It cannot therefore be deactivated. When the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary: if you shift the automatic transmission from a driving position to position j the daytime running lamps or low-beam headlamps go out after 3 minutes. When the engine is running, the vehicle is stationary and in bright ambient light: if you turn the light switch to the T position, the daytime running lamps and parking lamps turn on. If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to the L position, the manual settings Z Lights and windshield wipers Exterior lighting 101 102 Exterior lighting take precedence over the daytime running lamps. USA only: The daytime running lamps improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day. To do this, the daytime running lamps function must be switched on using the on-board computer (Y page 189). If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to the T or L position, the manual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps. Lights and windshield wipers Low-beam headlamps Even if the light sensor does not detect that it is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam headlamps switch on when the ignition is switched on and the light switch is set to the L position. This is a particularly useful function in the event of rain and fog. X To switch on the low-beam headlamps: turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L. The green L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. area, in accordance with the relevant legal stipulations. Avoid using the T parking lamps over a period of several hours. If possible, switch on the right-hand X or lefthand W standing lamps. X To switch on: turn the light switch to T. The green T indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Standing lamps Switching on the standing lamps ensures the corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated. X To switch on the standing lamps: the SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is in position g in the ignition lock. X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of the vehicle). Combination switch Rear fog lamp The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thick fog. Please take note of the country-specific regulations for the use of rear fog lamps. X To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. i When the rear fog lamp is switched on, the center brake lamp in the tail lamp switches off due to a legal requirement. Parking lamps ! If the battery charge is very low, the parking lamps or standing lamps are automatically switched off to enable the next engine start. Always park your vehicle safely and in a well lit To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. The corresponding turn signal flashes three times. X To indicate: press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. X To switch on the high-beam headlamps: turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. The high-beam headlamps only switch on in the à position if the low-beam headlamps are on. The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the high-beam headlamps are switched on. X Exterior lighting Hazard warning lamps Adaptive Highbeam Assist General notes You can use this function to set the headlamps to change between low beam and high beam automatically. The system recognizes vehicles with their lights on, either approaching from the opposite direction or traveling in front of your vehicle, and consequently switches the headlamps from high beam to low beam. Once the system no longer detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the high-beam headlamps. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel. Important safety notes G WARNING Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize road users: Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognize other road users that have lights, or may recognize them too late. In this, or in similar situations, the automatic high-beam headlamps will not be deactivated or will be activated regardless. There is a risk of an accident. Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and switch off the high-beam headlamps in good time. Rwho To switch on the hazard warning lamps: press button :. All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a turn signal using the combination switch, only the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash. X To switch off the hazard warning lamps: press button :. X The hazard warning lamps automatically switch on if: Ran air bag is deployed or Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed of above 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to a standstill The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if the vehicle reaches a speed of above 6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full brake application. The hazard warning lamps still operate if the ignition is switched off. Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be restricted if there is: Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow Rdirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured Z Lights and windshield wipers To switch off the high-beam headlamps: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, it controls activation and deactivation of the high-beam headlamps (Y page 103). X To switch on the high-beam flasher: pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow =. X 103 Interior lighting 104 Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off To switch on: turn the light switch to Ã. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display lights up when it is dark and the light sensor activates the low-beam headlamps. If you are driving at speeds above approximately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other road users are detected: The high-beam headlamps are switched on automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up. If you are driving at speeds below approximately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other road users have been detected or the roads are adequately lit: The high-beam headlamps are switched off automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display remains lit. X To switch off: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display goes out. Lights and windshield wipers X Headlamps fogged up on the inside Interior lighting Overview of interior lighting Front overhead control panel : p Switches the left-hand front reading lamp on or off ; c Switches the front interior lighting on = v Switches the rear interior lighting on or off ? | Switches the front interior lighting/ automatic interior lighting control off A p Switches the right-hand front reading lamp on or off B Switches the automatic interior lighting con- trol on Rear compartment control panel Certain climatic and physical conditions may cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This moisture does not affect the functionality of the headlamp. : p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off ; p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off Interior lighting control General notes In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from discharging, the interior lighting functions are automatically deactivated after some time except when the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. The color and brightness of the ambient lighting are set via the multimedia system (see Digital Operator's Manual). Automatic interior lighting control To switch on: set the switch to center position B. X To switch off: set the switch to the | position. X The interior lighting automatically switches on if you: Runlock the vehicle Ropen a door Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock The interior lighting is switched on for a set time when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock. You can set this delayed switch-off via the multimedia system (see Digital Operator's Manual). Replacing bulbs Important safety notes Use bulbs only in closed lamps that have been designed for this purpose. Only install spare bulbs of the same type and the specified voltage. Marks on the glass tube reduce the service life of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube with your bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and rub it off with a lint-free cloth. Protect bulbs from moisture during operation. Do not allow bulbs to come into contact with liquids. Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 105). Have the bulbs that you cannot change yourself replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. If you require assistance replacing bulbs, consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Headlamps and lights are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. Vehicles with LED headlamps: the front and rear lamp clusters of your vehicle are equipped with LED bulbs. Do not replace the bulbs yourself. Contact a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Overview of bulb types You can replace the following bulbs. The bulb type can be found in the legend. G WARNING Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot when operating. If you change a bulb, you could burn yourself on these components. There is a risk of injury. Allow these components to cool down before changing a bulb. Do not use a bulb if it has been dropped or if its glass tube has been scratched. The bulb may explode if: Ryou touch it Rit is hot Ryou drop it Ryou scratch it Z 105 Lights and windshield wipers Replacing bulbs 106 Replacing bulbs Replacing front bulbs Removing and installing the cover in the front wheel housing Lights and windshield wipers Vehicles with halogen headlamps : Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W ; High-beam headlamps/daytime running lamps/parking lamps/standing lamps: H15 55 W/15 W = Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W Tail lamps (vehicles with halogen headlamps) : Rear fog lamp: P 21 W ; Brake lamp: W 16 W = Brake lamp: W 16 W ? Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W A Backup lamp: W 16 W You must remove the cover of the front wheel housing before you can change the front turn signal lamp. X To remove: switch off the lights. X Turn the front wheels inwards. X Turn rotary knob : through 90°. Cover ; is released. X Push cover ; down. X To install: push cover ; up. X Turn rotary knob : through 90°. Cover ; is locked. Low-beam headlamps (halogen headlamps) Remove the cover in the front wheel housing (Y page 106). X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and remove it. X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and pull out. X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Replacing bulbs X High-beam headlamps/daytime running lamps/parking lamps and standing lamps (halogen headlamps) Switch off the lights. Open the hood. X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and remove it. X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and pull out. X Insert the new bulb and engage it to the stop. X Press on housing cover : and turn it to the right. X X Turn signals (halogen headlamps) Turn the bulb counter-clockwise and pull it out of bulb holder :. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder :. X Insert bulb holder : and turn it clockwise until it engages. X Replacing rear bulbs Opening and closing the side trim panels View of right-hand side trim panel You must open the side trim panel in the trunk before you can replace the bulbs in the tail lamps. X To open: release right or left side trim panel : at the top and fold it down in the direction of the arrow. X To close: insert side panel :. Tail lamps Switch off the lights. Open the trunk. X Open the side trim panel (Y page 107). X X Switch off the lights. Open the hood. X Turn bulb holder : counter-clockwise and pull out. X X Z Lights and windshield wipers Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise. X Press on housing cover : and turn it to the right. X Replace the cover in the front wheel housing (Y page 106). X 107 Windshield wipers 108 Lights and windshield wipers Press retaining clips : at the same time in the direction of the arrows. X Carefully remove the bulb holder together with the connected plug and the bulbs. X ! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the Bulb holder ; Brake lamp = Brake lamp ? Rear fog lamp A Backup lamp B Turn signals Combination switch 1 $ Windshield wiper off 2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set Brake lamp and backup lamp: remove the corresponding bulb from the bulb holder. X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder. X Rear fog lamp and turn signal: press the bulb gently into the bulb holder, turn it counter-clockwise and remove it from the bulb holder. X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder and turn it clockwise. X Reinsert the bulb holder and engage on retaining clips :. X Close the side trim panel (Y page 107). X Windshield wipers Switching the windshield wipers on/off ! Do not operate the windshield wipers when the windshield is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has collected on the windshield can scratch the glass if wiping takes place when the windshield is dry. If it is necessary to switch on the windshield wipers in dry weather conditions, always use washer fluid when operating the windshield wipers. windshield after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, wax or other residues may be the reason for this. Clean the windshield using washer fluid after washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash. to low sensitivity) 3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor set to high sensitivity) 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast B í Single wipe/î Wipes the wind- shield using washer fluid Switch on the ignition. X Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position. X ! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the windshield becomes dirty in dry weather conditions, the windshield wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could then damage the windshield wiper blades or scratch the windshield. For this reason, you should always switch off the windshield wipers in dry weather. Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the Ä or Å position, the appropriate wiping frequency is automatically set according to the intensity of the rain. In the Å position, the rain sensor is more sensitive than in the Ä position, causing the windshield wiper to wipe more frequently. If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent you from observing the traffic conditions. Windshield wipers Replacing the wiper blades Important safety notes G WARNING If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you could be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades. 109 Hold on to the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn wiper blade in direction of arrow : away from the wiper arm as far as it will go. X Slide catch ; in the direction of arrow = until it engages in the removal position with a noticeable click. X ! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make ! Never open the hood if a windshield wiper arm has been folded away from the windshield. Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windshield. Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the windshield, the windshield may be damaged by the force of the impact. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the wiper blades changed at a qualified specialist workshop. X Remove the wiper blade in the direction of arrow ? away from the wiper arm. Installing the wiper blades Changing the windshield wiper blades Removing the wiper blades Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESSGO start function: switch off the engine. X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield. X X Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow :. Z Lights and windshield wipers sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the wiper. Windshield wipers 110 Slide catch ; in the direction of arrow = until it engages in the locking position with a noticeable click. X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated correctly. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield. X Remove protective film : of the service indicator on the tip of the wiper blade. If the color of the service indicator changes from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be replaced. X i The duration of the color change varies Lights and windshield wipers depending on the usage conditions. Problems with the windshield wipers Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The windshield wipers are jammed. Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated. X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windshield wipers back on. The windshield wipers fail completely. The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning. Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X The windshield washer The spray nozzles are misaligned. fluid from the spray noz- X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop. zles no longer hits the center of the windshield. Overview of climate control systems General notes Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise fog up. To prevent the windows from fogging up: Rswitch off climate control only briefly Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only briefly Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidification function Rswitch on the defrost windshield function briefly, if required The air-conditioning system or dual-zone automatic climate control regulates the temperature and the humidity of the vehicle interior and filters undesirable substances from the air. The air-conditioning system or dual-zone automatic climate control can only be operated when the engine is running. Optimum operation is only achieved with the side windows and panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel closed. If you start the engine using your smartphone, the last selected climate control setting is reactivated (Y page 83). The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off (Y page 120). Always keep the ventilation flaps behind the side trim panel in the cargo compartment clear (Y page 107). Otherwise the vehicle will not be ventilated correctly. i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather, e.g. using the convenience opening feature (Y page 83). This will speed up the cooling process and the desired interior temperature will be reached more quickly. i The integrated filter filters out most parti- cles of dust and soot and completely filters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutants and odors. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Maintenance Booklet. As it depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Maintenance Booklet. i It is possible that under certain circumstan- ces the residual heat function may be activated automatically an hour after the SmartKey has been removed in order to dry the automatic climate control. The vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes. Climate control Overview of climate control systems 111 112 Overview of climate control systems Climate control Air-conditioning system control panel USA only : Sets the temperature (Y page 117) ; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 118) = Sets the air distribution (Y page 117) ? Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 120) A Sets the airflow (Y page 118) B Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 116) C Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 119) Canada only : Sets the temperature (Y page 117) ; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 118) = Sets the air distribution (Y page 117) ? Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 120) A Sets the airflow (Y page 118) Overview of climate control systems 113 B Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 116) C Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 119) Air-conditioning system Below, you can find a number of notes and recommendations to help you use the air-conditioning system optimally. RSwitch on the air-conditioning system by turning control knob A clockwise to the desired position (except position 0). RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). RRecommendation for avoiding misted windows at low exterior temperatures or in rain: switch on the ¿ cooling with dehumidification function (Y page 116). Set air distribution to ¯ and if possible switch off P and O (Y page 117). Deactivate air-recirculation mode e (Y page 120). Set airflow control A to a setting between 3 and 6 (Y page 118). RRecommendation for rapid cooling or heating of the vehicle interior: briefly set airflow control A to a setting between 3 and 6 (Y page 118). RRecommendation for a constant vehicle interior temperature: set airflow control A to a setting between 1 and 3 (Y page 118). RRecommendation for air distribution in winter: select the O and ¯ settings (Y page 117). Recommendation for air distribution in summer: select the P or P and ¯ settings (Y page 117). ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" function briefly until the windshield is clear again. ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. RIf you change the settings of the climate control system, the climate status display appears for approximately three seconds at the bottom of the screen on the multimedia system display; see Digital Operator's Manual. You will see the current settings of the various climate control functions. DYNAMIC SELECT button (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) You can choose between various drive programs with the DYNAMIC SELECT button (Y page 129). If you have selected drive program E: Rwhen heating, the electrical heater booster is deactivated and in the warming-up phase heat output is reduced Rthe rear window defroster running time is reduced Depending on the configuration, climate settings may also be influenced in the drive program I. If you have selected drive program C or S, climate settings are not influenced. ECO start/stop function During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control system only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require the full climate control output, you can switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button (Y page 128). Climate control Notes on using the air-conditioning system 114 Overview of climate control systems Climate control Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control USA only : Sets the temperature, left (Y page 117) ; Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 117) = Defrosts the windshield (Y page 118) ? Increases the airflow (Y page 118) A Sets the air distribution (Y page 117) B Display C Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 120) D Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 116) E Sets the temperature, right (Y page 117) F Activates or deactivates maximum cooling (Y page 119) G Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 116) H Reduces the airflow (Y page 118) I Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 119) J Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 118) 115 Climate control Overview of climate control systems Canada only : Sets the temperature, left (Y page 117) ; Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 117) = Defrosts the windshield (Y page 118) ? Increases the airflow (Y page 118) A Sets the air distribution (Y page 117) B Display C Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 120) D Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 116) E Sets the temperature, right (Y page 117) F Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 120) G Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 116) H Reduces the airflow (Y page 118) I Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 119) J Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 118) Optimum use of dual-zone automatic climate control Climate control system The following contains instructions and recommendations to enable you to get the most out of your dual-zone automatic climate control. RActivate climate control using the à and ¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in the à and ¿ buttons light up. RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" function briefly until the windshield is clear again. ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. RUse the ZONE function to adopt the temperature settings on the driver's side for the front-passenger side as well. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. RUse the residual heat function if you want to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the ignition is switched off. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off. RIf you change the settings of the climate control system, the climate status display appears for approximately three seconds at the bottom of the screen on the multimedia system display; see Digital Operator's Man- Operating the climate control systems 116 ual. You will see the current settings of the various climate control functions. Climate control DYNAMIC SELECT button (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) You can choose between various drive programs with the DYNAMIC SELECT button (Y page 129). If you have selected drive program E: Rwhen heating, the electrical heater booster is deactivated and in the warming-up phase heat output is reduced Rthe rear window defroster running time is reduced Depending on the configuration, climate settings may also be influenced in the drive program I. If you have selected drive program C or S, climate settings are not influenced. ECO start/stop function During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control system only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require the full climate control output, you can switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button (Y page 128). Operating the climate control systems Activating/deactivating climate control General notes When the climate control is switched off, the air supply and air circulation are also switched off. The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch off climate control only briefly Air-conditioning system Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). X To switch on: turn control A clockwise to the desired position (except position 0) (Y page 112). X To switch off: turn control A counter-clockwise to position 0 (Y page 112). X Dual-zone automatic climate control Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). X To activate: press the à button. The indicator lamp in the à button lights up. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. or X Press the ^ button. The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes out. The previously selected settings are restored. X To deactivate: press the ^ button. The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights up. X i Dual-zone automatic climate control: switch on climate control primarily using the à button. Switching cooling with air dehumidification on/off General notes If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, only deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function briefly. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is normal and not a sign that there is a malfunction. Activating/deactivating X Press the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights up or goes out. The indicator lamp in the button indicates that the respective function is activated. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function has a delayed switch-off feature. Operating the climate control systems 117 Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The indicator lamp in the Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a mal¿ button flashes function. three times or remains X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. off. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function cannot be switched on. Setting climate control to automatic Setting the temperature General notes Air-conditioning system The automatic climate control function is only available in conjunction with dual-zone automatic climate control. In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level. The system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated automatically in automatic mode. You can set the temperature for the entire vehicle. The set temperature is automatically maintained at a constant level. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). X To increase or reduce: turn control : counter-clockwise or clockwise (Y page 112). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). Setting climate control to automatic Turn the SmartKey to position ; in the ignition lock (Y page 123). X Set the desired temperature. X To activate: press the à button. The indicator lamp in the à button lights up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are activated. X To switch to manual mode: press the É or Ë button. or X Press the K or I button. The indicator lamp in the à button goes out. Automatic air distribution and airflow are deactivated. X Dual-zone automatic climate control Different temperatures can be set for the driver's and front-passenger sides. The set temperature is automatically maintained at a constant level. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). X To increase or decrease: turn control : or E counter-clockwise or clockwise (Y page 114). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). Setting the air distribution Air-conditioning system Air distribution settings ¯ Directs air through the defroster vents P Directs air through the center and side air vents O Directs air through the footwell air vents Climate control Problem Operating the climate control systems 118 i You can also activate several air distribution settings simultaneously. To do this, press multiple air distribution buttons. The air is then directed through various vents. Climate control i Regardless of the air distribution setting, airflow is always directed through the side air vents. The side air vents can only be closed if the adjusters are turned clockwise until they engage. Setting the air distribution Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). X Press one or more of the P, O, ¯ buttons. The corresponding indicator lamp lights up briefly. X Dual-zone automatic climate control Air distribution settings ¯ Directs air through the defroster vents P Directs air through the center and side air vents O Directs air through the footwell air vents S Directs air through the center, side and footwell vents b Directs air through the defroster, center and side air vents a Directs air through the defroster and footwell vents _ Directs air through the defroster, center, side and footwell vents i Regardless of the air distribution setting, airflow is always directed through the side air vents. The side air vents can only be closed if the adjusters are turned clockwise until they engage. Setting the air distribution Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). X Press the É or Ë button repeatedly until the desired symbol appears in the display. Setting the airflow Air-conditioning system Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). X To increase or reduce: turn control A counter-clockwise or clockwise (Y page 112). X Dual-zone automatic climate control Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). X To increase or reduce: press the K or I button. X Switching the ZONE function on/off This function is only available with dual-zone automatic climate control. X To activate: press the á button. The indicator lamp in the á button lights up. The temperature setting for the driver's side is not adopted for the front-passenger side. X To deactivate: press the á button. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. The temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side. Defrosting the windshield General notes You can use this function to defrost the windshield or to clear a fogged up windshield and side windows. i You should only select the "Windshield defrosting" function until the windshield is clear again. X Switching the "Windshield defrosting" function on or off Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). X To activate: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights up. X Operating the climate control systems i You can adjust the blower level manually while the "Windshield defrosting" function is in operation: RAir-conditioning system: turn airflow control A counter-clockwise or clockwise (Y page 112). RDual-zone automatic climate control: press the ó or ô button. X To deactivate: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. The previously selected settings are restored. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated. or X Dual-zone climate control: press the à button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. or X Air-conditioning system: turn temperature control : counter-clockwise or clockwise (Y page 112). Dual-zone automatic climate control: turn temperature control : or E counter-clockwise or clockwise (Y page 114). MAX COOL maximum cooling The MAX COOL function is only available in vehicles for the USA. MAX COOL is only operational when the engine is running. To activate: press the Ù button. The indicator lamp in the button lights up. X To deactivate: press the Ù button. The indicator lamp goes out. The previously selected settings are restored. When you activate MAX COOL, climate control switches to the following functions: Rmaximum cooling Rmaximum airflow Rair-recirculation mode on X Removing condensation from the windows Windows fogged up on the inside Air-conditioning system Activate the ¿ "Cooling with air dehumidification" function. X If the windows continue to fog up, activate the ¬ "Windshield defrosting" function. i You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again. X Dual-zone automatic climate control Activate the ¿ "Cooling with air dehumidification" function. X Activate automatic mode Ã. X If the windows continue to fog up, activate the ¬ "Windshield defrosting" function. i You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again. X Windows fogged up on the outside Activate the windshield wipers. Set the air distribution to P or O. i You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again. X X Rear window defroster General notes The rear window defroster has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear window defroster switches off automatically after several minutes. Climate control The climate control system switches to the following functions: Rhigh airflow Rhigh temperature Rair distribution to the windshield and front side windows Rair-recirculation mode off i The "Windshield defrosting" function automatically sets the blower level to the optimum defrosting effect. As a result, the airflow may increase or decrease automatically after the ¬ button is pressed. 119 Operating the climate control systems 120 Climate control If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window defroster may switch off. Activating/deactivating Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). X Press the ¤ button. The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights up or goes out. X Problems with the rear window defroster Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The rear window defroster has deactivated prematurely or cannot be activated. X The battery has not been sufficiently charged. Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster can be activated again. Switching air-recirculation mode on/off General notes You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle from outside. The air already inside the vehicle will then be recirculated. If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the windows can fog up more quickly, in particular at low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation mode briefly to prevent the windows from fogging up. The operation of air-recirculation mode is the same for all control panels. Activating/deactivating Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). X To activate: press the e button. The indicator lamp in the e button lights up. Air-recirculation mode switches on automatically: Rat high outside temperatures Rat high levels of pollution When air-recirculation mode is activated automatically, the indicator lamp in the e button is not lit. Outside air is added after about 30 minutes. X X To deactivate: press the e button. The indicator lamp in the e button goes out. i Air-recirculation mode deactivates automatically: Rafter approximately five minutes at outside temperatures below approximately 45 ‡ (7 †) Rafter approximately five minutes if the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is deactivated Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately 45 ‡ (7 †) if the "Cooling with dehumidification" function is activated Switching the residual heat on or off General notes The residual heat function is only available in vehicles for Canada with dual-zone automatic climate control. It is possible to make use of the residual heat of the engine to continue heating the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes after the engine has been switched off. The heating time depends on the set interior temperature. i The blower will run at a low speed regardless of the airflow setting. Air vents i If you activate the residual heat function at high temperatures, only the ventilation will be activated. The blower runs at medium speed. 121 Setting the air vents i You cannot use the ventilation to cool the Activating/deactivating Turn the SmartKey to position g in the ignition lock or remove it (Y page 123). X Press the Ì button. The indicator lamp in the Ì button lights up or goes out. The indicator lamp in the button indicates that the respective function is activated. X i Residual heat is deactivated automatically: Rafter approximately 30 minutes the ignition is switched on Rif the battery voltage drops Rwhen : Side window defroster vent ; Side air vent To open a side air vent: turn the adjuster in side air vent ; to the left. X To close a side air vent: turn the adjuster in side air vent ; clockwise as far as it will go. X i The center and rear air vents are adjusted in the same way. Air vents Important safety notes G WARNING Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior. In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes: Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield and the hood free of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves. Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles in the vehicle interior. i For optimal climate control in the vehicle, open the air vents completely and set the adjusters to the central position. Z Climate control vehicle interior to a temperature lower than the outside temperature. Driving and parking 122 Driving Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle Driving Important safety notes Important safety notes The sensor system of some driving and driving safety systems adjusts automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in procedure. New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. The first 1000 miles (1500 km) The more you look after the engine when it is new, the more satisfied you will be with its performance in the future. RYou should therefore drive at varying vehicle and engine speeds for the first 1000 miles (1500 km). RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle, during this period. RChange gear in good time, before the tachometer needle is Ô of the way to the red area of the tachometer. RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brake the vehicle. RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance (kickdown). RIdeally, for the first 1000 miles (1500 km), drive in program E. Additional breaking-in notes for Mercedes-AMG vehicles: RDo not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km). ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly. RChange gear in good time. After 1,000 miles (1,500 km), you can increase the engine speed gradually and bring the vehicle to full speed. You should also observe these notes on breaking-in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced. Always observe the maximum permissible speed. G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another. G WARNING Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.: Rshoes with thick soles with high heels Rslippers There is a risk of an accident. Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals. Rshoes G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. G WARNING If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake can: Roverheat and cause a fire its hold function. There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release the parking brake fully before driving off. Rlose ! Do not warm up the engine while stationary. Pull away immediately. Avoid high engine speeds and full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature. In vehicles with automatic transmission, engage positions P and R only when the vehicle is stationary. Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. You could otherwise damage the drive train. ! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: avoid full-load operation and engine speeds greater than 5000 rpm when the engine is cold. This helps to protect the engine and avoids uncomfortable driving. Key positions SmartKey g To remove the SmartKey (shift the transmission to position j) 1 Power supply for some consumers, such as the windshield wipers 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position 3 To start the engine i The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on. The engine cannot be started. Start/Stop button A check which periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey determines whether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when starting the engine. When you insert the Start/Stop button into the ignition lock, the system needs approximately two seconds recognition time. You can then use the Start/Stop button. Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in succession corresponds to the different SmartKey positions in the ignition lock. This is only the case if you are not depressing the brake pedal. If you depress the brake pedal and press the Start/Stop button, the engine starts immediately. To start the vehicle without actively using the SmartKey: Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 71) Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key: Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey. Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil. Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case. This can affect the functionality of KEYLESS-GO. If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey remote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a short time: Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignition with the Start/Stop button. Ryou will no longer be able to start the engine with the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is unlocked again. If you lock the vehicle centrally using the button on the front door (Y page 76), you can continue to start the engine with the Start/Stop button. The engine can be switched off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/ Stop button for three seconds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function. General notes Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with SmartKeys featuring the integrated KEYLESSGO function and a detachable Start/Stop button. Z 123 Driving and parking Driving 124 Driving Driving and parking Key positions with the Start/Stop button X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition lock ;. You do not have to remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock when you leave the vehicle. You should, however, always take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. As long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle: Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/ Stop button Rthe electrically powered equipment can be operated : Start/Stop button ; Ignition lock As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. For further information on situations in which an indicator lamp either fails to go out after the engine is started or lights up while driving, please refer to "Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster" (Y page 221). If Start/Stop button : has not yet been pressed, this is the same as the SmartKey being removed from the ignition. X To switch on the power supply: press Start/Stop button : once. The power supply is switched on. You can now activate the windshield wipers, for example. The power supply is switched off again if: Rthe driver's door is opened and Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice when in this position X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop button : twice. The ignition is switched on. If you press Start/Stop button : once when in this position, the ignition is switched off again. Removing the Start/Stop button You can remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal using the SmartKey. You can only switch between Start/Stop button mode and SmartKey operation when the vehicle is stationary. You must also engage park position j. Starting the engine Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Roperate the vehicle's equipment Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position j the engine There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies for the Digital Vehicle Key if the "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect. Rstart G DANGER Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and can result in poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore, never leave the engine running in an enclosed space without adequate ventilation. Driving Flammable materials introduced through environmental influence or by animals can ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk of fire. Carry out regular checks to make sure that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or in the exhaust system. General notes During a cold start, the engine runs at higher speeds to enable the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature. The sound of the engine may change during this time. Automatic transmission X Shift the transmission to position j (Y page 132). The transmission position indicator on the multifunction display shows j (Y page 131). i You can start the engine in transmission positions j and i. Starting procedure with the SmartKey To start the engine using the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button, pull the Start/Stop button out of the ignition lock. X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the ignition lock (Y page 123) and release it as soon as the engine is running. Starting procedure with the Start/Stop button The Start/Stop button can be used to start the vehicle manually without inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle. This mode for starting the engine operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine start function. You can start the engine if a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. Switch off the engine and always take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only leave it for a short time. Pay attention to the important safety notes. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Press the Start/Stop button once (Y page 123). The engine starts. Starting procedure via smartphone Observe the important safety notes on starting the engine (Y page 124). You can also start your engine via your smartphone from outside the vehicle. In this case, the previously selected climate control setting is activated. In this way you can cool or heat the interior of the vehicle before starting the journey. Only start the engine via your smartphone if it is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked. Observe the legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked. Engine start via smartphone may be limited to certain countries or regions. You can execute a maximum of two consecutive starting attempts via your smartphone. If you insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock, you can carry out two more starting attempts. Once you have started the engine, you can switch the engine off via your smartphone at any time. You can only start the engine via your smartphone if: Rthe SmartKey is in the ignition lock Rpark position j is selected Rthe accelerator pedal is not depressed Rthe alarm for the anti-theft alarm system is not set Rthe panic alarm is not activated Rthe hazard warning lamps are switched off Rthe hood is closed Rthe doors are closed and locked Rthe windows and sliding sunroof are closed Also make sure that: Rthe fuel tank is sufficiently filled Rthe starter battery has been sufficiently charged Z Driving and parking G WARNING 125 126 Driving Driving and parking G WARNING Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during service or maintenance work. There is a risk of injury. Always secure the engine against unintentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work. Make sure that the engine cannot be started via your smartphone before carrying out maintenance or repairs. You can prevent an engine start via your smartphone, for example, if you: Rswitch on the hazard warning lamps Rdo not lock the doors Ropen the hood Pulling away General notes G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position 7 or C, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position 7 or C, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling away. The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 189). Vehicles with automatic transmission: it is possible to shift the transmission from position j to the desired position only if you depress the brake pedal. Only then can the parking lock be deactivated. All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): if you do not depress the brake pedal, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but the parking lock remains engaged. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: if you do not depress the brake pedal, the selector lever can still be moved but the parking lock remains engaged. At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †), you can only shift out of position j into another transmission position when the engine is running. i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly. Information on the automatic release of the electric parking brake (Y page 145). Hill start assist Hill start assist helps you when pulling away forward or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to depress it before the vehicle begins to roll. G WARNING After a short time, hill start assist will no longer brake your vehicle and it could roll away. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist. Hill start assist is not active if: are pulling away on a level road or on a downhill gradient. Rthe transmission is in position i. Rthe electric parking brake is applied. RESP® is malfunctioning. Further information on holding the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients (Y page 135). Ryou ECO start/stop function Introduction The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped under certain conditions. Driving Important safety notes G WARNING If the engine is switched off automatically and you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. There is a risk of accident and injury. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the ignition and secure the vehicle against rolling away. General notes Rthe battery is sufficiently charged Rthe system detects that the windshield is not fogged up when the air-conditioning system is switched on Rthe hood is closed Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's seat belt is fastened All of the vehicle's systems remain active when the engine is stopped automatically. The HOLD function can also be activated if the engine has been switched off automatically. It is then not necessary to continue applying the brakes during the automatic stop phase. When you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine starts automatically and the braking effect of the HOLD function is deactivated. Automatic engine switch-off can take place a maximum of four times in a row (initial stop, then three subsequent stops). Automatic engine start : ECO start/stop display The ECO start/stop function is activated whenever you start the engine using the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button. If the engine has been switched off automatically by the ECO start/stop function, the è ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction display. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop function is only available in drive program C. Automatic engine switch-off If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N, the ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automatically. The ECO start/stop function is operational when: Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit green Rthe outside temperature is within the range that is suitable for the system Rthe engine is at normal operating temperature Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior has been reached The engine starts automatically if: Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button Rin transmission position h or i, the brake pedal is released and the HOLD function is not active Ryou depress the accelerator pedal Ryou engage reverse gear k Ryou move the transmission out of position j Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driver's door Rthe vehicle starts to roll Rthe brake system requires this Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior deviates from the set range Rthe system detects moisture on the windshield when the air-conditioning system is switched on Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low Shifting the transmission to position P does not start the engine. Z Driving and parking The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. The ECO start/stop function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of your vehicle. 127 Driving 128 Driving and parking Deactivating or activating the ECO start/stop function AMG Performance exhaust system (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) You can choose between different AMG Performance exhaust system volumes using the position of the exhaust flap. Each time you start the engine with the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the quietest setting is activated. X To deactivate: press ECO button :. Indicator lamp ; goes out. X To activate: press ECO button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehicle stops. Setting the volume: X Press button :. If you select the loudest setting, indicator lamp ; lights up. Problems with the engine Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine does not start. The HOLD function or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated. X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 159) or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (Y page 156). X Try to start the engine again. The engine does not start. The starter motor can be heard. RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics. is a malfunction in the fuel supply. Before attempting to start the engine again: X Turn the SmartKey back to position g in the ignition lock. or X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. X Try to start the engine again. Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain the battery. RThere If the engine does not start after several attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine does not start. You cannot hear the starter motor. The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or discharged. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 282). If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high. X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes. X Try to start the engine again. If the engine still does not start: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine is not running There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical smoothly and is misfircomponent of the engine management system. ing. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it. X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. The coolant temperature The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no gauge shows a value longer being cooled sufficiently. above 248 ‡ (120 †). X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to The coolant warning cool down. lamp may also be on and X Check the coolant level (Y page 263). Observe the warning notes a warning tone may as you do so and add coolant if necessary. sound. Notes on towing vehicles The vehicle is not suitable for attaching tow bar systems, such as those used for flat towing or dinghy towing. Attaching or using tow bar systems may result in damage to the vehicle. When towing a vehicle with tow bar systems, safe driving characteristics cannot be guaranteed for the towing vehicle or the towed vehicle. The vehicle/trailer combination may swerve. Observe the permissible towing methods (Y page 287) and the notes on towing with both axles on the ground (Y page 286). DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to change the drive program. Depending on the drive program selected the following vehicle characteristics will change: Rthe drive (engine and transmission management) Rthe suspension (vehicles with damping system or AMG adaptive sport suspension system) Rthe sound of the exhaust system (vehicles with sports exhaust system) Rthe steering Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function Rthe climate control Each time you start the engine with the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, drive program C is Z Driving and parking DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 129 DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 130 Driving and parking activated. For further information about starting the engine, see (Y page 124). Press DYNAMIC SELECT button : as many times as necessary until the desired drive program is selected. The selected drive program appears in the multifunction display. After five seconds, the display goes out and the status symbol of the selected drive program appears. In addition, the current drive program settings are displayed briefly in the multimedia system display. i In a few countries, the ECO start/stop function is deactivated at the factory due to the available fuel grade. In this case, the ECO start/stop function is not available in any drive program, regardless of the display in the multimedia system display. Available drive programs: X C Comfort Comfortable and economical driving characteristics S Sport Sporty driving characteristics I Individual Individual settings E Economy Particularly economical driving characteristics Additional information for drive programs (Y page 135). You can also change gear yourself using the steering wheel paddle shifters. For further information on the manual drive program (Y page 137). DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to change the drive program. Depending on the drive program selected the following vehicle characteristics will change: Rthe drive Rthe transmission management RESP® Rthe suspension (vehicles with AMG adaptive sport suspension system) Rthe sound of the exhaust system Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function Rthe availability of gliding mode Each time you start the engine with the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, drive program C is activated. For further information about starting the engine, see (Y page 124). Turn DYNAMIC SELECT controller : as many times as necessary until the desired drive program is selected. The selected drive program appears in the multifunction display. After five seconds the display goes out and the symbol of the selected drive program appears. The drive program indicator on DYNAMIC SELECT controller : lights up in red. Available drive programs: X I Individual Individual settings C Comfort Comfort-oriented, optimum-economy engine and transmission settings S Sport Sporty engine and transmission settings Automatic transmission Particularly sporty transmission settings Race Maximum sportiness and engine and transmission settings suitable for the racetrack DIRECT SELECT lever Overview of transmission positions Additional information for drive programs (Y page 135). You can also change gear yourself using the steering wheel paddle shifters. For further information on the manual drive program (Y page 137). Automatic transmission Important safety notes G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position 7 or C, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position 7 or C, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. Park position with parking lock Reverse gear Neutral Drive All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): the DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the steering column. For information on the selector lever in Mercedes-AMG vehicles (Y page 133). The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its original position. The current transmission position j, k, i or h is shown in the transmission position display in the multifunction display (Y page 131). j k i h Transmission position and drive program display The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display. : Transmission position display ; Gear = Drive program display The arrows in the transmission position display show how and into which transmission positions you can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever. If the transmission position display in the multifunction display is not working, you should pull Z Driving and parking S+ Sport Plus 131 Driving and parking 132 Automatic transmission and on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (Y page 155). away carefully to check whether the desired transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you should select transmission position h and drive program E or S. Engaging reverse gear R Engaging park position P ! Only move the automatic transmission to ! If the engine speed is too high or the vehicle X is coasting, do not shift the automatic transmission directly from h to k, from k to h or directly to j. Otherwise, the automatic transmission may be damaged. X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever switch in the direction of arrow j. Transmission position display j is shown in the multifunction display. When you have engaged park position j, make sure that the transmission position display shows j in the multifunction display. You can engage park position j only when the vehicle is stationary; do not switch directly to park position j at high engine speed. Depressing the brake and pushing the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down disengages the parking lock. The transmission is in neutral i. At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †), you can only shift out of park position j into another transmission position when the engine is running. In order to shift from park position j directly into k or h: Rdepress the brake pedal and the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down past the first point of resistance Rpush Engaging park position P automatically Park position j is automatically engaged if: Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey and remove the SmartKey Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey or using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door or front-passenger door Ryou open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary or when driving at a very low speed and the transmission is in position h or k In certain situations, the automatic transmission shifts automatically to transmission position j if the HOLD function or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated. Observe the information on the HOLD function (Y page 159) k when the vehicle is stationary. Depress the brake and keep it pressed. Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance. The ECO start/stop function is not available when reverse gear is engaged. Further information on the ECO start/stop function (Y page 127). X Shifting to neutral N G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Roperate the vehicle's equipment Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position j the engine There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies for the Digital Vehicle Key if the "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect. Rstart If the transmission is in position h or k: push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. X If the transmission is in position j: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position k or h, the automatic transmission shifts to i automatically. With the SmartKey: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door or remove X Automatic transmission Engaging drive position D If the transmission is in position k or i: push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. X If the transmission is in position j: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. X i Neutral h Drive Transmission position and drive program display The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display. : Transmission position display ; Drive program display If the transmission position display in the multifunction display is not working, you should pull away carefully to check whether the desired transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you should select transmission position h and drive program C or S. Engaging park position P Selector lever (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Overview of transmission positions X When the vehicle is stationary, press button :. Engaging reverse gear R ! Only move the automatic transmission to k when the vehicle is stationary. X X Depress the brake and keep it pressed. Push the selector lever forwards past the first point of resistance. j Park position with parking lock k Reverse gear Z Driving and parking the SmartKey from the ignition, the automatic transmission shifts to j automatically. With the Start/Stop button: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door, the automatic transmission shifts to j automatically. If you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral i, e.g. when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing system: X Vehicles with the Start-Stop button: remove the Start-Stop button from the ignition lock. X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X All vehicles: switch the ignition on. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Engage neutral i. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock. 133 134 Automatic transmission Transmission positions Driving and parking B C Park position This prevents the vehicle from rolling away when stopped. Only shift the transmission to position j when the vehicle is stationary. The parking lock should not be used as a brake when parking. Always apply the electronic parking brake in addition to the parking lock in order to secure the vehicle. In the event of a malfunction of the vehicle's electronics, the transmission may lock in position j. Have the vehicle electronics checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Park position j is automatically engaged if: Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey and remove the SmartKey Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey or using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door or front-passenger door Ryou open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary or when driving at a very low speed and the transmission is in position h or k Reverse gear Only shift the transmission into position k when the vehicle is stationary. A Neutral Do not shift the transmission to i while driving. The automatic transmission could otherwise be damaged. No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive wheels. Releasing the brakes will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it. If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: shift the transmission to position i if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position k or h, the automatic transmission shifts to i automatically. ! Coasting in neutral i may cause damage to the drive train. 7 Drive The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available. Driving tips Changing gear The automatic transmission shifts through the individual gears automatically when it is in transmission position h. This automatic gear shifting behavior is determined by: Rthe selected drive program Rthe position of the accelerator pedal Rthe road speed Accelerator pedal position Your style of driving influences how the automatic transmission shifts gear: Rlittle throttle: early upshifts Rmore throttle: late upshifts Automatic transmission G WARNING If the clutch overheats, the electronic management system is automatically deactivated. This interrupts the power transmission. The vehicle may, for example, roll backwards on gradients. There is a risk of an accident. Never hold the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients by depressing the accelerator. The clutch may overheat if you hold the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients by depressing the accelerator pedal. If the clutch overheats, a warning tone sounds. All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): the Stop Vehicle Shift to 'P' Leave Engine Running display message appears in the multifunction display. You will only be able to continue your journey once the clutch has cooled down and the display message in the multifunction display has disappeared. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the Trans. Oil Overheated Drive on with Care display message appears in the multifunction display. Do not hold the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients by depressing the accelerator pedal. Instead, only ever hold the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients by: Rdepressing the brake pedal Ractivating the HOLD function Rengaging the electric parking brake Kickdown Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The automatic transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached. The automatic transmission shifts back up. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: it is only possible to use kickdown in the automatic drive program and the temporary manual drive program M. When manual drive program M is permanently activated, kickdown is not possible. For further information on kickdown in manual drive program M (Y page 139). Rocking the vehicle free Shifting back and forth between transmission positions h and k can help to free up the vehicle if it gets stuck in mud or snow. The vehicle's engine management system limits the speed to a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h) when shifting back and forth. To shift repeatedly between transmission positions h and k, move the DIRECT SELECT lever up and down past the point of resistance. Drive programs All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Drive program C (Comfort) Drive program C is characterized by the following: Rthe vehicle delivers comfortable, economical handling characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, for example on slippery road surfaces. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed range and the wheels are less likely to spin. Drive program S (Sport) Drive program S is characterized by the following: Rsporty engine settings. Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later. The fuel consumption possibly being higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points. Z Driving and parking Holding the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients 135 136 Automatic transmission Driving and parking Drive program I (Individual) In drive program I the following properties of the drive program can be selected: Rthe drive (engine and transmission management) Rthe suspension (vehicles with damping system or AMG adaptive sport suspension system) Rthe steering Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function Rthe climate control Information about configuring drive program I with the multimedia system can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. i To permanently select the gears in drive program I using the steering wheel paddle shifters, select the M (manual) setting for the drive. Drive program E (Economy) Drive program E is characterized by the following: Rcomfort-oriented engine settings. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, for example on slippery road surfaces. Rthe automatic transmission shifting up sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven at lower engine speeds and the wheels being less likely to spin. Rgliding mode is activated automatically when engine-internal conditions are fulfilled and the accelerator is not depressed. At the same time the transmission’s clutch opens and the vehicle rolls freely using its kinetic energy. As a result great distances can be completed without the engine brake and fuel consumption reduced. i The availability of gliding mode depends on various factors, including the following: Rthe engine and transmission temperature Rthe downhill gradient Rthe vehicle speed Rperforming regular adaptation functions When you depress the brake pedal, gliding mode is deactivated, depending on pedal pressure. When you activate cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, gliding mode is not available. Mercedes-AMG vehicles Drive program I (Individual) In drive program I the following properties of the drive program can be selected: Rthe drive (engine management) Rthe transmission management Rthe suspension (vehicles with AMG adaptive sport suspension system) RESP® Information about configuring drive program I with the multimedia system can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Drive program C (Comfort) Drive program C is characterized by the following: Rthe vehicle delivers comfortable, economical handling characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, for example on slippery road surfaces. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed range and the wheels are less likely to spin. Rgliding mode is available. Rthe ECO start/stop function is available. Drive program S (Sport) Drive program S is characterized by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits sporty driving characteristics. Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later. The fuel consumption possibly being higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points. Rthe suspension exhibits stiff springing and damping settings (vehicles with AIR adaptive sport suspension system). Rgliding Rthe mode is not available. ECO start/stop function is not available. Drive program S+ (Sport Plus) Drive program S+ is characterized by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits particularly sporty driving characteristics. Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later. Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points. Rthe suspension exhibits particularly stiff springing and damping settings (vehicles with AMG adaptive sport suspension system). Rgliding mode is not available. Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: to use manual shifting, you have two options: Rtemporary setting Rpermanent setting If you activate manual gearshifting, the multifunction display will show the current gear instead of transmission position h. If manual gearshifting is deactivated, the gears will be selected automatically. Temporary setting Drive program RACE (vehicles with AMG adaptive sport suspension system) The RACE drive program is characterized by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits driving characteristics suitable for the racetrack. Rall vehicle systems are set for maximum sportiness. Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later. Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points. Rthe suspension exhibits particularly stiff springing and damping settings. Rgliding mode is not available. Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available. Manual gear shifting General notes You can change gear yourself using the steering wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must be in position h to do this. Depending on which steering wheel paddle shifter is pulled, the automatic transmission immediately shifts into the next gear down or up, if permitted. To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to position h. X Pull steering wheel paddle shifter : or ;. X Temporary setting will be active for a certain amount of time. Under certain conditions the minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the case of lateral acceleration, during an overrun phase or when driving on steep terrain. X To deactivate: pull steering wheel paddle shifter ; and hold it in place. or X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position. or X All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to change the drive program. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to change the drive program. Z 137 Driving and parking Automatic transmission Automatic transmission 138 Driving and parking Permanent setting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) X To activate: shift the selector lever to h. Press button :. X To deactivate: press button :. X or X All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): if the maximum engine speed on the currently engaged gear is reached and you continue to accelerate, the automatic transmission automatically shifts up in order to prevent engine damage. X To shift down: pull steering wheel paddle shifter :. The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. Automatic down shifting occurs when coasting. If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down. Shift recommendation If position D (automatic transmission) is selected for the transmission in drive program I: shift to drive program I with the DYNAMIC SELECT controller. Shifting gears ! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the automatic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. Always make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage. The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. The recommended gear is shown in the multifunction display. X Shift to recommended gear ; according to gearshift recommendation : when shown in the multifunction display. Upshifting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ! In manual mode, the automatic transmis- sion does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. Always make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage. X To shift up: pull steering wheel paddle shifter ;. The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. Before the engine speed reaches the red area, an upshift indicator will be shown in the multifunction display. X Shift to recommended gear : when message ; is shown in the multifunction display. During kickdown, you cannot shift gears using the steering wheel paddle shifters. If you apply full throttle, the automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear when the maximum engine speed is reached. This prevents the engine from overrevving. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: it is only possible to use kickdown in temporary manual drive program M. When manual drive program M is permanently activated, kickdown is not possible. Kickdown For maximum acceleration, depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The automatic transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Shift back up once the desired speed is reached. X Problems with the transmission Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The transmission has problems shifting gear. The transmission is losing oil. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode. is deteriorating. X Stop the vehicle. The transmission no lon- X Shift the transmission to position j. ger shifts into all of the X Switch off the engine. gears. X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine. Reverse gear can no lonX Shift the transmission to position h. ger be engaged. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Refueling Important safety notes G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. Risk of fire and explosion by improper handling of fuel. You must avoid fire, open flames, smoking and creating sparks. Switch off the ignition before refueling and, if present, switch off the auxiliary heating. G WARNING Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Z 139 Driving and parking Refueling 140 Refueling Driving and parking You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel vapors. Keep fuel away from children. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water. RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel. G WARNING Electrostatic charge can cause sparks and thereby ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and explosion. Before you open the fuel filler cap or take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle body. This discharges any electrostatic charge that may have built up. Do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again. ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the fuel system. ! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. ! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can. The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection system could otherwise be blocked by particles from the fuel can. Do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again. If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed. For further information on fuel and fuel quality (Y page 319). Refueling General information Pay attention to the important safety notes (Y page 139). The fuel filler flap is unlocked/locked automatically when you unlock/lock the vehicle with the SmartKey. The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed æ in the instrument cluster. The arrow on the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle. On the inside of the fuel filler cap, you will find information on the recommended fuel. Refueling Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on the inside of fuel filler flap =. X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. X i Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak out. : ; = ? To open the fuel filler flap Tire pressure table To insert the fuel filler cap Instruction label for fuel type to be refueled Switch off the engine. Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS‑GO X Open the driver's door. The vehicle electronics are now in position g. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow :. The fuel filler flap swings up. X Turn the fuel filler cap counter-clockwise and remove it. X X Closing the fuel filler flap Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly. X Close the fuel filler flap. Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle. If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A message appears in the multifunction display (Y page 208). In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up (Y page 226). For further information on warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, see (Y page 226). X Z Driving and parking Opening the fuel filler flap 141 142 Parking Driving and parking Problems with fuel and the fuel tank Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty. G WARNING Risk of explosion or fire. X Apply the electric parking brake. X Switch off the engine. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS‑GO X Open the driver's door. The vehicle electronics are now in position g. This is the same as the SmartKey being removed from the ignition. X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The fuel filler flap cannot The fuel filler flap is not unlocked. be opened. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 70). The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 77). The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Parking Important safety notes G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust gas flow. There is a risk of fire. Park the vehicle so that no flammable materials come into contact with parts of the vehicle which are hot. Take particular care not to park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields. G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Roperate the vehicle's equipment Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position j the engine There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies for the Digital Vehicle Key if the "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect. Rstart ! Always secure the vehicle correctly against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its drivetrain could be damaged. Parking Switching off the engine Important safety notes G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. Automatic transmission X Apply the electric parking brake. X All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): shift the transmission to position j. With the SmartKey : turn the SmartKey to position g in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobilizer is activated. X With the Start/Stop button: press the Start/Stop button (Y page 123). The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. If the driver's door is closed, this is the same as key position 1. If the driver's door is open, this is the same as key position g, i.e. the SmartKey having been removed. If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position k or h, the automatic transmission shifts to i automatically. With the SmartKey: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door or remove the SmartKey from the ignition, the automatic transmission shifts to j automatically. With the Start/Stop button: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door, the automatic transmission shifts to j automatically. If you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral i, e.g. when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing system: X Vehicles with the Start-Stop button: remove the Start-Stop button from the ignition lock. X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X All vehicles: switch the ignition on. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Engage neutral i. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock. X Electric parking brake General notes X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: press button :. G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Roperate the vehicle's equipment Z Driving and parking To ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away unintentionally: Rthe electric parking brake must be applied. Rthe transmission must be in position j and the transmission position display must show j in the multifunction display. Rthe SmartKey must be removed from the ignition lock. Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the front wheels must be turned towards the curb. 143 144 Parking Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease X To engage: push handle :. When the electric parking brake is applied, the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. The electric parking brake can also be applied when the SmartKey is removed. X To release: pull handle :. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The electric parking brake can only be released: Rif the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123) or Rif the ignition was switched on using the Start/Stop button the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position j the engine There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies for the Digital Vehicle Key if the "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect. Driving and parking Rstart The function of the electric parking brake is dependent on the on-board voltage. If the onboard voltage is low or there is a malfunction in the system, it may not be possible to apply the released parking brake. X If this is the case, only park the vehicle on level ground and secure it to prevent it rolling away. X Shift the automatic transmission to position j. It may not be possible to release an applied parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. The electric parking brake performs a function test at regular intervals while the engine is switched off. The sounds that can be heard while this is occurring are normal. Applying or releasing manually Applying automatically The electric parking brake is automatically applied when the transmission is in position j and: Rthe engine is switched off or Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the driver's door is opened To prevent the electric parking brake from being automatically applied, pull handle :. The electric parking brake is also applied automatically if: RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC brings the vehicle to a standstill or Rthe HOLD function is keeping the vehicle stationary RActive Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle stationary In addition, at least one of the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe engine is switched off Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the driver's door is opened Rthere is a system malfunction Rthe power supply is insufficient Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The electric parking brake is not automatically applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function. Driving tips Your vehicle's electric parking brake is automatically released if all of the following conditions are met: RThe engine is running. RThe transmission is in position h or k and you depress the accelerator pedal or shift from position j to h or k. RThe seat belt has been fastened. If the transmission is in position k, the trunk lid must be closed. If your seat belt is not fastened, the following conditions must be fulfilled to automatically release the electric parking brake: RThe driver's door is closed. RYou are shifting from transmission position j or have previously driven at speeds greater than 2 mph (3 km/h). Ensure that you do not depress the accelerator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise, the parking brake will be released and the vehicle will start to move. Emergency braking The vehicle can also be braked during an emergency by using the electric parking brake. X While driving, push handle : of the electric parking brake (Y page 144). The vehicle is braked as long as you keep handle : of the electric parking brake pressed. The longer the electric parking brake handle : is depressed, the greater the braking force. During braking: Ra warning tone sounds Rthe Release Parking Brake message appears Rthe red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster flashes When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. Parking the vehicle for a long period If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than four weeks, the battery may be damaged by exhaustive discharging. If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a result of lack of use. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice. i You can obtain information about trickle chargers from a qualified specialist workshop. Driving tips General notes Important safety notes G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. G WARNING If you operate mobile communication equipment when driving, you may be distracted from the traffic situation. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the vehicle is stationary. Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle. If you make a call while driving, always use hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone when the traffic situation permits. If you are unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop before operating the telephone. Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per second. Z Driving and parking Releasing automatically 145 146 Driving tips Driving and parking Drive sensibly – save fuel Observe the following tips to save fuel: RThe tires should always be inflated to the recommended tire pressure. RRemove unnecessary loads. RRemove roof racks when they are not needed. RWarm up the engine at low engine speeds. RAvoid frequent acceleration or braking. RHave all maintenance work carried out as indicated by the service intervals in the Maintenance Booklet or by the service interval display. Fuel consumption also increases when driving in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly terrain. Drinking and driving G WARNING Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment. The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident is greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs. Emission control G DANGER Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and can result in poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore, never leave the engine running in an enclosed space without adequate ventilation. Certain engine systems are designed to keep the level of poisonous components in exhaust fumes within legal limits. These systems only work at peak efficiency if they are serviced exactly in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. Always have work on the engine carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized MercedesBenz Center for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The engine settings must not be changed under any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific service work must be carried out at regular intervals and in accordance with the MercedesBenz service requirements. Details can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. ECO display The ECO display shows you how economical your driving style is. The ECO display assists you in achieving the most economical driving style for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. Your driving style can significantly influence the vehicle's consumption. : ; = ? Acceleration Coasting Constant Additional range achieved Range ? is shown under Bonus fr. Start and represents the additional range achieved since the beginning of the journey as a result of an adapted driving style. If the fuel level has dropped into the reserve range, the Fuel Low message is shown in the multifunction display instead of range ?. The 8 warning lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up (Y page 226). The ECO display consists of three sections, with an inner and outer area. The sections correspond to the following three categories: : Acceleration (evaluation of the acceleration processes): Rthe outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: moderate acceleration, especially at higher speeds Rthe outer area empties and the inner area is gray: sporty acceleration ; Coasting (evaluation of all deceleration processes): Rthe outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: anticipatory driving, keeping your distance and early release of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast without use of the brakes. Rthe outer area empties and the inner area is gray: frequent heavy braking = Constant (continuous evaluation over the entire journey): Rthe outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: constant speed and avoidance of unnecessary acceleration and deceleration Rthe outer area empties and the inner area is gray: fluctuations in speed The three inner areas display the current driving style and light up green as a result of a particularly economical driving style. Depending on the driving situation, up to two areas may light up simultaneously. At the beginning of the journey, the three outer areas are empty and fill up as a result of economical driving. A higher level indicates a more economical driving style. If the three outer areas are completely filled at the same time, the driver has adopted the most economical driving style for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. The ECO display border lights up. The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel consumption. The additionally achieved range displayed under Bonus fr. Start does not indicate a fixed consumption reduction. In addition to driving style, the actual consumption is affected by other factors, such as: RLoad RTire pressure RCold start RChoice of route RActive electrical consumers These factors are not included in the ECO display. An economical driving style specially requires driving at moderate engine speeds. Achieving a higher value in the categories "Acceleration" and "Constant": Robserve the gearshift recommendations. Rdrive the vehicle in drive program C or E (vehicles with a DYNAMIC SELECT button). On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the highway, only the outer area for "constant" will change. The ECO display summarizes the driving style from the start of the journey to its completion. Therefore, there are more marked changes in the outer areas at the start of a journey. On longer journeys, there are fewer changes. For more marked changes, perform a manual rest (Y page 183). For more information on the ECO display, see (Y page 182). Braking Important safety notes G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. Downhill gradients ! On long and steep gradients, you must reduce the load on the brakes by shifting to a lower gear in good time. This allows you to take advantage of engine braking. For this you must first activate manual gearshifting. This Z 147 Driving and parking Driving tips Driving and parking 148 Driving tips helps you to avoid overheating the brakes and wearing them out excessively. When you take advantage of engine braking, it is possible that a drive wheel will not rotate for some time, e.g. on a slippery road surface. This could cause damage to the drive train. This type of damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty. Briefly depressing the accelerator pedal on downhill gradients while the manual drive program M is temporarily activated: the automatic transmission may switch to the last active automatic drive program E or S. The automatic transmission may shift to a higher gear. This can reduce the engine's braking effect. Heavy and light loads G WARNING If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, the braking system can overheat. This increases the stopping distance and can even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time. ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly Limited braking performance on salttreated roads If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt residue may form on the brake discs and brake pads. This can result in a significantly longer braking distance. RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, apply the brakes occasionally while paying attention to the traffic conditions. RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the beginning and end of a journey. RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle ahead. Servicing the brakes ! The brake fluid level may be too low, if: Rif the red brake warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and Ryou hear a warning tone while the engine is running Observe additional warning messages in the multifunction display. The brake fluid level may be too low due to brake pad wear or leaking brake lines. Have the brake system checked immediately. Consult a qualified specialist workshop to arrange this. results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads. If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly. ! A function or performance test should only Wet roads ! As the ESP® system operates automatically, If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain without braking, there may be a delayed reaction from the brakes when braking for the first time. This may also occur after the vehicle has been washed or driven through deep water. You have to depress the brake pedal more firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front. After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly and protecting them against corrosion. be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. If you wish to operate the vehicle on such a dynamometer, please consult a qualified specialist workshop in advance. You could otherwise damage the drive train or the brake system. the engine and the ignition must be switched off (the SmartKey must be in position u or 1 in the ignition lock), if the electric parking brake is tested on a braking dynamometer (maximum 10 seconds). Braking triggered automatically by ESP® may cause severe damage to the brake system. All checks and maintenance work on the brake system must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Have brake pads installed and brake fluid replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. If the brake system has only been subject to moderate loads, you should test the functionality of your brakes at regular intervals. You can find a description of Brake Assist (BAS) on (Y page 61). Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have brake pads/linings installed on your vehicle which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond to an equivalent quality standard. Brake pads/linings which have not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use brake fluid that has been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corresponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brake fluid which has not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety. Checking brake lining thickness You can measure the break pad/lining thickness using a test gage. Color-coding (green or red) on the test gage allows you to determine whether the brake pad/lining thickness is still sufficient. The test gage is in the vehicle document wallet in the glove box. Rear wheel Bring the vehicle and wheels into a suitable position so that you can attach test gage A. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 142). X Engage park position P. X Switch off the engine. X Place test gage A between the wheel's spokes on brake pad/lining =. X Hold test gage A vertically on brake disc : and slide measuring pin ; onto brake disc :. X Check which color field ? the arrow on measuring pin ; is pointing to. Green: the brake pad/lining thickness is sufficient. Red: the brake pad/lining thickness is not sufficient. Have the brake pads/lining checked at a qualified specialist workshop. To avoid an inaccurate measurement: Rmake sure you position the wheels suitably Rdo not put the measuring pin on a recess in the brake disc X Driving on wet roads Front wheel Hydroplaning If the road surface is wet, hydroplaning may occur depending on water level, speed and tire tread depth. Z 149 Driving and parking Driving tips 150 Driving systems Driving and parking For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in conditions in which hydroplaning may occur, you must drive in the following manner: Rlower your speed Ravoid ruts Ravoid sudden steering movements Rbrake carefully Driving on flooded roads ! Do not drive through flooded areas. Check the depth of any water before driving through it. Drive slowly through standing water. Otherwise, water could enter the vehicle interior or engine compartment. It can then damage the engine's or automatic transmission's electronic components. It can also be sucked in by the engine's air intake connection and cause engine damage. Winter driving G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. G DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of fatal injury. If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area around the vehicle are clear of snow. To ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle that is not facing into the wind. Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking maneuvers. Do not use cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed: X Shift the transmission to position i. X Try to bring the vehicle under control using corrective steering. The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point. For more information on driving with snow chains, see (Y page 293). For more information on driving with summer tires, see (Y page 292). Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section (Y page 292). Driving systems Cruise control General notes Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden, you must select a low gear in good time. You need to shift manually using the steering wheel paddle shifters beforehand. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. When the engine is running, you can use the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any speed between 20 mph (30 km/h) and the technically permitted maximum speed of the vehicle. Use cruise control if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady speed for a prolonged period. Driving systems Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise control can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. Do not use cruise control: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid Rin poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. Cruise control lever Activation conditions To activate cruise control, all of the following activation conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe electric parking brake must be released. RESP® must be active, but not intervening. Rthe transmission must be in position h. Storing, maintaining and calling up a speed Storing and maintaining the current speed You can store the current speed if you are driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h). X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ;. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the stored speed. i Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically applying the brakes. Storing the current speed or calling up the last stored speed G WARNING Activates or increases speed Activates or reduces speed Deactivates cruise control Activates at the current speed/last stored speed When you activate cruise control, the stored speed is shown in the multifunction display for five seconds. : ; = ? If you call up the stored speed and it differs from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again. Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The first time cruise control is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed. X Z Driving and parking The speed indicated in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed stored. 151 Driving systems 152 Driving and parking Setting a speed Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to the speed set. X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up : past the pressure point for a higher speed, or down ; for a lower speed. X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up : to the pressure point for a higher speed, or down ; for a lower speed. i Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Deactivating cruise control There are several ways to deactivate cruise control: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards =. or X Brake. Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: Rthe vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph (30 km/h) RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® Ryou shift the transmission to position i while driving If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐ trol Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. i When you switch off the engine, the last speed stored is cleared. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC General notes Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC regulates the speed and automatically helps you maintain the distance from the vehicle detected in front. Vehicles are detected with the aid of the radar sensor system. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes automatically to avoid exceeding the set speed or to maintain the designated distance from the vehicle in front. If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC detects that there is a risk of a collision with the vehicle in front, you will be warned visually and audibly. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot prevent a collision without your intervention. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately in order to increase the distance to the vehicle in front or take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC operates in the speed range between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. This is especially important if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC on roads with steep gradients. For Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be operational. As Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC transmits radar waves, it can resemble the radar detectors of the responsible authorities. You can refer to the relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if questions are asked about this. i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any nonapproved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any nonapproved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Important safety notes G WARNING Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not react to: Rpeople or animals Rstationary objects in the road, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles vehicles and crossing traffic As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Roncoming G WARNING Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot always clearly identify other road users and complex traffic situations. In such cases, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC can: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rneither give a warning nor intervene Raccelerate or brake unexpectedly There is a risk of an accident. Continue to drive carefully and be ready to brake, especially if Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC warns you. G WARNING Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the maximum possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not sufficient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust your speed in these cases and maintain sufficient distance. Apply the brakes yourself and/or take evasive action. ! When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the HOLD function in the following or similar situations: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving style, nor override the laws of physics. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: RIn road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads ROn slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid RIn poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may not detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehicles driving in a staggered formation. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: RThere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors RThere is snow or heavy rain Z 153 Driving and parking Driving systems 154 Driving systems RThere is interference by other radar sources are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may unexpectedly accelerate to the speed stored. This speed may: RBe too high if you are driving in a turning lane or an exit lane RBe so high when driving in the right-hand lane that you overtake vehicles in the left-hand lane RBe so high in the left lane that you pass vehicles driving on the right If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. Driving and parking RThere Cruise control lever To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the HOLD function in the following or similar situations: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash To activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, all the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe engine must be started. It may take up to two minutes of driving before Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is ready for use. Rthe electric parking brake must be released. RESP® must be active, but not intervening. RActive Parking Assist must not be activated. Rthe transmission must be in position h. Rthe driver's door must be closed when you shift from j to h or your seat belt must be fastened. Rthe front-passenger door must be closed. Rthe vehicle must not skid. Activating Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?, up : or down ;. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed up : or down ; until the desired speed is set. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the desired stored speed. i If you do not fully release the accelerator pedal, the Act. Distance Assist Suspen‐ ded message appears in the multifunction display. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not be maintained. You will be driving at the speed you determine by the position of the accelerator pedal. Act. Distance Assist Suspended SuspendedYou can also activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC when stationary. The lowest speed that can be set is 20 mph (30 km/h). X : Stores the current speed or a higher speed ; Stores the current speed or a lower speed = Deactivates Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ? Stores the current speed or calls up the last stored speed A Setting a specified minimum distance Activating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Activation conditions ! When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. Driving systems Activating at the current speed or last stored speed G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and it differs from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again. Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The first time Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed. X Pulling away and driving If you want to pull away with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the brake pedal. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. or X If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated: accelerate briefly. Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to the set speed. The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a different line from another vehicle. The vehicle then brakes automatically. Be ready to brake at all times. If there is no vehicle in front, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC operates in the same way as cruise control. If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC detects a slower-moving vehicle in front, it brakes your vehicle. In this way, the distance you have selected is maintained. X If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC detects a faster-moving vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed. However, the vehicle is only accelerated up to the speed you have stored. i Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated when you depress the brake, except when the vehicle is stationary. Selecting the drive program Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC supports a sporty driving style when you select the S+ drive program (Y page 135) or the manual drive program (Y page 137). Acceleration behind the vehicle in front or to the set speed is then noticeably more dynamic. If you have selected the E (Mercedes-AMG vehicles: C) drive program, the vehicle accelerates more gently. This setting is recommended in stop-and-start traffic. Changing lanes If you want to change to the overtaking lane on multi-lane roads, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC supports you if: Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h) RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC is maintaining the distance to a vehicle in front Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not currently detect a danger of collision If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if changing lanes takes too long or if the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front becomes too small. Stopping If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC detects that the vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it is stationary. Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains stationary and you do not need to depress the brake. i After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake. i Depending on the specified minimum dis- tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in front. The specified minimum distance is set using the control on the cruise control lever. Z Driving and parking Driving with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC 155 Driving and parking 156 Driving systems When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated, the transmission is shifted automatically to position j if: The specified minimum distance can be changed while Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is switched on or off. Rthe i Make sure that you maintain the minimum driver's seat belt is not fastened and the driver's door is open. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function. The electric parking brake is applied automatically if Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is active when the vehicle is stationary and: Ra system malfunction occurs. Rthe power supply is insufficient. If a malfunction occurs, the transmission may also shift to position j automatically. distance to the vehicle in front as required by law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if necessary. Setting a speed Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to the speed set. X Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): briefly push the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the pressure point. The last stored speed increases or decreases in 1 mph (1 km/h) increments. X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments): briefly push the cruise control lever up : or down ; beyond the pressure point. The last stored speed increases or decreases in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments. To increase: turn control = in direction ;. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC then maintains a greater distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X To decrease: turn control = in direction :. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC then maintains a shorter distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC i Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you accelerate to overtake, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored, after you have finished overtaking. Setting a specified minimum distance You can set the specified minimum distance for Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC by varying the time span between one and two seconds. This determines the distance that Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is to maintain from the vehicle in front, depending on the road speed. You can see this distance in the multifunction display (Y page 157). There are several ways to deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :. or X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary. Driving systems or Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :. Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary. When you deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the Active Distance Assist Off message appears on the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. X When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated and there are no vehicles detected in front, one or two segments ; in the set speed range light up. If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC detects a vehicle in front, segments ; from speed of the vehicle in front = to stored speed : light up. i For design reasons, the speed displayed on the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed set for Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. i The last speed stored remains stored until you switch off the engine. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is automatically deactivated if: Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if the vehicle is automatically secured with the electric parking brake RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® Rthe transmission is in position j, k or i Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you in order to pull away and the front-passenger door or one of the rear doors is open Rthe vehicle is skidding Ryou activate Active Parking Assist If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated automatically, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the Active Distance Assist Off message on the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is also automatically deactivated when you activate DSR. The à DSR symbol appears in the multifunction display. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC displays in the instrument cluster Displays in the speedometer Display when Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated In the Assistance menu (Y page 186) of the onboard computer, you can select the assistance display. : Vehicle in front, if detected ; Distance indicator, current distance to the vehicle in front = Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable ? Your vehicle X Select the Assistance Graphic function using the on-board computer (Y page 187). Display when Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated You will initially see the stored speed for approximately five seconds when you activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. Z Driving and parking X 157 Driving systems Driving and parking 158 : Vehicle in front, if detected ; Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable = Your vehicle ? Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active (text only appears when the cruise control lever is actuated) X Select the Assistance Graphic function using the on-board computer (Y page 187). Tips for driving with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC General notes Pay particular attention in the following traffic situations: RCornering, entering and exiting a bend: the ability of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC to detect vehicles on bends is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late. RVehicles driving in a staggered formation: Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may not detect vehicles that are not driving in the middle of their lanes. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. ROther vehicles changing lane: Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too short. RNarrow vehicles: Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has not yet detected the vehicle in front on the edge of the road because of its narrow width. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. RObstacles and stationary vehicles: Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detected vehicle turns a corner and an obstacle or stationary vehicle is revealed, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC will not brake for them. RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC may mistakenly detect vehicles that are crossing your lane. If you activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC under the following conditions, the vehicle could pull away unintentionally: - At traffic lights with crossing traffic, for example. - if there is a vehicle in front, after a crossing, with the HOLD function activated In such situations, brake if necessary. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC will then be deactivated. HOLD function General notes The HOLD function can assist the driver in the following situations: Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes Rwhen waiting in traffic The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD function deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. Important safety notes G WARNING If the vehicle is only braked using the HOLD function, the vehicle may roll away in the following situations when you leave the vehicle: Rif there is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply Rif the HOLD function is deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant Rif the electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with or the battery is disconnected There is a risk of an accident. Always deactivate the HOLD function and secure the vehicle against rolling away before you leave it. Driving systems the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the HOLD function in the following or similar situations: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash Deactivating the HOLD function (Y page 159). Activation conditions You can activate the HOLD function if: Rthe vehicle is stationary Rthe engine is running or if it has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt is fastened Rthe electric parking brake is released RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated Rthe transmission is in position h, k or i on vehicles with automatic transmission Activating the HOLD function Make sure that the activation conditions are met. X Depress the brake pedal. X Quickly depress the brake pedal further until : appears in the multifunction display. The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal. X i If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again. Deactivating the HOLD function The HOLD function is deactivated automatically if: Ryou accelerate. On vehicles with automatic transmission: only when the transmission is in position h or k. Rthe transmission is in position j on vehicles with automatic transmission. Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a certain amount of pressure until : disappears from the multifunction display. Ryou activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric parking brake. i After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake. When the HOLD function is activated, the transmission is automatically shifted to position j if: Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the driver's door is open Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if the HOLD function is activated when the vehicle is stationary and: Ra system malfunction occurs Rthe power supply is insufficient Start-off Assist (except MercedesAMG vehicles) Important safety notes G WARNING If you use start-off assist, individual wheels may start to spin and the vehicle may skid. If ESP® is deactivated, there is a greater danger of skidding and having an accident. Make sure that no persons or obstacles are in the vicinity of the vehicle. Start-off assist enables optimum acceleration from a standstill. For this, a suitably high-grip Z Driving and parking ! When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or 159 Driving systems 160 Driving and parking road surface is required and the vehicle and tires must be in good working order. Do not activate start-off assist on public roads. Observe the safety notes on driving safety systems (Y page 61). Be sure to read the safety notes and information on ESP® (Y page 64). Activating start-off assist RACE START enables optimal acceleration from a standing start. For this, a suitably high-grip road surface is required and the vehicle and tires must be in good working order. i Observe the safety notes on driving safety systems (Y page 61). Be sure to read the safety notes and information on ESP® (Y page 64). ESP® (Y Deactivate page 187). Turn the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position. X Firmly depress the brake pedal with your left foot and keep it depressed. X Shift the transmission to position h. X Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to select the S drive program (Y page 129). X Quickly depress the accelerator pedal fully. X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceleration. i Activate ESP® as soon as the acceleration process has ended. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. Canceling start-off assist X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. X Reactivate ESP®. X accident. Make sure that no persons, animals or obstacles are within range of the vehicle. X RACE START (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Important safety notes i RACE START must not be used on normal roads. RACE START must only be activated and used on dedicated road circuits, outside of public road use. i RACE START is only available in Mercedes‑AMG vehicles. G WARNING If you use RACE START, individual tires may start to spin and the vehicle could skid. Depending on the selected ESP® mode, there is an increased risk of skidding and having an Conditions for activation You can activate RACE START if: Rthe doors, hood and the trunk lid are closed. Rthe engine is running and the transmission, all-wheel drive clutch and the engine are at operating temperature. Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position. Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal is depressed (left foot). Rthe transmission is in position h. Rdrive program S, S+ or RACE is selected (Y page 130) Activating RACE START Depress the brake pedal with your left foot and keep it depressed. X Pull and hold both steering wheel paddle shifters. X The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP Cancel: Paddle DOWN message appears in the multifunction display. X Release both steering wheel paddle shifters. i If the activation conditions are no longer fulfilled, RACE START is canceled. The RACE START Not Possible See Operator's Manual message appears in the multifunction display. X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 137). or X To confirm: pull the right steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 137). The RACE START Available Depress gas pedal message appears in the multifunction display. X Driving systems within a few seconds, RACE START is canceled. The multifunction display shows the RACE START Canceled message. X Fully depress the accelerator pedal. The engine speed is increased. The RACE START Release brake to start message appears in the multifunction display. i If you do not release the brake pedal within a short time, RACE START will be canceled. The multifunction display shows the RACE START Canceled message. X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceleration. The RACE START Active message appears in the multifunction display. RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle reaches a speed of approximately 50 km/h. RACE START is deactivated immediately if you release the accelerator pedal during RACE START or if any of the activation conditions are no longer fulfilled. The RACE START Not Pos‐ sible See Operator's Manual or RACE START Canceled message appears in the multifunction display. i If RACE START is used repeatedly within a short period of time, it is only available again after the vehicle has been driven a certain distance. AMG adaptive sport suspension system General notes The electronically controlled damping system works continuously. This improves driving safety and ride comfort. The damping is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on: Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps Ryour individual selection of Sport or Comfort The suspension setting is adjusted using the corresponding button in the center console. i The mode can also be set using the AMG DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Y page 130). Each time you start the engine with the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, Comfort mode is activated. For further information about starting the engine, see (Y page 123). Sport mode The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in Sport mode ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. You have selected Sport mode. The AMG Suspension System SPORT message appears in the multifunction display. Comfort mode In Comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this mode if you favor a more comfortable driving style, but also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. highways. X Press button : again so that indicator lamp ; goes out. You have selected Comfort mode. The AMG Suspension System COMFORT message appears in the multifunction display. 4MATIC ! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised. This may damage the differential. Damage of this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All wheels must remain either on the ground or be fully raised. Observe the instructions for towing the vehiZ Driving and parking i If you do not depress the accelerator pedal 161 162 Driving systems Driving and parking cle with all wheels in full contact with the ground. 4MATIC, together with ESP®, improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip. If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip: ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. RAccelerate less when driving. i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains if necessary. DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL General notes DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL offers improved driving comfort and continuously controls the calibration of the dampers. The damping characteristics adapt to the current operating and driving situation. The damping is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on: Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty Rthe road surface conditions Rthe drive program selected The drive program can be set using the DYNAMIC SELECT button (Y page 129). Selecting Comfort mode In the Comfort drive program, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Therefore, select this drive program if you prefer a more comfortable driving style. Also select the Comfort drive program when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of highway. X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button (Y page 129) as many times as necessary until the Comfort drive program is selected. Selecting Sport mode The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in the Sport drive program ensures even better contact with the road. Select this drive program when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button (Y page 129) as many times as necessary until the Sport drive program is selected. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Important safety notes Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. It monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and six sensors in the rear bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC visually and audibly indicates the distance between your vehicle and an object. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the maneuvering area when you are maneuvering or parking. ! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. The sensors may not detect snow and other objects that absorb ultrasonic waves. Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, the compressed-air brakes of a truck or a pneumatic drill could cause Parking Assist PARKTRONIC to malfunction. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on uneven terrain. Driving systems Range Driving and parking Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you: Rswitch on the ignition Rshift the transmission to position h, k or i Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds. Range of the sensors General notes Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not take into account obstacles located: Rbelow the detection range, such as persons, animals or objects Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of trucks : Detection range of front sensors ; Detection range of rear sensors Front sensors : Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side (example) The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush. They can otherwise not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (Y page 269). 163 Center Approx. 40 in (approx. 100 cm) Corners Approx. 24 in (approx. 60 cm) Rear sensors Center Approx. 48 in (approx. 120 cm) Corners Approx. 32 in (approx. 80 cm) Minimum distance Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm) Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm) If an obstacle is detected within this range, the relevant warning displays light up and a warning tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum, the distance may no longer be shown. Z 164 Driving systems Driving and parking Warning displays One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle. In addition, warning tones are issued. When the distance to the obstacle is sufficient, you will hear an intermittent warning tone. The shorter the distance to the obstacle, the shorter the frequency of the intermittent warning tones becomes. When the minimum distance is reached, you hear a continuous warning tone. Deactivating or activating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC : Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi- cle ; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi- cle = Segments showing operational readiness The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is located on the dashboard above the center air vents. The warning display for the rear area is located on the headliner in the rear compartment. The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red segments. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow segments showing operational readiness = light up. The gear lever position or the transmission position of the automatic transmission and the direction in which the vehicle is rolling determine which warning display is active when the engine is running. Transmission posi- Warning display tion h Front area activated k, i or the vehicle Rear and front areas is rolling backwards activated j No areas activated : Indicator lamp ; Deactivates or activates Parking Assist PARKTRONIC If indicator lamp : is lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated. i Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automati- cally activated when you turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. Driving systems 165 Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Only the red segments in Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has been deactithe Parking Assist vated. PARKTRONIC warning X If problems persist, have Parking Assist PARKTRONIC checked at a displays are lit. You also qualified specialist workshop. hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is then deactivated and the indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button lights up. Only the red segments in The Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interthe Parking Assist ference. PARKTRONIC warning X Clean the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 269). displays are lit. Parking X Switch the ignition back on. Assist PARKTRONIC is then deactivated. The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultrasound waves. X Check to see if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC works at a different location. Active Parking Assist General notes Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates a suitable parking space. Active steering intervention and brake application can assist you during parking and when exiting a parking space. You can also still use Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (Y page 162). Important safety notes Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the maneuvering area when you are maneuvering or parking. When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, Active Parking Assist is also unavailable. G WARNING While parking or pulling out of a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with other road users or objects. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to other road users or objects. Stop the vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Parking Assist parking procedure. ! If they cannot be avoided, drive over obsta- cles such as curbs slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tires. Active Parking Assist may possibly indicate parking spaces which are not suitable for parking, for example: Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits Ron unsuitable surfaces Z Driving and parking Problem Driving and parking 166 Driving systems Parking tips: ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the parking space as possible RParking spaces that are littered or overgrown might be identified or measured incorrectly RParking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately RPay attention to the warning messages of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC during the parking procedure (Y page 164). RYou can intervene in the steering procedure to correct it at any time. Active Parking Assist will then be canceled RWhen transporting a load which protrudes from your vehicle, you should not use Active Parking Assist RNever use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are installed RMake sure that the tire pressures are always correct. This has a direct influence on the parking characteristics of the vehicle. Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces: Rthat are parallel or at right-angles to the direction of travel Ron straight roads, not bends Ron the same level as the road, e.g. not on the pavement Active Parking Assist does not support you parking in spaces that are parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel if: Rthe parking space is on a curb Rthe system reads the parking space as being blocked, for example by foliage or grass paving blocks Rthe area is too small for the vehicle to maneuver into Rthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer Further information about the detection range (Y page 163). G WARNING If there are objects above the detection range: Rthe Parking Package with rear view camera may steer too early Rthe vehicle may not stop in front of these objects This could cause a collision. There is a risk of an accident. If objects are located above the detection range, stop and deactivate the Parking Package with rear view camera. Detecting parking spaces Objects located above the detection range of Active Parking Assist will not be detected when the parking space is measured. These are not taken into account when the parking procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, truck overhangs or loading ramps. Active Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space too early. Active Parking Assist does not support you parking in spaces at right angles to the direction of travel if: Rtwo parking spaces are located directly next to one another Rthe parking space is directly next to a low obstacle such as a low curb Ryou park forwards : Detected parking space on the left ; Parking symbol = Detected parking space on the right Active Parking Assist is switched on automatically when driving forwards. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the system independently locates and measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. Active Parking Assist will only detect parking spaces: Rthat are parallel or at right-angles to the direction of travel Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide Driving systems are parallel to the direction of travel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your vehicle Rat right angles to the direction of travel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider than your vehicle When driving at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h), you will see parking symbol ; as a status indicator in the instrument cluster. When a parking space has been detected, an arrow towards the right or the left also appears. By default, Active Parking Assist only displays parking spaces on the front-passenger side. Parking spaces on the driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is activated. When parking on the driver's side, this must remain activated until you confirm the use of Active Parking Assist by pressing the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The system automatically determines whether the parking space is parallel or at rightangles to the direction of travel. A parking space is displayed while you are driving past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it. Parking G WARNING If you leave the driver's seat when the vehicle is only being braked by the Parking Package with rear view camera, it could roll away: Rif there is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply Rif the electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with Rif the battery is disconnected Rif the vehicle is accelerated, e.g. by a vehicle occupant There is a risk of an accident. Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it against rolling away. i If Active Parking Assist detects obstacles, Active Parking Assist brakes automatically while the vehicle is parking. You are responsible for braking in good time. Stop the vehicle when the parking space symbol shows the desired parking space in the instrument cluster. X Shift the transmission to position k. The Start Parking Assist? Yes: OK No: % message appears on the multifunction display. X To cancel the procedure: press the % button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away. or X To park using Active Parking Assist: press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The Parking Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears on the multifunction display. X X X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel. Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at all times. When backing up, drive at a speed below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Otherwise, Active Parking Assist will be canceled. Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a standstill when the vehicle approaches the rear border of the parking space. Maneuvering may be required in tight parking spaces. The Parking Assist Active Select DObserve Surroundings message appears on the multifunction display. X Shift the transmission to position h while the vehicle is stationary. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction. The Parking Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears on the multifunction display. i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away. X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all times. Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a standstill when the vehicle approaches the front border of the parking space. Maneuvering may be required in tight parking spaces. The Parking Assist Active Select R Observe Surroundings message appears on the multifunction display. Z Driving and parking Rthat 167 Driving and parking 168 Driving systems As soon as the parking procedure is complete, the Active Parking Assist Finished message appears and a warning tone sounds. The vehicle is now parked. The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is canceled when you depress the accelerator pedal. Active Parking Assist no longer supports you with steering interventions and brake applications. When Active Parking Assist is finished, you must steer and brake again yourself. Active Parking Assist is still available. Parking tips: RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the parking space after parking is dependent on various factors. These include the position and shape of the vehicles parked in front and behind it and the conditions of the location. It may be the case that Active Parking Assist guides you too far into a parking space, or not far enough into it. In some cases, it may also lead you across or onto the curb. If necessary, cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist. RYou can also preselect transmission position h. The vehicle redirects and does not drive as far into the parking space. Should the transmission change take place too early, the parking procedure is canceled. A sensible parking position can no longer be achieved from this position. Exiting a parking space In order that Active Parking Assist can support you when exiting the parking space: Ryou need to have parked using Active Parking Assist. Rthe border of the parking space must be high enough at the front and the rear. A curb stone is too small, for example. Rthe border of the parking space must not be too wide, as the position of the vehicle must not exceed an angle of 45° to the starting position as it is maneuvered into the parking space. Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft (1.0 m) must be available. Active Parking Assist can only assist you with exiting a parking space if you have parked the vehicle parallel to the direction of travel using Active Parking Assist. i If Active Parking Assist detects obstacles, Active Parking Assist brakes automatically while the vehicle is exiting the parking space. You are responsible for braking in good time. X Start the engine. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch on the turn signal in the direction you will drive out of the parking space. X Shift the transmission to position h or k. The Start Parking Assist? Yes: OK No: % message appears on the multifunction display. X To cancel the procedure: press the % button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away. or X To exit a parking space using Active Parking Assist: press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The Parking Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears on the multifunction display. X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel. X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Do not exceed a maximum speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a parking space. Otherwise, Active Parking Assist will be canceled. X Depending on the message or as required, shift the transmission to position h or k. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction. The Parking Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears on the multifunction display. i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away. If you back up after activation, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position. X Drive forwards and reverse as prompted by the Active Parking Assist warning displays, several times if necessary. Once you have exited the parking space completely, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and the Active Parking Assist Finished message appears on the multifunction display. You will then have to steer and merge into traffic on your own. Active Parking Assist is still available. You Driving systems can take over the steering before the vehicle has exited the parking space completely. This is useful, for example when you recognize that it is already possible to pull out of the parking space. 169 Rear view camera General notes X or Stop the movement of the multifunction steering wheel or steer yourself. Active Parking Assist will be canceled at once. The Active Parking Assist Canceled message appears in the multifunction display. Press the PARKTRONIC button (Y page 164). Active Parking Assist is switched off and Active Parking Assist is immediately canceled. The Active Parking Assist Can‐ celed message appears in the multifunction display. Active Parking Assist is canceled automatically if: Rthe electric parking brake is engaged Rtransmission position j is selected Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no longer possible Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h) Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. In such cases the ÷ warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol disappears and the multifunction display shows the Active Parking Assist Canceled message. When Active Parking Assist is canceled, you must steer and brake again yourself. If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the accelerator again. X Rear view camera : is an optical parking and maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind your vehicle with guide lines in the multimedia system display. The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the rear view mirror. Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 269). i The text shown in the multimedia system display depends on the language setting. The following are examples of rear view camera messages in the multimedia system display. Important safety notes The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and parking. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the maneuvering area when you are maneuvering or parking. Under the following circumstances, the rear view camera will not function, or will function in a limited manner: Rif the trunk lid is open Rin heavy rain, snow or fog Rat night or in very dark places Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED lighting (the display may flicker) Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter Z Driving and parking Canceling Active Parking Assist Driving systems 170 Driving and parking Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed. Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 269) Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this case, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The field of vision and other functions of the rear view camera may be restricted due to additional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. license plate holder, rear bicycle rack). i The contrast of the display may be affected by the sudden presence of sunlight or other light sources, e.g. when exiting a garage. Pay particular attention in this situation. i If usability is severely restricted, e.g. due to pixel errors, have the display repaired or replaced. Activating/deactivating the rear view camera To activate: make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that the Activation by R gear function is selected in the multimedia system; see the Digital Operator's Manual. X Engage reverse gear. The area behind the vehicle is shown with guide lines in the multimedia system display. The image from the rear view camera is available throughout the maneuvering process. To deactivate: the rear view camera deactivates if you shift the transmission to j or after driving forwards a short distance. The inner segments of the warning indicator are displayed in red if there is a complete system failure. The indicator lamp in the PARKTRONIC button lights up. If the system fails at the rear of the vehicle: Rthe rear segments are shown in red when backing up. Rthe rear segments are hidden when driving forwards. X Messages in the multimedia system display The rear view camera may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. The rear view camera does not show objects in the following positions: Rvery close to the rear bumper Runder the rear bumper Rin close range above the handle on the trunk lid ! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.: Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle Rthe drawbar of a trailer Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rthe rear section of an HGV Ra slanted post Use the guidelines only for orientation. Approach objects no further than the bottommost guideline. : Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle ; White guide line without steering input – vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static) = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) ? Yellow lane marking the course the tires will take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Driving systems 171 "Reverse parking" function A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance) C Bumper D Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle : Front warning display ; Additional measurement operational readi- ness indicator for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC = Rear warning display When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 164), additional measurement operational readiness indicator ; appears in the multimedia system display. If the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or light up, warning displays : and = are also active or light up correspondingly in the multimedia system display. : White guide line without steering input – vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static) ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) = Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear area ? Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear area X Make sure that the rear view camera is switched on (Y page 170). The lane and the guide lines are shown. X With the help of white guide line :, check whether the vehicle will fit into the parking space. X Using white guide line : as a guide, carefully back up until you reach the end position. Red guide line ? is then at the end of the parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space. Z Driving and parking Backing up straight into a parking space without steering input 172 Driving systems Driving and parking Reverse perpendicular parking with steering input : White guide line at the current steering input ; Parking space marking : Parking space marking ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) X Drive past the parking space and bring the vehicle to a standstill. X Make sure that the rear view camera is switched on (Y page 170). The lane and the guide lines are shown. X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the parking space until yellow guide line ; reaches parking space marking :. X Maintain the steering input and reverse carefully. X Turn the steering wheel to the center position while the vehicle is stationary. : Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear area ; White guide line without steering input = End of parking space X : Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in front of the parking space. The white lane should be as close to parallel with the parking space marking as possible. Back up carefully until you have reached the final position. Red guide line : is then at end of parking space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space. Driving systems : Symbol for the wide-angle view function ; Your vehicle = Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning dis- Rif you are predominantly driving slower than 37 mph (60 km/h) or faster than 125 mph (200 km/h) Rif the time has been set incorrectly Rin active driving situations, such as when you change lanes or change your speed ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you continue your journey and starts assessing your tiredness again if: Ryou switch off the engine Ryou take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to take a break Displaying the attention level plays Select this view when you are driving out of an exit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST General notes ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 125 mph (200 km/h) range. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. Important safety notes ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. It might not always recognize fatigue or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to recognize them at all. The system is not a substitute for a wellrested and attentive driver. The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all: Rif the length of the journey is less than approximately 30 minutes Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface is uneven or if there are potholes Rif there is a strong side wind Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration You can have current status information displayed in the assistance menu (Y page 186) of the on-board computer. X Select the Assistance display for Attention Assist using the on-board computer (Y page 187). The following information is displayed: RThe length of the journey since the last break. RThe Attention Level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST, displayed in a bar display in five levels from high to low. RIf ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot output a warning, the System Suspended message appears. The bar display then changes the display, such as when you are driving at a speed below 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 125 mph (200 km/h). Z Driving and parking Wide-angle function 173 Driving systems 174 Activating ATTENTION ASSIST Driving and parking X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the onboard computer (Y page 187). The system determines the attention level of the driver depending on the setting selected: Standard selected: the sensitivity with which the system determines the attention level is set to normal. Sensitive selected: the sensitivity is set higher. The attention level detected by Attention Assist is adapted accordingly and the driver is warned earlier. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the é symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphic display. When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated, it is automatically reactivated after the engine has been stopped. The sensitivity selected corresponds to the last selection activated (standard/sensitive). Warning in the multifunction display If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration are detected, a warning appears in the multifunction display: ATTENTION ASSIST Take a Break!. Break! In addition to the message shown in the multifunction display, you will then hear a warning tone. X If necessary, take a break. X Confirm the message by pressing the a button on the steering wheel. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST still detects increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after 15 minutes at the earliest. This will only happen if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration. Vehicles with the COMAND multimedia system: if a warning is output in the multifunction display, a service station search is performed in the multimedia system. You can select a service station and navigation to this service station will then begin. This function can be activated or deactivated in the multimedia system; see the Digital Operator's Manual. Lane Tracking package General notes The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind Spot Assist (Y page 174) and Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 176). Blind Spot Assist General notes Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either side of the vehicle that are not visible to the driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors. A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lane, you will also receive an optical and audible warning. Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Important safety notes G WARNING Blind Spot Assist does not react to: Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area Rvehicles which approach with a large speed differential and overtake your vehicle As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give warnings in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always observe the traffic conditions carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance. Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to detect some vehicles and is no substitute for attentive driving. Always ensure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other road users and obstacles. i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removing, tampering with, or altering the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Driving systems Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 175 Warning display Monitoring range of the sensors In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike or bicycle Rthe road has very wide lanes Rthe road has narrow lanes Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane Rthere are barriers or other road boundaries Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft (3 m) behind your vehicle and directly next to it. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if the vehicles are driving on the inner side of their lane. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders. Rwarnings may be interrupted when you are driving alongside particularly long vehicles, such as trucks, for a prolonged time. : Warning display Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational. If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h). The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot Assist is no longer active. The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light. Collision warning If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corresponding turn signal, a double warning tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, vehicles detected are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones. Z Driving and parking Radar sensors The radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are integrated into the rear bumper. Make sure that the bumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush. The sensors must not be covered, for example by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may no longer work properly. Driving systems 176 Switching on Blind Spot Assist Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 188). X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow. Driving and parking X Lane Keeping Assist General notes Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of multifunction camera : which is attached behind the top of the windshield. Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally. This function is available in the range between 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h). A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. Important safety notes G WARNING Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly detect lane markings. In such cases, Lane Keeping Assist can: Rgive an unnecessary warning give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep within the lane, especially if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Rnot G WARNING The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not return the vehicle to the original lane. There is a risk of an accident. You should always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keeping Assist. If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is merely an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehicle in the lane. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if the road surface is wet) Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rthere are no or several unclear lane markings for one lane, e.g. roadworks Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are highly variable shade conditions on the roadway Switching on Lane Keeping Assist X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using the on-board computer; to do so, select Standard or Adaptive (Y page 176). If you drive at speeds above 40 mph (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected, the lines in the assistance graphic are shown Driving systems 177 in green (Y page 187). Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use. Driving and parking If Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou have switched on the turn signal. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS, BAS or ESP®. When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou have switched on the turn signal. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS, BAS or ESP®. Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. Ryou brake hard. Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lanes quickly. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system detects certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a freeway Rthe system detects solid lane markings The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe road has narrow lanes. Ryou cut the corner on a bend Z 178 Displays and operation On-board computer and displays Important safety notes G WARNING If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you may be distracted from the traffic situation. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. G WARNING If the instrument cluster has failed or malfunctioned, you may not recognize function restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The on-board computer only shows messages or warnings from certain systems in the multifunction display. You should therefore make sure your vehicle is operating safely at all times. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do so. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. For an overview, see the instrument panel illustration (Y page 33). Displays and operation Instrument cluster lighting The light sensor in the instrument cluster automatically controls the brightness of the multifunction display. In daylight, the displays in the instrument cluster are not illuminated. The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the displays and the controls in the vehicle interior can be adjusted using the brightness control knob. The brightness control knob is located on the bottom left of the instrument cluster (Y page 33). X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise or counter-clockwise. If the light switch is set to the Ã, T or L position, the brightness is dependent upon the brightness of the ambient light. Speedometer with segments The speedometer is only divided into segments in vehicles with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. The segments in the speedometer indicate which speed range is available. RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC activated (Y page 152): One or two segments in the set speed range light up. RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC detects a vehicle in front moving more slowly than the stored speed: The segments between the speed of the vehicle in front and the stored speed light up. Tachometer ! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this could damage the engine. The red band in the tachometer indicates the engine's overrevving range. The engine is limited within a range to protect the engine when the red band is reached. Outside temperature display You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point. Bear in mind that the outside temperature display indicates the temperature measured and does not record the road temperature. The outside temperature display is in the multifunction display (Y page 181). Displays and operation Coolant temperature gauge G WARNING Opening the hood when the engine is overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury. Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department. ! A display message is shown if the coolant temperature is too high. If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡ (120 †), do not continue driving. The engine will otherwise be damaged. The coolant temperature gage is in the instrument cluster on the right-hand side (Y page 33). The H marking in the coolant temperature gauge corresponds to a coolant temperature of approximately 248 ‡ (120 †). Under normal operating conditions and at the correct coolant level, the coolant temperature gauge may rise to the H marking. Operating the on-board computer Overview : Multifunction display ; Right control panel = Left control panel X To activate the on-board computer: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock. You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. Z On-board computer and displays There is a short delay before a change in outside temperature appears in the multifunction display. 179 180 Displays and operation On-board computer and displays Left control panel = ; RCalls 9 : Press briefly: up the menu and menu bar RScrolls in lists a submenu or function RIn the Audio menu: selects the previous or next station, when the preset list or station list is active, or an audio track or video scene RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or telephone number RSelects Press and hold: 9 : RIn a RConfirms % Press briefly: the Audio menu: selects a preset list or a station list in the desired frequency range, or an audio track or video scene using rapid scrolling RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is open the selection or display message the Tel (Telephone) menu: switches to the telephone book and starts dialing the selected number RIn RBack RVehicles with Audio 20: switches off voice-operated control for navigation (see the manufacturer's operating instructions) RVehicles with COMAND: switches off the Voice Control System (see the separate operating instructions) RHides display messages or calls up the last Trip menu function used RExits the phone book/redial memory % Press and hold: RCalls up the standard display in the Trip menu Right control panel ó RVehicles 8 RMute WX RAdjusts with Audio 20: Switches on voice-operated control for navigation (see the manufacturer's operating instructions) RVehicles with COMAND: Switches off the Voice Control System (see the separate operating instructions) the volume Menus and submenus ~ RRejects 6 RMakes or ends a call the phone book/redial memory or accepts a call to the redial memory RSwitches Multifunction display RCRUISE Cruise control (Y page 150) Highbeam Assist R_ Adaptive (Y page 103) Rè Rë ECO start/stop function (Y page 127) HOLD function (Y page 158) Menus and submenus Menu overview Using the = or ; button on the steering wheel, open the menu bar. Operating the on-board computer (Y page 179). Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you can call up the following menus: RTrip : Permanent display: outside temperature or ; = ? A B speed (Y page 189) Time Text field Menu bar Drive program (Y page 131) Transmission position (Y page 133) In Mercedes-AMG vehicles, the indicators in the lower and upper part of the multifunction display differ from the displays shown here. X To display menu bar ?: press the = or ; button on the steering wheel. If you do not press the buttons any longer, menu bar ? is faded out after a few seconds. Text field = shows the selected menu or submenu as well as display messages. menu (Y page 182) instructions) RNavi menu (navigation (Y page 183) RAudio menu (Y page 184) menu (telephone) (Y page 185) RDriveAssist menu (assistance) (Y page 186) RServ. menu (Y page 188) RSett. menu (settings) (Y page 188) RAMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) (Y page 190) The displays for the Audio, Audio Navi and Tel menus may differ slightly from those in your vehicle. The examples given in this Operator's Manual apply to vehicles equipped with COMAND. RTel i Set the time using the multimedia system; see the Digital Operator's Manual. The following messages may appear in the multifunction display: RZ Gearshift recommendation, when shifting manually (Y page 137) RjActive Parking Assist (Y page 165) Z On-board computer and displays RExits 181 Menus and submenus 182 Trip menu On-board computer and displays Standard display X Press and hold the % button on the steering wheel until the Trip menu with trip odometer : and odometer ; appears. Trip computer "From Start" or "From Reset" : ; = ? Distance Driving time Average speed Average fuel consumption Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select From Start or From Reset. Reset X The values in the From Start submenu are calculated from the start of a journey whilst the values in the From Reset submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu was reset (Y page 183). In the following cases, the trip computer is automatically reset From Start Start: Rthe ignition has been switched off for more than four hours. R999 hours have been exceeded. R9,999 miles have been exceeded. When 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles have been exceeded, the trip computer is automatically reset From Reset. Reset ECO display The ECO display is not available in MercedesAMG vehicles. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select ECO DISPLAY. DISPLAY If the ignition remains switched off for longer than four hours, the ECO display will be automatically reset. For more information on the ECO display, see (Y page 146). Displaying the range and current fuel consumption Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the menu only shows range :. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press 9 or : to select the display with approximate range : and current fuel consumption ;. Approximate range : that can be covered is calculated according to your current driving style and the amount of fuel in the tank. If there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, a vehicle being refueled C appears instead of approximate range :. Recuperation display = shows you if energy has been recuperated from the kinetic energy in overrun mode and saved in the battery. Recuperation display = depends on the engine installed and is therefore not available in all vehicles. Menus and submenus Digital speedometer 183 Navigation system menu Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the digital speedometer ;. A gear shift recommendation : Z can also follow. Observe the information on gearshift recommendation : when shifting manually (Y page 137). Mercedes-AMG vehicles: a gearshift recommendation is shown in the status bar of the multifunction display and not in the digital speedometer display. X Resetting values Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the function that you wish to reset. X Press a to confirm. X Press : to select Yes and press a to confirm. You can reset the values of the following functions: RTrip odometer R"From Start" trip computer R"From Reset" trip computer RECO display If you reset the values in the ECO display, the values in the "From Start" trip computer are also reset. If you reset the values in the "From Start" trip computer, the values in the ECO display are also reset. X In the Navi menu, the multifunction display shows navigation instructions. You can find further information on navigation in the Digital Operator's Manual for the multimedia system. X Switch on the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual) X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Navi menu. Route guidance not active : Direction of travel ; Current road Route guidance active No change of direction announced : ; = ? Distance to destination Distance to the next change of direction Current road "Follow the road's course" symbol Z On-board computer and displays Displaying navigation instructions On-board computer and displays 184 Menus and submenus Change of direction without lane recommendation Other status indicators of the navigation system : Road into which the change of direction The navigation system displays additional information and the vehicle status. Possible displays: leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display = Change-of-direction symbol When a change of direction is to be made, you will see symbol = for the change of direction and distance graphic ;. The distance indicator shortens towards the top of the display as you approach the point of the announced change of direction. The change of direction starts once the distance display reaches zero. Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation RNew Route... or Calculating Route A new route is calculated. RRoad Not Mapped The vehicle position is inside the area of the digital map but the road is not recognized, e.g. newly built streets, car parks or private land. RNo Route No route could be calculated to the selected destination. RO You have reached the destination or an intermediate destination. Audio menu Selecting a radio station : Road into which the change of direction leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display = Lanes not recommended ? Recommended lane and new lane during a change of direction A Change-of-direction symbol On multilane roads, new lane recommendations can be displayed for the next change of direction if the digital map supports this data. During the change of direction, new lanes may be added. Lane not recommended =: you will not be able to complete the next change of direction if you stay in this lane. Recommended lane and new lane during a change of direction ?: in this lane you will be able to complete the next two changes of direction without changing lane. : Active station list ; Station frequency with memory position The multifunction display shows station ; with station frequency or station name. The preset position is only displayed along with station ; if this has been stored. X Switch on the multimedia system and select radio (see the Digital Operator's Manual). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select a preset list or station list: press and briefly hold the 9 or : button until Menus and submenus Video DVD operation i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a normal radio. You can find further information on operation in the "Satellite radio" section of the Digital Operator's Manual for the multimedia system. Operating an audio player or audio media You can only operate DVD videos in the Audio menu in vehicles with COMAND. X Switch on COMAND and select DVD Video (see the Digital Operator's Manual). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select the next or previous scene: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a scene from the scene list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until desired scene : appears. : Current title Audio data from various audio devices or media can be played, depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle. X Switch on the multimedia system and switch on CD or MP3 mode (see the Digital Operator's Manual). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select the next/previous track: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a track from the track list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until desired track appears. If you press and hold 9 or :, the rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio drives or data carriers support this function. If track information is stored on the audio device or medium, the multifunction display will show the number and title of the track. Telephone menu Introduction G WARNING If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you may be distracted from the traffic situation. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary. When telephoning, you must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving. X Switch on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer’s operating instructions). X Switch on the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual) Z On-board computer and displays the preset list or station list in the desired frequency range is shown. X To select a station: briefly press 9 or :. 185 Menus and submenus 186 Establish a Bluetooth® connection to the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. You will see one of the following display messages in the multifunction display: On-board computer and displays X RPhone READY or the name of the network provider: the mobile phone has found a network and is ready to receive. RPhone No Service: Service there is no network available or the mobile phone is searching for a network. Accepting a call If someone calls you when you are in the Tel menu, a display message appears in the multifunction display. You can accept a call at any time, even if you are not in the Tel menu. X Press the 6 button on the steering wheel to accept an incoming call. Rejecting or ending a call You can end or reject a call anytime, even if you are not in the Tel menu. X Press the ~ button on the steering wheel to reject or end a call. Selecting an entry in the phone book Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the 9, : or a button to switch to the phone book. X Authorize access to the phone book on the phone. X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name. or X To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold the 9 or : button for longer than one second. Rapid scrolling stops when you release the button or reach the end of the list. X If only one telephone number is stored for a name: press the 6 or a button to start dialing. or X If there is more than one number for a particular name: press the 6 or a button to display the numbers. X Press the 9 or : button to select the number you want to dial. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing. or X If you do not want to make a call: press the ~ or % button. X Redialing The on-board computer saves the last names or numbers dialed in the redial memory. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial memory. X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name or number. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing. or X If you do not want to make the call: press the ~ or % button. Assistance menu Introduction Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you have the following options in the DriveAssist menu: RDisplaying the assistance graphic (Y page 187) RDeactivating/activating ESP® (except Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) (Y page 187) RActivating/deactivating Active Brake Assist (Y page 187) RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 187) RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist (Y page 188) RActivating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 188) Menus and submenus Displaying the assistance graphic Start the engine. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press 9 or : to select ESP. ESP X Press a to confirm. The current selection appears. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up continuously when the engine is running. If the ÷ and å warning lamps light up continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 223). Observe the information on display messages (Y page 194). 187 X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press 9 or : to select Assist. Graphic. Graphic X Press a to confirm. The multifunction display shows the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC distance display on the assistant display. The assistance graphic displays the status of and information from the following driving systems or driving safety systems: RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC (Y page 152) RActive Brake Assist (Y page 62) RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 173) RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 176) X Press : to display the ATTENTION ASSIST assessment. X Deactivating/activating ESP® Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 64). G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri- bed in the following. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel Deactivating/activating ESP® in MercedesAMG vehicles (Y page 66). For further information about ESP®, see (Y page 64). Activating/deactivating Active Brake Assist Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Brake Assist. Assist X Press a to confirm. The current selection appears. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. When Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphic display. X Further information on Active Brake Assist (Y page 62). Activating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Attention Assist. Assist X Press a to confirm. The current selection appears. X Press a to confirm. X Z On-board computer and displays X Menus and submenus 188 Press the : or 9 button to set Off Off, Standard or Sensitive. Sensitive X Press the a button to save the setting. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the é symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphics display. For further information about ATTENTION ASSIST, see (Y page 173). On-board computer and displays X Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Assist. Blind Spot Assist X Press a to confirm. The current selection appears. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. For further information about Blind Spot Assist, see (Y page 174). X Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Lane Keeping Assist Assist. X Press a to confirm. The current selection appears. X Press a again to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to set Off, Off Standard or Adaptive. Adaptive X Press the a button to save the setting. When Lane Keeping Assist is activated, the multifunction display shows the lane markings as bright lines in the assistance graphic. For further information about Lane Keeping Assist, see (Y page 176). X RCalling up display messages in message memory (Y page 193) RRestarting the tire pressure loss warning system (Canada only) (Y page 297) RChecking the tire pressure electronically (USA only) (Y page 297) RCalling up the service due date (Y page 264) Settings menu Introduction Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you have the following options in the Sett. menu: RChanging the instrument cluster settings RChanging the light settings RChanging the vehicle settings RChanging the convenience settings RRestoring the factory settings Instrument cluster Selecting the distance unit The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: function allows you to choose whether certain displays appear in kilometers or miles in the multifunction display. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Instrument Cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer function. You will see the selected setting: km or miles miles. X Press the a button to save the setting. The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to: RDigital Service menu Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you have the following options in the Serv. menu: speedometer in the Trip menu and the trip odometer RTrip computer RCurrent fuel consumption and approximate range RNavigation instructions in the Navi menu RCruise control ROdometer Menus and submenus Distance Assist DISTRONIC PLUS service interval display Switching the additional speedometer on/off If the additional speedometer is switched on, the speed is shown in the status bar in the multifunction display instead of the outside temperature. Press the : or 9 button to select the Permanent Display: function. The current setting, Outside Temperature or Speedometer [km/h] [km/h]/Speedometer Speedometer [mph], appears. [mph] X Press the a button to save the setting. X Lights Switching the daytime running lamps on/ off The speed display : is an alternative to your speedometer. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Instrument Cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Speedometer [km/h] or Speedometer [mph] function. You will see the selected setting: On or Off Off. X Press the a button to save the setting. Selecting permanent display The Permanent Display: function allows you to choose whether the multifunction display always shows the outside temperature or the speed. The speed display : is an alternative to your speedometer. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Instrument Cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. This function is not available in Canada. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Daytime Running Lights function. If the Daytime Running Lights function has been switched on, the multifunction display shows the cone of light and the W symbol in orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. Further information on daytime running lamps (Y page 101). Vehicle Activating/deactivating the automatic door locking mechanism Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Automatic Door Lock function. If the Automatic Door Lock function is switched on, the multifunction display shows the doors in orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. X If you activate the Automatic Door Lock function, the vehicle is centrally locked above a speed of around 9 mph (15 km/h). For further information on the automatic locking feature, see (Y page 77). Z On-board computer and displays RActive RASSYST 189 190 Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehicle. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Acoustic Lock function. If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, the multifunction display shows the & symbol in orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. Comfort Switching the fold-in mirrors when locking feature on/off This function is only available in Canada. This function is only available when the vehicle is equipped with the electrical fold-in function. When you activate the Auto. Mirror Folding function, the exterior mirrors are folded in when the vehicle is locked. If you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door, the exterior mirrors fold out again. If you have switched on the Auto. Mirror Folding function and you fold in the exterior mirrors using the button on the door (Y page 98), they will not fold out automatically. The exterior mirrors can then only be folded out using the button on the door. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Auto. Mirror Folding function. If the Auto. Mirror Folding function is switched on, the multifunction display shows the exterior mirror in orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. Restoring the factory settings Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Factory Setting submenu. X Press a to confirm. The Reset All Settings? function appears. X Press the : or 9 button to select No or Yes. Yes X Press the a button to confirm the selection. If you have selected Yes, Yes the multifunction display shows a confirmation message. X For safety reasons, the Daytime Running Lights function in the Light submenu is only reset if the vehicle is stationary. AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Warm-up : ; = ? A B X Digital speedometer Gear indicator Upshift indicator Engine oil temperature Coolant temperature Transmission fluid temperature Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. Upshift indicator: upshift indicator UP = indicates that the engine has reached the overrevving range when in the manual drive program. Engine and transmission oil temperature: when the engine and transmission are at normal operating temperature, oil temperature ? and B are displayed in white in the multifunction display. If the multifunction display shows oil temperature ? or B in blue, the engine or the transmission are not yet at normal operating temperature. Avoid driving at full engine output during this time. SETUP You can start the RACE TIMER when the engine is running or if the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the RACE TIMER appears. X To start: press the a button to start the RACE TIMER. Displaying the intermediate time Drive system Comfort Comfort/Sport Sport/Sport Sport + Chassis Comfort Comfort/Sport Sport/Sport Sport + Transmission D/MM ESP® On On/Off Off or SPORT handling mode Sport SETUP displays the following information and functions: Rthe digital speedometer Rthe gear indicator Rthe drive system setting Rthe suspension mode Rthe transmission position Rthe ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) status X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press 9 repeatedly until SETUP appears. : ; = ? Press the = or ; button to select Time Interm. Time. X Press a to confirm. The intermediate time appears for five seconds. X Starting a new lap RACE TIMER Displaying and starting RACE TIMER : RACE TIMER ; Fastest lap time (best lap) = Lap X Press a to confirm New Lap. Lap i It is possible to store a maximum of sixteen laps. The 16th lap can only be completed with Finish Lap. Lap : Lap ; RACE TIMER Stopping the RACE TIMER The RACE TIMER is only intended for use on a closed race circuit. Do not use the function on public roads. Z 191 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus 192 X On-board computer and displays X Press the % button on the steering wheel. Confirm Yes with a. The RACE TIMER interrupts timing if you stop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock. If you turn the SmartKey to position 3 and then press a Start to confirm, timing is continued. Resetting the current lap Stop the RACE TIMER. Press the = or ; button to select Lap. Reset Lap X Press a to reset the lap time to "0". X X = Average speed ? Distance covered A Maximum speed This function is shown if you have stored at least one lap and stopped the RACETIMER. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the overall evaluation appears. Lap statistics Deleting all laps If you switch off the engine, the RACE TIMER is reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are deleted. You cannot delete individual stored laps. If you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap does not have to be reset. X Reset the current lap. X Press a to confirm Reset Reset. Reset Race-Timer? appears in the multifunction display. X Press the : button to select Yes and press the a button to confirm. All laps are deleted. Overall statistics : RACETIMER overall evaluation ; Total time driven : ; = ? A Lap Lap time Average lap speed Lap length Top speed during lap This function is only available if you have stored at least two laps and have stopped the RACETIMER. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press 9 repeatedly until a lap evaluation appears. Each lap appears in a separate submenu. The fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :. X Press the 9 or : button to select a different lap evaluation. Display messages 193 Display messages General notes Display messages appear in the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual and may therefore differ from the multifunction display. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Operator's Manual. Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone. When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted. When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on: RHOLD function (Y page 158) RParking (Y page 142) Hiding display messages Press the a or % button on the steering wheel. The multifunction display hides the display message. The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied. X Message memory The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up the display messages: Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages Messages, for example. X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages Messages. X Press a to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages. X Z On-board computer and displays Introduction 194 Display messages On-board computer and displays Safety systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions !÷ ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), BAS (Brake Assist), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable. Active Brake Assist may have also failed. In addition, the !, ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Possible causes are: RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient Currently Unavaila‐ ble See Operator's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making gentle steering movements at speeds of above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the multifunction display still shows the display message: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. !÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual ABS, BAS, ESP®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction. Active Brake Assist may have also failed. The !, ÷, å and $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) warning lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable. Active Brake Assist may have also failed. In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example. Currently Unavaila‐ ble See Operator's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the multifunction display still shows the display message: Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. X ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. Active Brake Assist may have also failed. In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z 195 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 196 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions T! ÷ EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, BAS, ESP®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction. Active Brake Assist may have also failed. A warning tone sounds. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps may light up in the instrument cluster. Inoperative See Operator's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. F (USA only) ! (Canada only) Turn On the Igni‐ tion to Release the Parking Brake The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights up. You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignition was switched off. X SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock. X KEYLESS-GO: switch on the ignition. F (USA only) ! (Canada The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 145). You are driving with the electric parking brake applied. only) Please Release Park‐ X Release the electric parking brake manually. ing Brake The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking (Y page 145). F (USA only) ! (Canada only) Parking Brake See Operator's Manual The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: Switch the ignition off. Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds. X Shift the transmission to position j. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X X Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp light up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X X or X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Release the electric parking brake manually. Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 143). If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Release the electric parking brake manually. To apply: X X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Apply the electric parking brake manually. If the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp continues to flash: X Do not drive on. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 312). X Shift the transmission to position j. X Turn the front wheels towards the curb. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z On-board computer and displays Display messages 197 198 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions On-board computer and displays The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Apply the electric parking brake. If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake: Shift the transmission to position j. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually: Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 143). X If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or release the electric parking brake, the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Shift the transmission to position j as the electric parking brake is not applied automatically. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. F (USA only) ! (Canada only) Parking Brake Inop‐ erative The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of overvoltage or undervoltage. X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by charging the battery or restarting the engine. X Apply or release the electric parking brake. If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake: Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Apply or release the electric parking brake. X If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Shift the transmission to position j. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. $ (USA only) J (Canada only) Check Brake Fluid Level There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. A warning tone sounds. The $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) warning lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up. G WARNING The braking effect may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 142). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction. # The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Malfunction of one or more main functions of the Mercedes me connect system. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes me connect Services Limited See Operator's Man‐ ual Service limited. Malfunction of one or more main functions of the Mercedes me connect system. X Observe the notes on diagnostics connection (Y page 28). X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Brake Pad Wear Inoperative Z On-board computer and displays Display messages 199 On-board computer and displays 200 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Brake Assist Functions Currently Limited See Opera‐ tor's Manual Active Brake Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range Rthe on-board voltage is too low When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Active Brake Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 142). X Restart the engine. Active Brake Assist is unavailable due to a malfunction. SituationActive Brake Assist: System Inop‐ dependent braking assistance may also have failed. erative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Radar Sensors Dirty See Operator's Man‐ ual The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes are: Rdirt on sensors Rheavy rain or snow Rwhen driving on inter-urban roads without traffic or infrastructure, e.g. in desert-like areas At least one driving system or driving safety system is malfunctioning or is temporarily unavailable: RActive Brake Assist RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC A warning tone also sounds. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving and drive safety systems will be available again. The display message disappears. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 142). X Switch off the engine. X Clean all sensors (Y page 269). X Restart the engine. The display message disappears. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 6 The restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. SRS Malfunction Ser‐ vice Required G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Further information about the restraint system (Y page 40). 6 Front Left Malfunc‐ tion Service Required or Front Right Malfunction Service Required 6 Rear Left Malfunc‐ tion Service Required or Rear Right Malfunction Service Required 6 Left Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required or Right Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required The restraint system is malfunctioning at the front on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The rear left-hand or right-hand restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. G WARNING The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z 201 On-board computer and displays Display messages 202 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Front Passenger Air‐ The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are deactivated during the journey, although: bag Disabled See Operator's Manual Ran adult or Ra person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seat If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is. G WARNING The front-passenger front air bag and front passenger knee bag may not be triggered in the event of an accident. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 142). X Switch the ignition off. X Have the occupant on the front-passenger seat get out of the vehicle. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds. Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant Classification System) has deactivated the frontpassenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag (Y page 48) Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐ tor's Manual display messages must not be shown on the multifunction display X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display. If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Further information about the Occupant Classification System (Y page 48). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Front Passenger Air‐ The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are enabled during the journey, even though: bag Enabled See Operator's Manual Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat or Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied The system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight on the seat. G WARNING The front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag may be triggered unintentionally. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 142). X Switch the ignition off. X Open the front-passenger door. X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the frontpassenger seat. X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the weight. The system might otherwise detect the additional weight and interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds. Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has deactivated the front-passenger front air bag and frontpassenger knee air bag (Y page 48) Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐ tor's Manual display messages must not be shown on the multifunction display X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display. If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant. Z On-board computer and displays Display messages 203 204 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Further information about the Occupant Classification System (Y page 48). Lights i Vehicles with LED bulbs in the light clusters: The display message for the corresponding lamp only appears when all of the LEDs in the lamp have failed. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand cornering light is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 105). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 105). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective. Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 105). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective. Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 105). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Left Corner‐ ing Light or Check Right Cornering Light Check Left Low Beam or Check Right Low Beam Check Rear Left Turn Signal or Check Rear Right Turn Signal Check Front Left Turn Signal or Check Front Right Turn Signal Check Left Mirror Turn Signal or Check Right Mirror Turn Signal Check Center Brake Lamp X X Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective. Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 105). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b Check Left Tail and Brake Lamps or Check Right Tail and Brake Lamps b On-board computer and displays Check Left Brake Lamp or Check Right Brake Lamp X The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective. Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 105). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X The left or right-hand high beam is defective. Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Left High Beam (Y page 105). or Check Right or High Beam X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b License Plate Lamp b Rear Fog Lamp b Check Front Left Parking Lamp or Check Front Right Parking Lamp b Backup Light b Check Left Tail Lamp or Check Right Tail Lamp 205 X The left or right-hand license plate lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The rear fog lamp is faulty. Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 105). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 105). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The backup lamp is defective. Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 105). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Z On-board computer and displays 206 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The front left-hand or front right-hand side marker lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand side marker lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Front Left Sidemarker Lamp or Check Front Right Sidemarker Lamp Check Rear Sidemarker Check Rear Sidemarker Left Lamp or Right Lamp b The left or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 105). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The exterior lighting is malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The light sensor is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. X Turn the light switch to the à position. Check Left Daytime Running Light or Check Right Daytime Running Light Malfunction See Operator's Manual Auto Lamp Function Inoperative Switch Off Lights b Switch On Headlamps You are driving with low-beam headlamps switched off. Turn the light switch to the L or à position. X Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: RThe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. RVisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. X Clean the windshield. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is displayed. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages 207 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions + The coolant level is too low. Check Coolant Level See Operator's Man‐ ual ! Avoid longer journeys when there is insufficient coolant in the X engine cooling system. You could otherwise damage the engine. Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (Y page 263). If you have to add coolant frequently: X ? ? Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine cooling system checked. The fan motor is malfunctioning. At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic. X The coolant is too hot. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 142). X Wait until the engine has cooled down. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display. If the temperature increases again: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †). Z On-board computer and displays Engine On-board computer and displays 208 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # The battery is not being charged. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes are: Ra defective alternator Ra torn poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics See Operator's Man‐ ual ! Do not drive any further. Otherwise the engine may overheat. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 142). Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X # The battery is no longer being charged and the condition of charge is too low. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 142). X Observe the instructions in the display message # See Oper‐ ator's Manual Manual. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. A warning tone also sounds. Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual Check Engine Oil At Next Refueling ! Avoid longer journeys when there is insufficient engine oil. You could otherwise damage the engine. Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 261). X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 262). X If the engine oil needs topping up more often: Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine checked. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedesbenz.com. X æ Fuel Level Low The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. Refuel at the nearest gas station. X Display messages ç æ Gas Cap Loose Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank. Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail. X The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: X Close the fuel filler cap. If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Driving systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions À Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also sounds. X If necessary, take a break. During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get enough rest. Attention Assist: Take a Break! À Attention Assist Inoperative ë Off ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding. A warning tone also sounds. X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 159). The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled. A warning tone also sounds. X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (Y page 159). Z On-board computer and displays Display messages 209 On-board computer and displays 210 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavaila‐ ble See Operator's Manual Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog Rthere have been no lane markings for an extended period Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Lane Keeping Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 142). X Clean the windshield. Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative Lane Keeping Assist is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavaila‐ ble See Operator's Manual Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Blind Spot Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 142). X Restart the engine. Blind Spot Assist Inoperative Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Active Parking Assist Canceled The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been fastened. X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the driver's door closed. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering intervention was active. X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunction steering wheel is not touched unintentionally. The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened. X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 165). Active Parking Assist Inoperative You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking maneuvers. Active Parking Assist will become available again after approximately ten minutes (Y page 165). X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Switch off and restart the engine. If the multifunction display still shows the display message: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Active Parking Assist Finished The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds. The display message disappears automatically. Active Distance Assist Off Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated (Y page 156). If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again after having Active Distance Assist Now Available been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (Y page 154). Active Distance Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range Rthe on-board voltage is too low A warning tone also sounds. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 142). X Restart the engine. Z On-board computer and displays Display messages 211 On-board computer and displays 212 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Distance Assist Inoperative Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is defective. Situation-dependent brake force boosting may also have failed. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Act. Distance Assist Suspended You have depressed the accelerator pedal. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Act. Distance Assist A condition for activating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has not been met. - - - mph X Check the activation conditions for Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (Y page 154). Cruise Control Inop‐ Cruise control is malfunctioning. erative A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Cruise Control - - - mph RA condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled. You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for example. RESP® is deactivated The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit. X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and store the speed. or X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 151). or X Reactivate ESP® (Y page 187). Display messages 213 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Check Tire Pressure Soon Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes: Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or installed new wheels and tires Rthe tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped G WARNING Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 142). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 274). X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure. X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pressure is correct (Y page 297). Check Tire Pressure Then Restart Run Flat Indicator Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since. X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires. X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 297). Run Flat Indicator Inoperative Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Please Correct Tire Pressure USA only: The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 297). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 300). Z On-board computer and displays Tires Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Check Tires USA only: The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position appears in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds. On-board computer and displays 214 G WARNING Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 142). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 274). X Check the tire pressure (Y page 297). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. Warning Tire Mal‐ function USA only: The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position appears in the multifunction display. G WARNING Driving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards: Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle Ryou could lose control of the vehicle Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 142). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 274). Tire Press. Monitor Currently Unavaila‐ ble USA only: Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, no signals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning. X Drive on. The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the problem has been resolved. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions TirePress. Sen‐ sor(s) Missing USA only: There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several tires. The pressure of the affected tire does not appear in the multifunction display. X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors USA only: The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. The tire pressure monitor is deactivated. X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes. Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative USA only: The tire pressure monitor is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Depress Brake to Start Engine You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position i without depressing the brake pedal. X Depress the brake pedal. To Deselect P or N, Depress Brake and Start Engine You attempted to shift the transmission to position k or h without starting the engine. X Start the engine. X Depress the brake pedal. i It is possible to shift the transmission from position j to the desired position only if you depress the brake pedal. Only then can the parking lock be deactivated. If you do not depress the brake pedal, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but the parking lock remains engaged. i At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †), you can shift out of position j into another transmission position only when the engine is running. Apply Brake to Shift from 'P' You attempted to shift the transmission to position k, i or h without depressing the brake pedal. X Depress the brake pedal. Z 215 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 216 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the transmission is in position k, i or h. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. X Shift the transmission to position j. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 142). X Close the driver's door completely. Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction. A warning tone also sounds. If transmission position h is selected: X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the transmission from position h. If position k, i or j is selected: X X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 142). Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service. The vehicle is moving. Only Shift to 'P' when Vehicle is Sta‐ X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying tionary attention to road and traffic conditions. X Shift the transmission to position j. To Engage Trans‐ miss. Position R First Depress the Brake You have attempted to shift from position h or i to position k. X Shift the transmission to position k with the brake pedal depressed. Reversing Not Possi‐ The automatic transmission is malfunctioning. You cannot back up. ble Service Required X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The automatic transmission is malfunctioning. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Transmission Mal‐ function X Transmission Mal‐ function Stop X The automatic transmission is malfunctioning. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 142). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Stop Vehicle Shift to P Leave Engine Running The automatic transmission has overheated. X Drive on carefully. The automatic transmission is available again when the display message goes out. If the multifunction display still shows the display message: Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 142). X Wait until the automatic transmission has cooled down and the display message has disappeared. X Auxiliary Battery Malfunction The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer being charged. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Until then, always shift the transmission to position j before you switch off the engine. X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake. Trans. Oil Overhea‐ ted Drive on with Care Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the transmission oil has overheated. Manual drive program p and the temporarily active manual drive program are no longer available. The engine power output is reduced. X Allow the vehicle to cool down. 4matic Currently Unavailable 4matic Inoperative N M 4MATIC has overheated. The vehicle is only driven by the front wheels. Drive on. The airflow cools 4MATIC more quickly. When the display message goes out, 4MATIC is available again and the vehicle is driven by all four wheels. X 4MATIC is malfunctioning. The vehicle is only driven by the front wheels. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The trunk lid is open. Close the trunk lid. X The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 142). X Close the hood. Z 217 On-board computer and displays Display messages 218 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages C Ð Power Steering Mal‐ function See Opera‐ tor's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. Close all the doors. X The power steering is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. If you are able to steer safely: X X Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. If you are unable to steer safely: X X Do not drive on. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver range. X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears in the multifunction display. ¥ Check Washer Fluid The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. X Add washer fluid (Y page 263). Wiper Malfunction‐ ing X Hazard Warning Flashers Malfunc‐ tioning The windshield wipers are malfunctioning. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The hazard warning lamps are faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. SmartKey Display messages  Key Does Not Belong to Vehicle  Take Your Key from Ignition Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock. Use the correct SmartKey. X The SmartKey is in the ignition lock. A warning tone sounds X Remove the SmartKey. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions  The SmartKey needs to be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.  The SmartKey battery is discharged. X Change the battery (Y page 73).  The display message is shown for a maximum of 60 seconds and is only a reminder. You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off. The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. A warning tone sounds. X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.  The SmartKey is not in the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle centrally or start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 142). X Locate the SmartKey. Obtain a New Key Replace Key Battery Don't Forget Your Key Key Not Detected (red display message) Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, the SmartKey is not detected whilst the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 142). X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and drive in SmartKey mode.  Key Not Detected (white display message)  Remove 'Start' But‐ ton and Insert Key The SmartKey is currently undetected. X Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. If the SmartKey still cannot be detected: X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. The SmartKey is continually undetected. The SmartKey detection function has a temporary malfunction or is faulty. A warning tone also sounds. X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 219 On-board computer and displays Display messages 220 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays General notes Some systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indicator and warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after starting the engine or whilst driving. Safety Seat belts Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ü N After engine start, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds. The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44). ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to six seconds. The driver's seat belt is not fastened. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44). The warning tone ceases. ü N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the driver's or the front-passenger door is closed. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44). The warning lamp goes out. There are objects on the front-passenger seat. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out. ü N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44). The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 221 Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions $J N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 142). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. $J N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. G WARNING The braking effect may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 142). X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. Z On-board computer and displays Safety systems On-board computer and displays 222 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunction. Therefore, BAS (Brake Assist), Active Brake Assist, ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), the HOLD function and hill start assist, for example, are also deactivated. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. If the ABS control unit is defective, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available. ! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS is temporarily unavailable. Therefore, BAS, Active Brake Assist, ESP®, EBD (electronic brake force distribution), the HOLD function and hill start assist, for example, are also deactivated. Possible causes are: Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. EBD is malfunctioning. Therefore, ABS, BAS, Active Brake Assist, ESP®, the HOLD function and hill start assist, for example, are not available either. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ! ÷å $J N $(USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake warning lamp and the yellow ABS, ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Therefore, BAS, Active Brake Assist, EBD, the HOLD function and hill start assist, for example, are not available either. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z 223 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 224 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin. Cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary. X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Do not deactivate ESP®. In rare cases (Y page 66) , it may be best to deactivate ESP®. Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 64). å N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ESP® is deactivated. ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin. G WARNING If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Reactivate ESP®. In rare cases (Y page 66) , it may be best to deactivate ESP®. Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 64). X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. If ESP® cannot be activated: X Drive on carefully. X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have ESP® checked. M N Mercedes-AMG vehicles only: The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. SPORT handling mode is activated. G WARNING When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the conditions described in the "Activating/deactivating ESP®" section (Y page 66). Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷å N The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. ESP®, BAS, Active Brake Assist, the HOLD function and hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ÷å N The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable. Active Brake Assist may have also failed. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Self-diagnosis is not yet complete G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z 225 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 226 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions !F N F (USA only), ! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electric parking brake flashes or lights up and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric parking brake lights up. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. 6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The restraint system is malfunctioning. G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the restraint system checked. For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 40). Engine Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ; N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. There may be a malfunction, for example: Rin the engine management Rin the fuel injection system Rin the exhaust system Rin the ignition system Rin the fuel system The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency mode. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving. æ N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest gas station. Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions æ N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap. X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop. ? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the coolant temperature gage is at the start of the scale. The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is malfunctioning. The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 142). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z 227 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 228 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. The coolant level is too low. If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be defective. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 142). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 263). X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic. ? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low. G WARNING The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 142). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 263). X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic. X Driving systems Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions · N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A warning tone also sounds. You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel at too high a speed. X Be prepared to brake immediately. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take evasive action. Further information on the distance warning function of Active Brake Assist (Y page 62). Z On-board computer and displays Warning/ indicator lamp 229 230 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays Tires Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit. The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires. G WARNING Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 142). X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 274). X Check the tire pressure (Y page 297). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tire pressure monitor is faulty. G WARNING The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure. There is a risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. General notes The multimedia system section in this Operator's Manual describes the basic principles for operation. More information can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Important safety notes G WARNING If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you may be distracted from the traffic situation. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. The multimedia system calculates the route to the destination without taking the following into account, for example: Rtraffic lights Rstop and yield signs Rparking or stopping restrictions Rroad narrowing Rother road and traffic rules and regulations The multimedia system may give incorrect navigation recommendations if the actual street/ traffic situation does not correspond with the digital map's data. For example: Ra diverted route Rthe road layout or the direction of a one-way street has been changed For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations always have priority over multimedia system driving recommendations. Navigation announcements are intended to direct you while driving without diverting your attention from the road and driving. Please always use this feature instead of consulting the map display for directions. Looking at the icons or map display can distract you from traffic conditions and driving, and increase the risk of an accident. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that is deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). However, it is recommended to install it at a distance of at least 8 inches (approx. 20 cm) between the radiation source and a person's body (not including limbs such as hands, wrists, feet and legs). G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their function and/or the function of other networked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function as intended and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Never tamper with the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. You should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Function restrictions For safety reasons, some functions are restricted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion. You will notice this, for example, because either you will not be able to select certain menu items or a message will appear to this effect. Z 231 Multimedia system Function restrictions Operating system 232 Operating system Overview General notes Multimedia system ! Do not use the space in front of the display for storage. Objects placed here could damage the display or impair its function. Avoid any direct contact with the display surface. Pressure on the display surface may result in impairments to the display, which could be irreversible. Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your ability to read the display. The display has an automatic temperature-controlled switch-off feature. The brightness is automatically reduced if the temperature is too high. The display may temporarily switch off completely. Cleaning instructions ! Do not touch the display. The display has a very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a risk of scratching. If you have to clean the screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent and a soft, lint-free cloth. The display must be switched off and have cooled down before you start cleaning. Do not apply pressure to the display surface when cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible damage to the display. Switching the multimedia system on/off X Press the q control knob. Adjusting the volume Turn the q control knob. The volume is adjusted: Rfor the currently selected media source Rduring traffic or navigation announcements Rin hands-free mode during an active call X Switching the sound on or off X Press the 8 button on the control panel. If the audio output is switched off, the status line will show the 8 symbol. If you switch the media source or set the volume, the sound is automatically switched on. i Navigation announcements will be heard even if the sound is muted. Functions The multimedia system has the following functions: RRadio mode RMedia mode with media search RSound systems RNavigation system COMAND: navigation via the hard drive Audio 20: navigation via SD card RCommunication functions RSIRIUS Weather (COMAND) RVehicle functions with system settings RFavorites functions Controller The controller in the center console lets you: Rselect menu items on the display Renter characters Rselect a destination on the map Rsave entries The controller can be: Rturned 3 Rslid left or right 1 Rslid forwards or back 4 Rslid diagonally 2 Rpressed briefly or pressed and held7 Back button You can use the % button to exit a menu or to call up the main menu of the current operating mode. X To exit the menu: briefly press the % button. The multimedia system changes to the next higher menu level in the current operating mode. X To call up the main menu: press the % button for longer than two seconds. The multimedia system changes to the main menu of the current operating mode. Operating system You can assign predefined functions using the g favorites button and call them up by pressing the button (Y page 233). Favorites Calling up and exiting favorites To call up: press the g button on the controller. X Select a favorite, e.g. Vehicle Vehicle. The favorites are displayed. X To exit: press the g button again. X Adding favorites Adding predefined favorites Press the g button. COMAND: slide 6 the controller. X Audio 20: slide 5 or 6 the controller. The menu bar is displayed. X Select Reassign. Reassign The categories are displayed. X Select a category. The favorites are displayed. X Select a favorite. X COMAND: to add the favorite to the desired position, turn and press the controller. If a favorite has already been added at this position, it will be overwritten. X Audio 20: to add the favorite to the desired position, turn, slide 5 or 6 and press the controller. If a favorite has already been added at this position, it will be overwritten. X X Adding your own favorites You can add climate control as a favorite, for example. X Select VehicleQVehicle Vehicle Vehicle Settings. Settings X Press and hold the g button until the favorites are displayed. X Add a favorite to the desired position. If a favorite has already been added at this position, it will be overwritten. Navigation mode Important safety notes G WARNING If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you may be distracted from the traffic situation. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the navigation system. General notes Among other things, correct functioning of the navigation system depends on GPS reception. In certain situations, GPS reception may be impaired, there may be interference or there may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or parking garages. Audio 20 is equipped with Garmin® MAP PILOT (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). The Garmin® MAP PILOT operating instructions are stored on the SD card as a PDF file. The SD card box contains a quick guide. The following descriptions apply to navigation with COMAND. Further information can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Selecting a route type and route options Multimedia system: NaviQNavigation Navigation. Select Navi The map shows the vehicle's current position. X Slide 6 the controller. X Select Options OptionsQRoute Route Settings. Settings Notes for route types: X REco Route Traffic Route RDynamic Z Multimedia system Favorites button 233 Operating system Multimedia system 234 Traffic reports on the route for the route guidance are taken into account (not available in all countries). RDynamic TRF. Route After Request You can decide whether or not current traffic reports should be included in the route calculation (not available in all countries). RCalculate Alternative Routes Different routes are being calculated. In order to do so, instead of Start Start, select the menu item Continue. Continue X To avoid/use route options: select Avoid Options. Options X Select a route option. Notes for route options: Select the location. If available, the ZIP code is shown. If there are different ZIP codes available for the location, the corresponding digits are displayed with an X. X Enter the street and house number. The address is in the menu. Further options for destination entry: X Toll Roads The route calculation includes roads which require you to pay a usage fee (toll). RNumber of Occupants in the Vehicle: (only available in the USA) Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the access conditions for carpool lanes. Carpool lanes will be included if the carpool lanes option is activated. for a keyword The keyword search finds destinations using fragments of words. Rselect the last destination Rselect a contact Rselect a POI You can search for a POI by location, name or telephone number. Rselect destination on the map Renter intermediate destination You can map the route to the destination yourself with up to four intermediate destinations. Rselect destinations from Mercedes-Benz Apps Rselect geo-coordinates Entering an address Calculating the route Multimedia system: Prerequisite: the address has been entered and is in the menu. X Select Start or Continue Continue. The route is calculated with the selected route type and the selected route options. If route guidance has already been activated, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to end the current route guidance. X Select Cancel Active Route Guidance or Set as Intermediate Destination. Destination Cancel Active Route Guidance cancels the current route guidance and starts route calculation to the new destination. Set as Intermediate Destination adds the new destination in addition to the existing destination and opens the intermediate destinations list. RUse NaviQNavigation Navigation. Select Navi The map shows the vehicle's current position. X Slide 6 the controller. X Select Destination DestinationQAddress Address Entry. Entry Enter an address, e.g. as follows: Rcity or ZIP code, street, house number Rstate/province, city or ZIP code Rcity or ZIP code, center Rstreet, city or ZIP code, intersection X Select City City. The city in which the vehicle is currently located (current vehicle position) is at the top. Below this, you will see locations for which route guidance has already been carried out. X Enter the city. The G symbol: the location is contained on the digital map multiple times. X To switch to the list: slide the 5 controller. X Rsearch Connecting a mobile phone (COMAND) Requirements For telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, you require a Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone. The mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile 1.0 or above. Multimedia system: Select Vehicle VehicleQSystem System Set‐ tingsQActivate tings Activate Bluetooth. Bluetooth X Activate Bluetooth® O. X Mobile phone: X Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Bluetooth® visibility for other devices (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). The Bluetooth® device names for all of one manufacturer's products might be identical. To make it possible to clearly identify your mobile phone, change the device name (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message Access Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the following information will be transmitted after you connect: RPhone book RCall lists RText messages and e-mail i Further information on suitable mobile phones can be found at: http:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect i In the USA, you can get in touch with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372). In Canada, you can get in touch with the Customer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100. Searching for and authorizing (connecting) a mobile phone Before using your mobile phone with the multimedia system for the first time, you will need to search for the phone and then authorize (connect) it. Depending on the mobile phone, authorization either takes place by means of Secure Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. The multimedia system automatically makes the procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone available. The mobile phone is always connected automatically after authorization. Further information on using a mobile phone with the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual). If the multimedia system does not detect your mobile phone, this may be due to particular security settings on your mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). Only one mobile phone can be connected to the multimedia system at any one time. Searching for a mobile phone Multimedia system: Select Tel/®QConn. Tel/ Conn. Device Search for PhonesQStart DeviceQSearch Phones Start Search. Search The available mobile phones are displayed. Symbols in the device list X Symbol Explanation Ï New mobile phone found, not yet authorized. Ñ Mobile phone is authorized, but is not connected. Connecting a mobile phone Authorization using Secure Simple Pairing: X Select mobile phone. A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone. X If codes match: select Yes on the multimedia system. X Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, confirm the connection to the multimedia system and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up to two minutes to be displayed (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). X If the codes are different: select No on the multimedia system. The process is canceled. Repeat authorization. Z 235 Multimedia system Operating system Operating system 236 Authorization by entering a passkey (passcode): Multimedia system Bluetooth® Select the name of the mobile phone. The input menu for the passkey is displayed. X Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combination as a passkey. X Enter the passkey on the multimedia system. X Press ¬ to confirm. X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, confirm the connection to the multimedia system and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up to two minutes to be displayed (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). X Connecting a mobile phone (Audio 20) Requirements For telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, you require at least one Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone depending on use of one-telephone mode or two-telephone mode. The mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile 1.0 or above. In two-telephone mode you can use all the functions of the multimedia system with the main telephone. With the additional telephone, you can receive incoming calls. Multimedia system: Select Vehicle VehicleQSystem System Set‐ tings tingsQActivate Activate Bluetooth. Bluetooth X Activate Bluetooth® O. X Mobile phone: X Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Bluetooth® visibility for other devices (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). The Bluetooth® device names for all of one manufacturer's products might be identical. To make it possible to clearly identify your mobile phone, change the device name (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message Access Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the following information is transmitted after you connect the main telephone: RPhone book RCall lists RText messages and e-mail i Further information on suitable mobile phones can be found at: http:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect i In the USA, you can get in touch with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372). In Canada, you can get in touch with the Customer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100. Searching for and authorizing (connecting) a mobile phone Before using your mobile phone with the multimedia system for the first time, you will need to search for the phone and then authorize (connect) it. Depending on the mobile phone, authorization either takes place by means of Secure Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. The multimedia system automatically makes the procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone available. The mobile phone is always connected automatically after authorization. Further information on using a mobile phone with the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual). If the multimedia system does not detect your mobile phone, this may be due to particular security settings on your mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). Searching for a mobile phone Multimedia system: Select Tel/®QConn. Tel/ Conn. DeviceQCon‐ Device Con‐ nect New Device Device. X Select Connect via Vehicle. Vehicle X Select mobile phone. X Connecting a mobile phone One-telephone mode: select Connect as New Main Phone. Phone X Two-telephone mode: select Connect as Additional Phone when a mobile phone is already connected. X Operating system Symbols in the device manager The symbols are shown in color depending on their use. Symbol Explanation Mobile phone connected to the multimedia system Main telephone with full range of functions Additional telephone for incoming calls in two telephone mode Media mode General notes If you wish to play external media sources, the appropriate media mode must already be turned on. Further information on media mode (see the Digital Operator's Manual). The following external media sources can be used: RApple® devices (e.g. iPhone®) RUSB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player) (Y page 238) RCD RDVD (COMAND) RSD cards RVia devices connected by Bluetooth® i Information on single CD/DVD drive or DVD changer (see the Digital Operator's Manual). Selecting using the device list Multimedia system: Select Media MediaQDevices Devices. The available media sources will be shown. The # dot indicates the current setting. X Select the media source. Playable files are played. X Inserting/removing an SD card Important safety notes G WARNING SD cards are small parts. They can be swallowed and cause choking. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Keep the SD card out of the reach of children. If a SD card is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. ! If the SD card is no longer in use, you should take it out and remove it from the vehicle. High temperatures can damage the card. Inserting an SD card The SD card slot is located on the control panel. X Insert the SD card into the SD card slot until the SD card engages. The side with the contacts must face down. Removing an SD card Press the SD card. The SD card is ejected. X Remove the SD card. X Z Multimedia system Authorization using Secure Simple Pairing: A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone. X Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, confirm the connection to the multimedia system and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up to two minutes to be displayed (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). X If the codes are different: select No on the multimedia system. The process is canceled. Repeat authorization. or X Authorization by entering a passkey (passcode): enter any one- to sixteen-digit number sequence which you have chosen yourself into the passkey input menu. X Press ¬ to confirm. X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, confirm the connection to the multimedia system and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up to two minutes to be displayed (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). X 237 Operating system 238 Multimedia system Connecting USB devices Connect the USB device to the USB port. There are two USB ports in the stowage space under the armrest. X Select the media source (Y page 237). X Loading guidelines G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open. G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. There is a risk of injury. Always be particularly careful around the exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow these components to cool down before touching them. The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. Observe the following notes when loading and transporting a load: RNever exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle mass or the gross axle weight rating for the vehicle (including occupants). The values are specified on the vehicle iden- tification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's door. RThe trunk is the preferred place to carry objects. RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as possible and as low down in the trunk as possible. RThe load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. RAlways place the load against the rear or front seat backrests. Make sure that the seat backrests are securely locked into place. RAlways place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. RUse the cargo tie-down rings and the parcel nets to transport loads and luggage. RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening materials appropriate for the weight and size of the load. RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges for protection. Stowage areas Stowage spaces Important safety notes G WARNING If objects in the passenger compartment are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. RClose the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 239). Z 239 Stowage and features Stowage areas Stowage areas 240 Stowage compartments in the front Stowage and features Glove box To open: pull handle : and open glove box flap ;. X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards until it engages. X There is a pen holder at the top of the glove box flap. Eyeglasses compartment X To open: press marking :. Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment is always closed while the vehicle is in motion. Stowage compartment in the front center console X To open: press the marking on cover :. i Depending on the vehicle equipment, there may be an ashtray in the center console instead of a storage compartment. Stowage compartment in front of the armrest (vehicles with automatic transmission) X To open: press the marking on cover :. i You can remove the non-slip mat and the insert for cleaning. When removing the insert you will have to overcome some slight resistance. Stowage areas Stowage compartment under the armrest 241 Parcel nets Stowage nets are located: Rin the front-passenger footwell Ron the back of the driver's and the frontpassenger seat Ron the left and right-hand side in the trunk Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 239) and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces (Y page 239). Through-loading facility in the rear passenger compartment Stowage and features To open: on vehicles with movable armrests, make sure that the armrest is in the rearmost position. X Press button : and fold the armrest up. X Depending on the vehicle equipment, the armrest can be moved backwards or forwards in a longitudinal direction. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following may be in the stowage compartment: a multimedia connector unit with an SD card slot and 2 USB ports, e.g. for use with an iPod®, iPhone® or MP3 player (see the Digital Operator's Manual). Stowage compartments in the rear passenger compartment X X Stowage compartment in the rear passenger compartment center console To open: fold down seat armrest :. Pull the center head restraint on the rear bench seat into the uppermost position (Y page 94). Slide locking mechanism = in the direction of the arrow. X Swing flap ; fully to the side. Flap ; is held open by a magnet. X X To open: pull down the top of stowage compartment : by the edge of the handle. i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, there may be an open stowage space above the stowage compartment. To close: swing flap ; in the trunk back until it engages. X Fold armrest : up fully if necessary. X Z 242 Stowage areas Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 239). Cargo compartment enlargement Folding the rear seat backrest forward and back Folding the rear seat backrests forward Important safety notes Stowage and features G WARNING If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged they could fold forwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the event of an accident. RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The seat belt can no longer offer the intended level of protection and could even cause injuries. RObjects or loads in the trunk cannot be restrained by the seat backrest. There is an increased risk of injury. Before every trip, make sure that the seat backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat are engaged. Fully insert the backrest head restraints if necessary (Y page 95). X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary. X Pull left-hand or right-hand release handle ; of the seat backrest forward. Corresponding seat backrest : is released. X Fold backrest : forward. X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. X ! Before folding the backrest in the rear com- partment forwards, make sure that the rear compartment armrest and the cup holder are folded in. They may otherwise be damaged. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 239). The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backrests can be folded forwards separately to increase the trunk capacity. X Insert the seat belt into seat-belt holder :. Folding the rear seat backrest back ! Make sure that the seat belt does not become trapped when folding the rear seat backrest back. Otherwise, it could be damaged. Stowage areas 243 Stowage well under the trunk floor Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary. X Fold seat backrest : back until it engages. Red lock status indicator ; is no longer visible. X Adjust the head restraints if necessary (Y page 95). X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. Under the trunk floor you can find a bracket for TIREFIT and the vehicle tool kit, etc. X To open: pull handle : up. Securing loads Observe the following notes on securing loads: RObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 239). RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down rings. RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-down rings evenly. RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip protection for light loads. RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges or corners. RPad sharp edges for protection. X Hook handle : into rain trough ;. To enlarge the trunk you can remove the trunk floor. X To remove: lift the trunk floor almost to rain trough ; and pull it out. : Cargo tie-down rings Z Stowage and features X Features 244 To insert: place the trunk floor at the bottom in the center. X Hold sides of trunk floor = and press in the direction of the arrow until it engages in hooks ?. X Attaching the roof carrier Roof carrier Stowage and features Important safety notes G WARNING When you load the roof, the center of gravity of the vehicle rises and the driving characteristics change. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style. ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use roof carriers that have been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This helps to prevent damage to the vehicle. Position the load on the roof carrier in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion. Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that when the roof carrier is installed you can: Ropen the panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel fully Ropen the trunk lid fully You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section (Y page 325). An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof load may become detached from the vehicle. You must therefore ensure that you observe the roof carrier manufacturer's installation instructions. Open and fold the covers : upwards carefully in the direction of the arrow. X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchorage points under covers :. X Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. X Features Cup holder Important safety notes G WARNING The cup holder cannot hold a container secure whilst traveling. If you use a cup holder whilst traveling, the container may be flung around and liquid may be spilled. The vehicle occupants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they may be scalded. You may be distracted from the traffic conditions and you could lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary. Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size. Always close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot. G WARNING The heating elements of the cup holder can become very hot. You could burn yourself on them. There is a risk of injury. Features Do not touch the hot heating elements of the cup holder. Always make sure that children cannot access the hot heating elements of the cup holder. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. 245 Cup holder in the front center console G WARNING ! Only use the cup holders for containers of the right size and which have lids. The drinks could otherwise spill. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 239). The stowage compartments in the doors provide space for bottles: Rfront: capacity up to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 l) Rrear: capacity up to 17 fl. oz. (0.5 l) : Cup holder The cup holder and the rubber mat underneath can be removed for cleaning. Clean them with clean, lukewarm water only. X To remove: carefully pull in upper sections of cup holder : on the driver's and frontpassenger sides until they release. X Lift the cup holder upwards ; until it can be removed. X To install: insert cup holder into lateral curved sections ; in the stowage compartment. Insert the cup holder so that the wedge Z Stowage and features If objects in the passenger compartment are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. RClose the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk. Features 246 of the upper section of cup holder : faces forwards. X Press the cup holder downwards until it engages on the right and left-hand sides. Cup holder in the rear seat armrest ! Do not sit on or support your body weight on the rear seat armrest when it is folded down, as you could otherwise damage it. ! Close the cup holder before folding the rear Stowage and features seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holder could be damaged. : ; = ? A Mirror light Bracket Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket Vanity mirror Mirror cover Vanity mirror in the sun visor Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover A has been folded up. Glare from the side Fold down the rear seat armrest. X To open: press the front of cup holder : or ;. Cup holder : or ; extends automatically. X To close: slide cup holder : or ; back until it engages. X Sun visors Overview G WARNING If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an accident. Always keep the mirror cover folded down while driving. Fold down the sun visor. Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;. X Swing the sun visor to the side. X X Ashtray Front ashtray ! The stowage space under the ashtray is not heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, the stowage space could be damaged. Features Vehicles with a stowage compartment cover: press the lower section of cover :. The stowage compartment opens. X To remove the insert: lift insert = up ; and out. X To re-install the insert: press insert = into the holder until it engages. X 247 Your attention must always be focused on the traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter when road and traffic conditions permit. i If you remove the ashtray insert, you can use the resulting compartment for stowage. Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). X Vehicles with a stowage compartment cover: press the lower section of cover :. The stowage compartment opens. X Press in cigarette lighter ;. Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot. X To open: pull cover = out by its top edge. To remove: pull insert ; by recess : in the direction of arrow ? until it audibly releases. X Lift insert ; up and out. X To install the insert: install insert ; from above into the holder and press down until it engages. X X Cigarette lighter G WARNING You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter. In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example There is a risk of fire and injury. Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Ra 12 V sockets General notes Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). The sockets can be used for accessories with a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories include such items as chargers for mobile phones. If you use the sockets for long periods when the engine is switched off, the battery may discharge. An emergency cut-out ensures that the onboard voltage does not drop too low. If the onboard voltage is too low, the power to the sockets is automatically cut. This ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine. X Socket in the front center console Vehicles with a stowage compartment cover: press the lower section of the cover. The stowage compartment opens. X Lift up the cover of the socket. X Z Stowage and features Rear compartment ashtray Features 248 Socket in the rear passenger compartment center console Pull the cover out by the top of the handle edge. X Lift up the cover of the socket. X Stowage and features Socket in the trunk X Lift up the cover of socket :. Mercedes me connect General notes A license agreement must be in place in order to activate the Mercedes me connect service. Make sure that your system is activated and operational. To register, press the ï MB Info call button. If any of the steps mentioned are not carried out, the system may not be activated. If you have questions about the activation, contact one of the following telephone hotlines: USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 Canada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367 Only USA: shortly after successfully registering with Mercedes me connect, a user ID and password will be sent to you by post. You can use this password to log in to the Mercedes me connect area under "Owners Online" at http:// www.mbusa.com. The system is available if: Rit has been activated and is operational Rthe corresponding mobile phone network is available for transmitting data to the Customer Center Ra service subscription is available Determining the location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if: RGPS reception is available Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to the Customer Assistance Center The Mercedes me connect system To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as follows: X Press the W or X button on the multifunction steering wheel. or X Use the multimedia system's volume control. The system offers various services, e.g.: RAutomatic and manual emergency call RRoadside Assistance call RMB Info call You can find information and a description of all available features under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. System self-test After you have switched on the ignition, the system carries out a self-diagnosis. A malfunction in the system has been detected if one of the following occurs: RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does not come on during the system self-test. RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside Assistance call button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system. RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system. RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the following buttons continues to light up red after the system self-diagnosis: - SOS button - F Roadside Assistance call button - ï MB Info call button RThe Inoperative or the Service Not Activated message appears in the multifunction display after the system self-diagnosis. If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, the system may not operate as expected. In the event of an emergency, help will have to be summoned by other means. Have the system checked at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service Center or contact the following service hotlines: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 Emergency call Important safety notes G WARNING It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle, even if you have pressed the SOS button in an emergency if: Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi- cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident vehicle is on a dangerous section of road Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be seen by other road users, particularly when dark or in poor visibility conditions There is a risk of an accident and injury. Leave the vehicle immediately in this or similar situations as soon as it is safe to do so. Move to a safe location along with other vehicle occupants. In such situations, secure the vehicle in accordance with national regulations, e. g. with a warning triangle. Rthe All important information on the emergency is transmitted, for example: RCurrent location of the vehicle (as determined by the GPS system) RVehicle identification number RInformation on the severity of the accident Shortly after the emergency call has been initiated, a voice connection is automatically established between the Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. RIf the vehicle occupants are responsive, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center attempts to get more information on the emergency. RIf there is no response from the vehicle occupants, an ambulance is immediately sent to the vehicle If no voice connection can be established to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, the system has been unable to initiate an emergency call. This can occur, for example, if the relevant mobile phone network is not available. The indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes continuously. The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display and must be confirmed. In this case, summon assistance by other means. Making an emergency call General notes Observe the notes on system activation (Y page 248). An emergency call is dialed automatically if an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is triggered. You cannot end an automatically triggered emergency call yourself. An emergency call can also be initiated manually. As soon as the emergency call has been initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes. The Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display. The audio output is muted. Once the connection has been made, the Call Connected message appears in the multifunction display. To initiate an emergency call manually: press cover : briefly to open. X Press and hold the SOS button for at least one second ;. The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes until the emergency call is concluded. X Wait for a voice connection to the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center. X Z 249 Stowage and features Features Features 250 X or To end a call: press the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel. Press the corresponding multimedia system button for ending a phone call. X After the emergency call, close cover :. X Stowage and features If the mobile phone network is unavailable, Mercedes me connect is not able to make an emergency call. If you leave the vehicle immediately after pressing the SOS button ;, you do not know if Mercedes me connect has successfully made the emergency call. In this case, always summon assistance by other means. Roadside Assistance button X To make a call: press Roadside Assistance call button :. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance call button : flashes while the call is active. The Connecting Call message appears on the multifunction display. The audio output is muted. If a connection can be established, the Call Connected message appears in the multifunction display. If a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example: RCurrent location of the vehicle RVehicle identification number The display of the multimedia system indicates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button on the multimedia system, for example. Voice output is not available in this case. A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. From the remote malfunction diagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center can ascertain the nature of the problem (Y page 253). The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or makes arrangements for your vehicle to be transported to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service Center. You may be charged for services such as repair work and/or towing. You can find more information in the separate Mercedes me connect manual. The system has not been able to initiate a Roadside Assistance call, if: Rthe F indicator lamp for the Roadside Assistance call button is flashing continuously. Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center was established. This can occur if the relevant mobile phone network is not available, for example. The Call Failed message appears on the multifunction display. X To end a call: press the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel. or X Press the corresponding multimedia system button for ending a phone call. MB Info call button X To make a call: press MB Info call button :. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. Features If a connection can be established, the Call Connected message appears in the multifunction display. If a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example: RCurrent location of the vehicle RVehicle identification number The display of the multimedia system indicates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button on the multimedia system, for example. Voice output is not available in this case. A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. You receive information about operating your vehicle, about the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service Center and about other products and services from Mercedes-Benz. You can find further information on the Mercedes me connect system under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. The system has not been able to initiate an MB Info call, if: Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call button ï is flashing continuously. Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center has been established. This can occur if the relevant mobile phone network is not available, for example. The Call Failed message appears on the multifunction display. X To end a call: press the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel. or X Press the corresponding multimedia system button for ending a phone call. Call priority When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency call can still be initiated. In this case, an emergency call will take priority and override all other active calls. The indicator lamp of the respective button flashes until the call is ended. An emergency call can only be terminated by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. All other calls can be ended by pressing: Rthe ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel Rthe corresponding button in the multimedia system to end the voice call When a call is initiated, the audio system is muted. The mobile phone is no longer connected to the multimedia system. However, if you want to use your mobile phone, do so only when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe location. Downloading destinations Downloading destinations Downloading destinations gives you access to a database with over 15 million points of interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on the navigation system in your vehicle. If you know the destination, the address can be downloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain the location of Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinations in the vicinity. Furthermore, you can download routes with up to four way points. You are prompted to confirm route guidance to the address entered. X Yes by turning 3 or sliding 1 SelectYes the controller and confirm with 7. The system calculates the route and subsequently starts the route guidance with the address entered. If you select No the address can be stored in the address book. Z Stowage and features The indicator lamp in MB Info call button : flashes while the connection is being made. The Connecting Call message appears on the multifunction display. The audio output is muted. 251 Features 252 The destination download function is available if: Rthe vehicle is equipped with a navigation system. Rthe relevant mobile phone network is available and data transfer is possible. Stowage and features Route Assistance This service is part of the Mercedes me connect PLUS Package and cannot be obtained separately. You can use the Route Assistance function even if the vehicle is not equipped with a navigation system. Within the framework of this service, you receive a professional and reliable form of navigation support without having to leave your vehicle. The customer service representative finds a suitable route depending on your vehicle's current position and the desired destination. You will then be guided live through the current route section. Search and Send General notes To use "Search & Send", your vehicle must be equipped with Mercedes me connect and a navigation system. Additionally, a Mercedes me connect service subscription must be completed. "Search & Send" is a destination entry service. A destination address found on Google Maps™ can be transferred via Mercedes me connect directly to your vehicle's navigation system. Specifying and sending the destination address Go to the website http://maps.google.com and enter a destination address into the entry field. X To send the destination address to the email address of your Mercedes me connect account: click the corresponding button on the website. Example: If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then 'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address will be sent to your vehicle. X When the "Send" dialog window appears: X Enter the e-mail address you specified when setting up your Mercedes me connect account into the corresponding field. X Click "Send". Information on specific commands such as "Address entry" or "Send" can be found on the website. Calling up a transmitted destination address Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). The transmitted destination address is loaded into the vehicle's navigation system. A display message appears, asking whether navigation should be started. X SelectYes Yes by turning 3 or sliding 1 the controller and confirm with 7. The system calculates the route and subsequently starts the route guidance with the address entered. If you select No the address can be stored in the address book. If you have sent more than one destination address, each individual destination must be confirmed separately. Destination addresses are loaded in the same order as the order in which they were sent. If you have multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicles with Mercedes me connect and active Mercedes me connect accounts: If multiple vehicles are registered under the same e-mail address, the destination will be sent to all the vehicles. X Vehicle remote opening You can use the vehicle remote opening if you have unintentionally locked your vehicle and a replacement SmartKey is not available. The vehicle can be unlocked by the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center. The vehicle can be immediately unlocked remotely within four days of the ignition being turned off. After this time, remote unlocking may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days, the vehicle can no longer be unlocked remotely. The vehicle remote opening feature is available if the relevant mobile phone network is available and a data connection is possible. X Contact the following service hotlines: Features Vehicle remote closing The valet locking feature can be used when you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and you are no longer nearby. The vehicle can then be locked by the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center. The vehicle can be immediately locked remotely up to four days after the ignition was last switched off. After this time, the valet locking may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehicle can no longer be locked remotely. The valet locking feature is available if the relevant mobile phone network is available and a data connection is possible. X Contact the following service hotlines: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 You will be asked for your password. The next time you are inside the vehicle and you switch on the ignition, the Doors Locked Remotely message appears in the multifunction display. Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via: Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" section Rtelephone applications (e.g. for iPhone®, Android™) To do this, you will need your identification number and password. Stolen vehicle recovery service If your vehicle has been stolen: X Notify the police. The police will issue a numbered incident report. X This number will be forwarded to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center together with your PIN. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center then tries to locate the system. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center contacts you and the local law enforcement agency if the vehicle is located. However, only the law enforcement agency is informed of the location of the vehicle. If the anti-theft alarm system is activated for longer than 30 seconds, Mercedes me connect automatically notifies the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. Vehicle Health Check With the Vehicle Health Check, the Customer Assistance Center can provide improved support for problems with your vehicle. During an existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the Customer Assistance Center. The customer service representative can use the received data to decide what kind of assistance is required. You are then, for example, guided to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service Center or a recovery vehicle is called. If vehicle data needs to be transferred during an MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this is initiated by the Customer Assistance Center. The Roadside Assistance Connected message appears in the display. If the Vehicle Health Check can be started, the Request for Vehi‐ cle Diagnostics Received Start vehi‐ cle diagnostics? message appears in the display. X Press the Yes button to confirm the message. X If the Vehicle Diagnostics Please Start Ignition message appears: turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). X If the Please follow the instructions received by phone and move your vehi‐ cle to a safe position. message appears: please follow the instructions Z Stowage and features Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 X You will be asked for your password. X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via: Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" section Rtelephone applications (e.g. for iPhone®, Android™) To do this, you will need your identification number and password. 253 254 Features Stowage and features received by phone and move your vehicle to a safe position. The message in the display disappears. The vehicle operating state check begins. During this procedure, you will see the Vehi‐ cle Diagnostics Active message. If you select Cancel, Cancel the Vehicle Health Check is canceled completely. When the check is complete, the Sending vehicle diagnostics data. (Voice con‐ nection may be interrupted during data transfer) message appears. The vehicle data can now be sent. X Press the OK button to confirm the message. The voice connection with the Customer Assistance Center is terminated. The Vehicle Diagnostics: Transfer‐ ring Data... message appears. The vehicle data is sent to the Customer Assistance Center. Depending on what the customer service representative agreed with you, the voice connection is re-established after the transfer is complete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or phone. Another function of the Vehicle Health Check is the transfer of service data to the Customer Assistance Center. If a service is due, the display shows a message to this effect together with information about any special offers at your workshop. This information can also be called up under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. Information on the data stored in the vehicle (Y page 29). Information on Roadside Assistance (Y page 26). Downloading routes Downloading routes allows you to transfer and save predefined routes in the navigation system. A route can be prepared and sent by either a customer service representative or under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. Each route can include up to four intermediate destinations. Once a route has been received by the navigation system, you will see the Do you want to start route guidance? Destination Received destination has been saved in "Previous destinations". message on the multimedia system display. The route is saved. X To start route guidance: select Yes Yes. An overview of the route is shown in the display. If you select No, No the saved route can be called up later in the navigation menu. X Select Start. Start Route guidance starts. Downloaded and saved routes can be called up again. Speed alert You can define the upper speed limit, which must not be exceeded by the vehicle. If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle, a message will be sent to the Customer Assistance Center. The Customer Assistance Center then forwards this information to you. You can select the way in which you receive this information beforehand. Possible options include text message, e-mail or an automated call. The data you receive contains the following information: Rthe location where the speed limit was exceeded Rthe time at which the speed limit was exceeded Rthe selected speed limit which was exceeded Geo fencing Geo fencing allows you to select areas which the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will be informed if the vehicle crosses the boundaries of the selected areas. You can select the way in which you receive this information beforehand. Possible options include text message, e-mail or an automated call. The area can be determined as either a circle or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners. You can specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Different settings are possible for each area. These settings can be called up under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call and inform the customer service representative that you wish to activate geo fencing. Features Triggering the vehicle alarm With this function, you can trigger the vehicle's panic alarm via text message. An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting flashes. Depending on the setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off. Garage door opener General notes The HomeLink® garage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up to three different door and gate systems. Use the integrated garage door opener only on garage doors that: Rhave safety stop and reverse features and Rmeet current U.S. federal safety standards Once programed, the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the function of the garage door system's remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. When programming a garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Do not leave the engine running while programming. Certain garage door drives are incompatible with the integrated garage door opener. If you have difficulty programing the integrated garage door opener, contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Center. Alternatively, you can call the following telephone assistance services: RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes RCanada: Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of charge) More information on HomeLink® and/or compatible products is also available online at http://www.homelink.com. Notes on the declaration of conformity (Y page 27). USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4 Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4 Important safety notes G WARNING When you operate or program the door with the integrated garage door opener, persons in the range of movement of the door may become trapped or be struck by the door. There is a risk of injury. When using the integrated garage door opener, always make sure that nobody is within the range of movement of the door. G DANGER Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and can result in poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore, never leave the engine running in an enclosed space without adequate ventilation. Programming Programming the buttons Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 255). Garage door remote control A is not included with the integrated garage door opener. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). X Select one of buttons ; to ? to control the garage door drive. Z Stowage and features Currently inactive areas can be activated by text message. 255 Features 256 To start program mode: press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated garage door opener. The garage door opener is now in program mode. After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up yellow. Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon as button ;, = or ? is stored for the first time. If the selected button has already been programed, indicator lamp : will only light up yellow after ten seconds have elapsed. X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. X To program the remote control: point garage door remote control A towards buttons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at a distance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm). X Press and hold button B on remote control A until indicator lamp : lights up green. When indicator lamp : lights up green: programming is finished. When indicator lamp : flashes green: programming was successful. The next step is to synchronize the rolling code (Y page 256). X Release button B on remote control A for the garage door drive system. If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the programing procedure for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control A and the rear-view mirror. The required distance between remote control A and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts might be necessary. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. Stowage and features X Synchronizing the rolling code Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 255). If the garage door system uses a rolling code, you will also have to synchronize the garage door system with the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you will need to use the programming button on the door drive control panel. The programming button may be located in different places depending on the manufacturer. It is usually located on the door drive unit on the garage ceiling. Familiarize yourself with the garage door drive operating instructions, e.g. under "Program- ming additional remote controls", before carrying out the following steps. Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage door or gate opener drive. Make sure that neither your vehicle nor any persons/objects are present within the sweep of the door or gate. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). X Get out of the vehicle. X Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate the next step. X Get into the vehicle. X Press previously programed button ;, = or ? on the integrated garage door opener repeatedly and in quick succession until the door closes. The rolling code synchronization is then complete. Notes on programming the remote control Canadian radio frequency laws require a "break" (or interruption) of the transmission signals after broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore, these signals may not last long enough for the integrated garage door opener. The signal is not detected during programming. Comparable with Canadian law, some U.S. garage door openers also feature a "break". Proceed as follows: Rif you live in Canada Rif you have difficulties programming the garage door opener (regardless of where you live) as you follow the programming steps. X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated garage door opener. After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up yellow. X Release the button. Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. X Press button B of garage door remote control A for two seconds, then release it for two seconds. X Press button B again for two seconds. X Repeat this sequence on button B of remote control A until indicator lamp : lights up green. When indicator lamp : lights up green: programming is finished. Features Problems when programming If you are experiencing problems programming the integrated garage door opener on the rearview mirror, take note of the following instructions: RCheck the transmitter frequency used by garage door drive remote control A and whether it is supported. The transmitter frequency can usually be found on the back of remote control A for the garage door drive. The integrated garage door opener is compatible with devices that have units which operate in the frequency range of 280 to 433 MHz. RReplace the batteries in garage door remote control A. This increases the likelihood that garage door remote control A will transmit a strong and precise signal to the integrated garage door opener. RWhen programming, hold remote control A at varying distances and angles from buttons ; to ? which you are programming. Try various angles at a distance between 2and 8 inches (5to 20 cm) or at the same angle but at varying distances. RIf another remote control A is available for the same garage door drive, repeat the same programming steps with this remote control A. Before performing these steps, make sure that new batteries have been installed in garage door drive remote control A. RNote that some remote controls only transmit for a limited amount of time (the indicator lamp on the remote control goes out). Press button B on remote control A again before transmission ends. RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door opener unit. This can improve signal reception/transmission. Opening/closing the garage door After it has been programmed, the integrated garage door opener performs the function of the garage door system remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). X Press button ;, = or ? which you have programmed to operate the garage door. Garage door system with a fixed code: indicator lamp : lights up green. Garage door system with a rolling code: indicator lamp : flashes green. The transmitter will transmit a signal as long as the button is pressed. The transmission is halted after a maximum of ten seconds and indicator lamp : lights up yellow. X Press button ;, = or ? again if necessary. Clearing the memory Make sure that you clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener before selling the vehicle. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). X Press and hold buttons ; and ?. The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow and then green. X Release buttons ; and ?. The memory of the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared. Z Stowage and features When indicator lamp : flashes green: programming was successful. The next step is to synchronize the rolling code. X Release button B of remote control A of the garage door drive. If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the programming process for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control A and the rear-view mirror. The required distance between remote control A and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts might be necessary. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. 257 Features 258 Compass Calling up the compass Calibrating the compass Notes In order to calibrate the compass correctly, do the following: Rcalibrate the compass in the open and not in the vicinity of steel structures or high-voltage transmission lines. Rswitch off electrical consumers such as the climate control, windshield wipers or rear window defroster. Rclose all doors and the trunk lid. Stowage and features Calibrating : Rear view mirror ; Compass display = Opening The compass displays in which compass direcNE, E, tion the vehicle is currently traveling: N, NE SE, SE S, SW, SW W or NW NW. To receive a correct compass display reading, the magnetic field zone must be set and the compass calibrated. Setting the compass Set your location using the magnetic field zone maps (Y page 258). X Push a round pen into opening = for approximately three seconds. The magnetic field zone currently selected appears in compass display ;. X To select the magnetic field zone: push a round pen into opening = until the desired magnetic field zone is selected. If, after a few seconds, the display in compass display ; changes direction, the magnetic field zone has been selected. X Make sure that there is sufficient space for you to drive in a circle without impeding traffic. X Switch on the ignition. X Push a round pin into opening = for approximately six seconds, until symbol C is shown in compass display ;. X Drive your vehicle in a full circle at approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) to 6 mph (10 km/h). When the calibration has been successfully completed, the current direction is shown in compass display ;. X Magnetic field zone maps North America Features Press safety catch knobs : onto retainers ;. X To remove: pull the floormat off retainers ;. X Remove the floormat. X Stowage and features South America Floormats G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another. X X 259 Slide the seat back. To install: place the floormat in the footwell. Z 260 Engine compartment Engine compartment Hood Important safety notes G WARNING Maintenance and care If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view. There is a risk of an accident. Never unlatch the hood while driving. Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked. G WARNING When opening and closing the hood, it may suddenly fall into the closed position. There is a risk of injury to persons within range of movement of the hood. Open and close the hood only when no one is within its range of movement. G WARNING Opening the hood when the engine is overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury. Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department. G WARNING The engine compartment contains moving components. Certain components, such as the radiator fan, may continue to run or start again suddenly when the ignition is off. There is a risk of injury. If you need to do any work inside the engine compartment: Rswitch off the ignition reach into the area where there is a risk of danger from moving components, such as the fan rotation area Rnever Rremove jewelry and watches items of clothing and hair, for example, away from moving parts Rkeep G WARNING The ignition system and the fuel injection system work under high voltage. If you touch components which are under voltage, you could get an electric shock. There is a risk of injury. Never touch components of the ignition system or fuel injection system when the ignition is switched on. To ensure the flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes (Y page 121): Opening the hood G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. G WARNING When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood. ! Make sure that the windshield wipers are not folded away from the windshield. You could otherwise damage the windshield wipers or the hood. Engine compartment 261 Closing the hood Raise the hood slightly and, at the same time, remove support strut ? from yellow retaining clip =. X Swing support strut ? down and press it into bracket A until it engages. X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of approximately 8 in (20 cm). X Check that the hood has engaged properly. If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Do not press the hood closed. Open the hood again and close it with a little more force. X Engine oil General notes Reach into the gap between the hood and the radiator trim and press hood catch lever ; to the left. X Raise the hood. X Depending on your driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per 600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be in a different location. When checking the oil level: Rpark the vehicle on a level surface Rthe engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature Rif the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly, wait about 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick X X Pull support strut ? out of bracket A. Lift up support strut ? and insert it into yellow retaining clip =. G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. Z Maintenance and care Make sure that the windshield wipers are switched off. X Pull release lever : on the hood. The hood is released. X Engine compartment 262 G WARNING Functions relevant to safety are restricted or no longer available if: Rthe engine is not running brake system or the power steering is malfunctioning Rthere is a malfunction in the power supply or the vehicle's electrical system When your vehicle is towed away or towed started, you may require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. In such cases, use a tow bar. Before being towed away or tow started, make sure the steering moves freely. Maintenance and care Rthe Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. G WARNING If engine oil comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and thoroughly clean the engine oil off the components before starting the engine. H Environmental note When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment. ! Use only engine oils and oil filters that are Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide tube. X Wipe off oil dipstick :. X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube to the stop, and take it out again. If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct. X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) engine oil. X Adding engine oil G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. approved for vehicles with a service system. A list of the engine oils and oil filters that have been tested and approved in accordance with Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products is available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The following cause engine failure or damage to the exhaust system: RUse of engine oils and oil filters that have not been expressly approved for the service system RReplacement of engine oil and oil filter after the replacement interval specified by the service system has expired RUse of engine oil additives ! Do not add too much oil. adding too much engine oil can result in damage to the engine or to the catalytic converter. Have excess engine oil siphoned off. Engine compartment Checking and adding other service products Checking coolant level G WARNING The cooling system is pressurized, particularly when the motor is warm. If you open the cap, you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out. There is a risk of injury. Let the engine cool down before you open the cap. Wear protective gloves and protective eyewear when opening. Open the cap slowly to release pressure. ! The coolant level must only be checked and corrected when the engine has cooled down (coolant temperature under 104 ‡ (40 †). Checking the coolant level when the coolant temperature is over 104 ‡ (40 †) can lead to damage to the engine or the engine cooling system. Park the vehicle on a level surface. Only check the coolant level when the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). X Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be below 104 ‡ (40 †). X Turn the SmartKey to position g (Y page 123) in the ignition lock . X Slowly turn cap : counter-clockwise and to relieve excess pressure. X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and remove it. If the coolant is at the level of marker bar = in the filler neck when cold, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. X If necessary, add coolant that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as it will go. For further information on coolant, see (Y page 323). X Windshield washer system G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. Z Maintenance and care Example: engine oil cap Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove it. X Add engine oil. If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil. X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn clockwise. Ensure that the cap locks into place securely. X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick (Y page 261). Further information on engine oil (Y page 322). X 263 ASSYST PLUS 264 G WARNING Maintenance and care Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck. To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab. Add the premixed washer fluid. X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck until it engages. If the washer fluid level drops below the recommended minimum of 1 liter, a message appears in the multifunction display prompting you to add washer fluid (Y page 218). Further information on windshield washer fluid/ antifreeze (Y page 323). X X The multifunction display shows a service message for several seconds, e.g.: RService A in .. days A due RService A overdue by .. days Depending on the operating conditions of the vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the next service due date is displayed. The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a number or another letter, indicates the type of service. A stands for a minor service and B for a major service. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not take into account any periods of time during which the battery is disconnected. Maintaining the time-dependent service schedule: X Note down the service due date displayed in the multifunction display before disconnecting the battery. or X After reconnecting the battery, subtract the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display. RService Hiding a service message X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel. ASSYST PLUS Service message The ASSYST PLUS service interval display informs you of the next service due date. You can find information on the type of service and service intervals in the Maintenance Booklet. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not show any information on the engine oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil level (Y page 261). Displaying service messages Switch on the ignition. Press the = or ; button to select the Serv. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by pressing the a button. The service due date appears in the multifunction display. X X Care Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service interval display ! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display has been inadvertently reset, this setting can be corrected at a qualified specialist workshop. Have service work carried out as described in the Maintenance Booklet. This may otherwise lead to increased wear and damage to the major assemblies or the vehicle. A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset the ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the service work has been carried out. You can also obtain further information on maintenance work, for example. Special service requirements The specified maintenance interval takes only the normal operation of the vehicle into account. Under arduous operating conditions or increased load on the vehicle, maintenance work must be carried out more frequently, for example: Rregular city driving with frequent intermediate stops Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel short distances Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces Rif the engine is often left idling for long periods Rin particularly dusty conditions, or if air-recirculation mode is frequently used In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior filter, engine air cleaner, engine oil and oil filter, for example, changed more frequently. Under arduous operating conditions, the tires must be checked more often. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized MercedesBenz Center. Driving abroad An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. You can obtain further information from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Care General notes H Environmental note Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsible manner. ! When cleaning your car, do not use: Rdry, coarse or hard cloths cleaning agents Rsolvents Rcleaning agents containing solvents Do not scrub. Do not touch the surfaces and films with hard objects, e.g. rings or ice scrapers. Otherwise, you may scratch or damage the surfaces and films. Rabrasive ! Do not park your vehicle for a long period of time directly after cleaning, particularly after cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased corrosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore, drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By heating up the brakes, the brake discs and pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a long period of time. Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for retaining the quality in the long term. Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Washing the vehicle and cleaning the paintwork Automatic car wash G WARNING Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until full braking power is restored. ! When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. Z Maintenance and care Information about Service 265 266 Care To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the HOLD function in the following or similar situations: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash ! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless Automatic Car Wash as these use special cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can damage the paintwork or plastic parts. ! Make sure that the automatic transmission is in transmission position i when washing your vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehicle may be damaged in another transmission position. Maintenance and care ! Make sure that: Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof are fully closed Rthe blower is switched off Rthe windshield wiper switch is at position u The vehicle may otherwise be damaged. You can clean the vehicle at an automatic car wash from the very start. Preferably clean the vehicle at automatic car washes that use textile washing elements without brushes. This will prevent fine scratches to the paintwork or decorative films. If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before cleaning it in an automatic car wash. After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax from the windshield and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windshield. i Vehicles with decorative film: select a wash program without hot wax at the automatic car wash. Washing by hand In some countries, washing by hand is only allowed at specially equipped washing bays. Observe the legal requirements in each country. X Do not use hot water and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. X Use a soft sponge to clean. X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz. Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gentle jet of water. X Do not point the water jet directly towards the air inlet or the edges of decorative foils. X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge frequently. X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry thoroughly with a chamois. X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paintwork or the decorative foils. Carefully remove all deposits of road salt as soon as possible when driving in winter. X Power washers G WARNING The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components. Components damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tires or chassis components replaced immediately. ! Vehicles with decorative film: parts of your vehicle are covered with decorative film. Maintain a distance of at least 27.5 in (70 cm) between the film-covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Move the power washer nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. The water temperature of the power washer must not exceed 140 ‡ (60 †). ! Always maintain a distance of at least 12 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Move the power washer nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Do not aim directly at any of the following: RTires RDoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc. RElectrical components RBattery Care RSeals couplings bulbs RTrim elements RVentilation slots Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures. Cleaning the paintwork ! Do not affix: Rstickers Rfilms Rmagnetic plates or similar items to painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Remove dirt immediately, where possible, while avoiding rubbing too hard. X Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Remove tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid X Remove coolant and brake fluid with a moist cloth and clear water. X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. X Use silicone remover to remove wax. If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint surface, use the paint care products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the case approximately every three to five months, depending on the climate conditions and the care product used. If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if the paint has become dull, the paint cleaner recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz should be used. Do not use these care products in the sun or on the hood while the hood is hot. X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB TouchUp Stick, to repair slight damage to the paintwork quickly and provisionally. Matte finish care ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine. ! The following can give the paint a glossy appearance and thus reduce the matt effect: RRubbing hard with unsuitable agents RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax, for the purpose of paintwork care. These products are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with matte paintwork leads to considerable surface damage or, more specifically, to shiny, spotted areas. Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Only use automatic car washes which cor- respond to the latest technological standards. Never use wash programs which finish by treating the vehicle with hot wax. Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear matte finish. This will help you to avoid damage to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment. These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with a clear matte finish. Use only insect remover and car shampoo from the range of care products approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning the decorative film ! The following may have an effect on the service life and color of decorative film: Rsunlight Rtemperature, e.g. hot-air fan Rweather conditions Rstone impacts and dirt Rchemical cleaning agents Rgreasy substances ! Do not use any types of polish on matt decorative film. Polishing surfaces covered with film gives it a shiny finish. ! Do not treat matt or structured decorative film with wax. This may lead to marks that cannot be removed. Observe the notes in the section on the care and treatment of matte paintwork (Y page 267), these notes also apply to matte decorative film. Z Maintenance and care RPlug-type RLight 267 Maintenance and care 268 Care To clean, use plenty of water and a mild cleaning agent without additional or abrasive products, e.g. use a car shampoo approved for MercedesBenz. X Dry vehicles covered with film using a soft, absorbent cloth after every wash. Water marks could otherwise form. Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Remove dirt immediately, where possible, while avoiding rubbing too hard. The decorative film may be irreparably damaged. X Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. The Paint Cleaner cleaning product, which has been approved and recommended by Mercedes-Benz, should be used when dirt has penetrated the decorative film surface or the decorative film has become dull. The manufacturer can provide you with information on special care and cleaning products. Laminated surfaces may exhibit optical differences to surfaces which were not protected by a decorative film when the decorative film is removed. i Have work or repairs on decorative film carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. Cleaning the vehicle parts Cleaning the wheels G WARNING The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components. Components damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tires or chassis components replaced immediately. ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. ! Do not park your vehicle for a long period of time directly after cleaning, particularly after cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased corrosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore, drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By heating up the brakes, the brake discs and pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a long period of time. Cleaning the windows G WARNING You could become trapped by the windshield wipers if they start moving while cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. ! Only fold the windshield wipers away from the windshield when vertical. Otherwise, you will damage the hood. ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, solvents or cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the inside of the windows. Do not touch the insides of the windows with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows. ! Clean the water drainage channels of the windshield and the rear window at regular intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain circumstances prevent water from draining away. This can lead to corrosion damage and damage to electronic components. X Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning product that is recommended and approved by MercedesBenz. Care Cleaning wiper blades G WARNING You could become trapped by the windshield wipers if they start moving while cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. X 269 Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths. Cleaning the sensors ! If you clean the sensors with a power washer, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. ! Only fold the windshield wipers away from the windshield when vertical. Otherwise, you will damage the hood. ! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper blade could be damaged. Maintenance and care ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graphite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise. ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windshield could be damaged if the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly. X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the windshield. X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth. X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again before switching on the ignition. Cleaning the exterior lighting ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths which are suitable for plastic light lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic light lenses. X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lights with a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths. X Clean sensors : of the driving systems with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. Cleaning the rear view camera ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the rear view camera with a power washer. Cleaning the mirror turn signals ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals. Z Care 270 Make sure that the vehicle is at a standstill and the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Open the camera cover for cleaning via the multimedia system (see Digital Operator's Manual). X To clean the rear view camera: use clear water and a soft cloth to clean camera lens :. X Maintenance and care Cleaning the exhaust pipes G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. There is a risk of injury. Always be particularly careful around the exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow these components to cool down before touching them. ! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acidbased cleaning agents, such as bathroom cleaner or wheel cleaner. ! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with black exhaust pipes: the black-chrome tailpipe finishers should not be polished with a chrome polish. They will otherwise lose their black sheen. For optimal care, the faceplates should be rubbed with a lightly oiled cloth after every car wash. Commercially available engine and care oils are suitable for this. For heavier soiling, you can apply a fine paintwork polish with a microfiber cloth. Remove the excess polish residue after polishing. Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing. X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Interior care Cleaning the display ! For cleaning, do not use any of the following: Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline cleaning agents Rcommercially-available household cleaning agents These may damage the display surface. Do not put pressure on the display surface when cleaning. This could lead to irreparable damage to the display. X Before cleaning the display, make sure that it is switched off and has cooled down. X Clean the display surface using a commercially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD display cleaner. X Dry the display surface using a dry microfiber cloth. Rabrasive Cleaning the plastic trim G WARNING Care products and cleaning agents containing solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. As a result, plastic parts may come loose in the event of air bag deployment. There is a risk of injury. Do not use any care products and cleaning agents to clean the cockpit. ! Never attach the following to plastic surfaces: Rstickers Rfilms Rperfume oil container or similar You could otherwise damage the plastic. ! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sunscreen to come into contact with the plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of the surfaces. X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth. X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. The surface may change color temporarily. Wait until the surface is dry again. Care X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use leather care agents that have been recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning genuine wood and trim elements ! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the surface. ! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces. The trim pieces have a chrome look but are mostly made of anodized aluminum and can lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning the trim pieces. If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you are unsure as to whether the trim pieces are chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth. X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning the seat covers General notes ! Do not use a microfiber cloth to clean covers made out of real leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA. If used often, these can damage the cover. Note that regular care is essential to ensure that the appearance and comfort of the covers is retained over time. Genuine leather seat covers ! To retain the natural appearance of the leather, observe the following cleaning instructions: RClean genuine leather covers carefully with a damp cloth and then wipe the covers down with a dry cloth. RMake sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise become rough and cracked. ROnly use leather care agents that have been tested and approved by MercedesBenz. You can obtain these from a qualified specialist workshop. Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for example: Rdifferences in the texture Rmarks caused by growth and injury Rslight nuances of color These are characteristics of leather and not material defects. Seat covers of other materials ! Observe the following when cleaning: Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub carefully and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there. Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Cleaning the seat belts G WARNING Seat belts can become severely weakened if bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or fatal injury. Never bleach or dye the seat belts. Z Maintenance and care Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or selector lever 271 Care 272 ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by heating at temperatures above 176 ‡ (80 †) or in direct sunlight. X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution. Cleaning the headliner and carpets Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or dry shampoo. X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Maintenance and care X Where will I find...? Where will I find...? 273 Information on reflective safety jackets Reflective safety jacket The reflective safety jackets are located in front door stowage compartments :. Reflective safety jackets can also be stored in the rear door stowage compartments. X To remove: pull out the safety jacket bag containing the reflective safety jacket. X Open the safety jacket bag and pull out the reflective safety jacket. X To stow: fold the reflective safety jacket, roll it up and stow it in the safety jacket bag. X Replace the safety jacket bag into stowage compartment :. i Remove a new reflective safety jacket from its packaging material before sliding it into the stowage compartment. The packaging material may otherwise cause it to slip out or make removing it difficult. Observe the legal requirements in each country. : ; = ? A B C Maximum number of washes Maximum wash temperature Do not bleach Do not iron Do not use a laundry dryer Do not dry-clean This is a class 2 vest RThe reflective safety jackets meet the require- ments defined by the legal standard only: - if the correct size is used and - if the reflective safety jackets are correctly fastened RBefore use, ensure that the reflective safety jackets are clean and intact. The special properties may otherwise be compromised. RThe reflective safety jackets should be stored in their original packaging in a dry place away from sources of heat and light. RThe maximum number of washes specified is not the only factor influencing the life span of the reflective safety jackets. Their life span also depends on use, care, storage, etc. RThe reflective safety jackets should be disposed of and replaced with new ones: - after 15 washes, and/or - if the reflective strips have become scratched, and/or - if the backing material and/or reflective strips have become soiled and cannot be cleaned off, and/or - if the fluorescence has faded e.g. due to the effects of sunlight RDispose of reflective safety jackets in an environmentally responsible manner. To do so, contact your local waste disposal company. Breakdown assistance Removing/replacing the reflective safety jacket Flat tire 274 Vehicle tool kit Breakdown assistance General notes Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: the TIREFIT kit is located in the stowage well under the trunk floor. Vehicles with a tire-change tool kit: the tirechange tool kit is in the stowage well under the trunk floor. Apart from certain country-specific variations, the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more information on which tire changing tools are required and approved to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Tools required for changing a wheel may include, for example: RJack RWheel chock RLug wrench RAlignment bolt Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit : Tire inflation compressor ; Tire sealant filler bottle = Towing eye Open the trunk lid. Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 243). X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 276) or remove it. Towing eye = is located under tire inflation compressor :. X X i Example: equipment and country-specific variations possible. Vehicles with a tire-change tool kit Open the trunk lid. Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 243). X Remove the tire-change tool kit. The tire-change tool kit contains: RJack RLug wrench RPair of gloves RFolding wheel chock X X Flat tire Preparing the vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with: RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) (Y page 275) Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tires. Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 274) Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Information on changing and mounting wheels (Y page 310). X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground, as far away as possible from traffic. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 142). X If possible, bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position. X Switch off the engine. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The vehicle electronics are now in position g. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 123). Make sure that the engine cannot be started via your smartphone (Y page 124). X Make sure that the passengers are not endangered as they do so. Make sure that no one is near the danger area while a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier. X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions when doing so. X Close the driver's door. X MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) General notes With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. The affected tire must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognize a MOExtended tire by the MOExtended marking which appears on the sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking next to the tire size designation, the load-bearing capacity and the speed index (Y page 305). MOExtended tires may be used only in conjunction with an activated tire pressure loss warning system (Canada only) or tire pressure monitor (USA only). If a pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display: Robserve the instructions sages (Y page 213). Rcheck in the display mes- the tire for damage driving on, observe the following notes The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehicle is partially laden. When the vehicle is fully laden it is approximately 19 miles (30 km). In addition to the vehicle load, the driving distance possible depends upon: Rvehicle speed Rroad condition Routside temperature The driving distance possible in run-flat mode may be reduced by extreme driving conditions or maneuvers, or it can be increased through a moderate style of driving. Rif The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is counted from the moment the tire pressure loss warning appears in the multifunction display. You must not exceed a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). When replacing one or all tires, please observe the following specifications for your vehicle's tires: Rsize Rtype and Rthe "MOExtended" marking If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced with a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may be used as a temporary measure. Make sure that you use the proper size and type (summer or winter tire). Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Important safety notes G WARNING When driving in emergency mode, the driving characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when cornering, accelerating quickly and when braking. There is a risk of an accident. Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers, and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes, off-road). This applies in particular to a laden vehicle. Stop driving in emergency mode if: Ryou hear banging noises. Rthe vehicle starts to shake. Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. RESP® is intervening constantly. are tears in the sidewalls of the tire. After driving in emergency mode, have the wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist workshop with regard to their further use. The defective tire must be replaced in every case. Rthere Z 275 Breakdown assistance Flat tire 276 Flat tire TIREFIT kit ! Residue from the tire sealant may come out of the filler hose after use. This could cause stains. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic bag which contained the TIREFIT kit. Important safety notes TIREFIT is a tire sealant. For USA only: You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †). G WARNING In the following situations, the tire sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assistance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly: Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger than those mentioned above. wheel rim is damaged. Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or on a flat tire. There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. Breakdown assistance Rthe G WARNING The tire sealant is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away from children. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following: RRinse off the tire sealant from your skin immediately with water. RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, and seek medical attention immediately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tire sealant. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. H Environmental note Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor for longer than ten minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tire inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down. Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instructions on the sticker on the tire inflation compressor. Using the TIREFIT kit Do not remove any foreign objects which have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails. X USA only: Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompanying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflation compressor from the stowage space under the trunk floor (Y page 274). X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision. X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tire. X Flat tire Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty tire. X Screw filler hose D onto valve C. X Insert plug = into a 12 V socket in your vehicle. Observe the notes on sockets (Y page 247). X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). X Press on and off switch ? on the tire inflation compressor to ON. The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated. First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The pressure can briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). X Do not switch off the tire inflation compressor during this phase. X Let the tire inflation compressor run for a maximum of ten minutes. The tire should then have attained a pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi). If a pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pressure reached" (Y page 278). If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pressure not reached" (Y page 277). If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affected areas as quickly as possible. Use plain water if possible. If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, have them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry cleaner as soon as possible. Tire pressure not reached If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained after ten minutes: X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire. Note that tire sealant may escape when you unscrew the filler hose. X USA only: very slowly drive forwards or reverse approximately 30 ft (10 m). X Pump up the tire again. After a maximum of ten minutes, the tire pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi). G WARNING If the required tire pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. Z Breakdown assistance Remove filler hose B and connector = from the bottom section of the tire inflation compressor housing ;. X Slide the yellow filler hose connector into the mounting on yellow cap A of tire sealant filler bottle : until the connector engages. X With the sealing rings in front, slide yellow cap A of tire sealant bottle : into the mounting of tire inflation compressor ;. Yellow cap A and both hooks must engage. X 277 Flat tire 278 Tire pressure reached Breakdown assistance G WARNING A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs the driving characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed the specified maximum speed with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant. USA only: The maximum permissible speed for a tire sealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the instrument cluster in the driver's field of vision. If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained after ten minutes: X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire. Note that tire sealant may escape when you unscrew the filler hose. USA only: Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire inflation compressor. X Pull away immediately. X Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tire pressure with the tire inflation compressor. The tire pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). X USA only: Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's side B-pillar or the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap for values. X To increase the tire pressure: switch on the tire inflation compressor. X To reduce the tire pressure: depress pressure release button : next to pressure gauge ;. X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the sealed tire. Note that tire sealant may escape when you unscrew the filler hose. X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of the sealed tire. X G WARNING If the required tire pressure is not reached after driving for a short period, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. i USA only: In cases such as the one mentioned above, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). To remove the tire sealant bottle from the tire inflation compressor, press together the locking tabs on the yellow cap. X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire inflation compressor. The filler hose remains attached to the tire sealant bottle. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tire changed there. X Battery (vehicle) Battery (vehicle) Important safety notes Special tools and expert knowledge are required when working on the battery, e.g. removal and installation. You should therefore have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can lead, for example, to a short circuit and thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can lead to function restrictions applying to safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting system, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You could lose control of the vehicle, for example: Rwhen braking the event of abrupt steering maneuvers and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions There is a risk of an accident. In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Do not drive any further. You should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Rin For further information about ABS and ESP®, see (Y page 61) and (Y page 64). G WARNING Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation of sparks, which could ignite the highly explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle body to remove any existing electrostatic build-up. The highly flammable gas mixture forms when charging the battery as well as when jump-starting. Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of electrostatic charge can be caused, for example: Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic fibers Rdue to friction between clothing and seats Rif you push or pull the battery across the carpet or other synthetic materials Rif you rub the battery with a cloth G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with Z Breakdown assistance Have the tire sealant bottle and the filler hose replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop. X 279 280 Battery (vehicle) plenty of clean water and seek medical attention. Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries. Risk of explosion. H Environmental note Breakdown assistance Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and disposed of in an environmentally responsible recycling system. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. ! Have the battery regularly checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Comply with the service intervals in the Maintenance Booklet, or contact a qualified specialist workshop for more information. Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, especially gloves, apron and faceguard. Rinse any acid spills immediately with clear water. Contact a physician if necessary. Wear eye protection. Keep children away. Observe this Operator's Manual. ! You should have all work involving the bat- tery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. In the exceptional case that it is necessary for you to disconnect the battery yourself, make sure that: Rswitch off the engine and remove the SmartKey. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure that the ignition is switched off. Check that all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster are off. Otherwise, electronic components, such as the alternator, may be damaged. Ryou first remove the negative terminal clamp and then the positive terminal clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic system may be damaged. Rin vehicles with automatic transmission, the transmission is locked in position j after the battery is disconnected. The vehicle is secured against rolling away. You can then no longer move the vehicle. The battery and the cover of the positive terminal clamp must be installed securely during operation. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in the event of an accident. In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged. Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle. In this case, have the battery disconnected at a qualified specialist workshop. You can also charge the battery with a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for further information. Have the battery condition of charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle parked for a long period of time. Only replace a battery with a battery that has been recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle and do not require any electrical consumers. The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus conserving battery power. If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you will have to: Rset the clock using the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual) Rreset the function for folding the exterior mirrors in/out automatically, by folding the mirrors out once (Y page 98) Charging the battery G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention. G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. ! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. ! Only charge the battery using the jumpstarting connection point. The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment (Y page 282). X Open the hood. X Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and ground point in the same order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure (Y page 282). If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up in the instrument cluster at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Only charge the installed battery with a battery charger which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery charger unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an accessory. It permits the charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information and availability. Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery. Replacing the 12 V battery Observe the notes on the 12 V battery (Y page 279). Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the 12 V battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If you want to replace the battery yourself, observe the following notes: RAlways replace a defective battery with a battery which meets the specific requirements of the vehicle. The vehicle is equipped with a battery using AGM (absorbent glass mat) technology or a battery using EFB (enhanced flooded battery) technology. Full vehicle functionality is guaranteed only with an AGM or EFB battery. If replacement is necessary, always use the battery technology originally installed. Switching between the battery technologies is not permitted. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries Z 281 Breakdown assistance Battery (vehicle) 282 Jump-starting which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. RUse detachable parts such as breather hoses, angled connecting pieces or terminal covers from the battery which is to be replaced. RMake sure that the vent hose is always connected to the original opening on the battery side. RInstall existing or supplied cell caps; otherwise gases or battery acid could escape. RMake sure that the detachable parts are connected again in the same way. Jump-starting For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment. Breakdown assistance G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention. G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. ! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by the non-combusted fuel. If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up in the instrument cluster at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. Let the battery thaw first. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables. Observe the following points: RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jumpstart the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device. RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold. RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating. ROnly use jumper cables that are not damaged and have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch. Make sure that: RThe jumper cables are not damaged. RNon-insulated parts of the terminal clamps do not come into contact with other metal parts while the jumper cables are connected to the battery. RThe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts that can move when the engine is running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan. X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position j. X Turn the SmartKey to position g in the ignition lock and remove it. X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc. X Open the hood. Z 283 Breakdown assistance Jump-starting 284 Towing and tow-starting Breakdown assistance Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting device. X Press together cover : of positive clamp ; and slide it back. X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using the jumper cable, beginning with your own battery. X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicle B first. X If the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly. X Start the engine. X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes. X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point A and negative terminal ?, then from positive terminal ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first. X Close cover : of positive terminal ; after removing the jumper cables. X Close the hood. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition. i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. Towing and tow-starting Important safety notes G WARNING Functions relevant to safety are restricted or no longer available if: Rthe engine is not running brake system or the power steering is malfunctioning Rthere is a malfunction in the power supply or the vehicle's electrical system When your vehicle is towed away or towed started, you may require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. In such cases, use a tow bar. Before being towed away or tow started, make sure the steering moves freely. Rthe G WARNING You can no longer steer the vehicle if the steering wheel lock has been engaged. There is a risk of an accident. Always switch off the ignition when towing the vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar. G WARNING When towing or tow-starting another vehicle and its weight is greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle, the: Rthe towing eye could detach itself vehicle/trailer combination could rollover. There is a risk of an accident. When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, its weight should not be greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle. Rthe Details on the permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 318). ! When Active Brake Assist, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash ! Make sure that the electric parking brake is released. If the electric parking brake is faulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop. ! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. ! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery purposes as this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. ! When towing, pull away slowly and smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. Only tow the vehicle in exceptional cases. The battery must be connected and charged. Otherwise, you: Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. Rcannot release the electric parking brake. Rcannot shift the transmission to position i. The function of the electric parking brake and the parking lock is dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-board voltage is low or if there is a system malfunction: Rthe electric parking brake may not be applied in certain circumstances, or Rit may no longer be possible to shift the transmission to position j Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. the radio. Deactivate the automatic locking feature before the vehicle is towed (Y page 189). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle. ! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of 30 miles (50km). The towing speed of 30 mph (50km/h) must not be exceeded. If the vehicle has to be towed more than 30 miles (50km), the front axle must be raised or the entire vehicle raised and transported. Installing/removing the towing eye Installing the towing eye ! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This could damage the vehicle. ! When towing away vehicles with KEYLESS- GO, use the key instead of the Start/Stop button. The automatic transmission may otherwise shift to position j when you open the driver's or front-passenger door, which could damage the transmission. ! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be started by tow-starting. This could otherwise damage the transmission. It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed away. If the vehicle can no longer be driven because of an accident or breakdown, you have the following options: RTransporting the vehicle. As a rule, you should have the vehicle transported. RTowing the vehicle with a tow rope or tow bar. The brackets for the screw-in towing eye are located in the bumpers. They are at the rear and at the front, under covers :. X Remove the towing eye from the stowage space. Z 285 Breakdown assistance Towing and tow-starting Towing and tow-starting 286 The towing eye is located with the vehicle tool kit under the cargo compartment floor (Y page 274). Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: the towing eye is beneath the tire inflation compressor (Y page 274). X Press the mark on cover : inwards in the direction of the arrow. X Take cover : off the opening. X Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the stop. Removing the towing eye Unscrew and remove the towing eye. Attach cover : to the bumper and press until it engages. X Place the towing eye in the stowage well beneath the cargo compartment floor in the cargo compartment (Y page 274). X Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: put back the tire inflation compressor (Y page 274). X Breakdown assistance X Towing the vehicle with the front axle raised Observe the important safety notes when towing your vehicle with the front axle raised (Y page 284). Only vehicles without 4MATIC can be towed with the front axle raised. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission. Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed away with both axles on the ground or be loaded up and transported. ! The ignition must be switched off if the vehi- cle is being towed with the front axle raised. Otherwise, ESP® may intervene and damage the brake system. X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start function: you must use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button (Y page 124). X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. Shift the automatic transmission to position j. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the automatic locking (Y page 189). X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 103). X Turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position g and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock. X Towing a vehicle with both axles on the ground It is important that you observe the safety instructions when towing away your vehicle (Y page 284). X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start function: you must use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button (Y page 124). The automatic transmission automatically shifts to position j when you open the driver's or front-passenger door or when you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. In order to ensure that the automatic transmission stays in position i when towing away the vehicle, you must observe the following points: X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift the automatic transmission to position i. Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 103). X i In order to signal a change of direction when towing the vehicle with the hazard warning lamps switched on, use the combination switch as usual. In this case, only the indicator lamps for the direction of travel flash. After resetting the combination switch, the hazard warning lamp starts flashing again. Fuses Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than towing it away. When towing away, use a towing rope or a towing bar with both axles on the ground. Do not use any tow bar systems. Transporting the vehicle Vehicles with automatic transmission ! When the vehicle is loaded for transport, the front and rear axles must be stationary and on the same transportation vehicle. Positioning over the connection point of the transport vehicle is not permitted. The drive train may otherwise be damaged. Notes on 4MATIC vehicles ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission. Vehicles with 4MATIC may only either be towed away with both axles on the ground or be loaded up and transported. If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rear axle is damaged, have the vehicle transported on a truck or trailer. In the event of damage to the electrical system: If the battery is defective, the automatic transmission will be locked in position j. To shift the automatic transmission to position i, you must provide power to the vehicle's on-board electrical system in the same way as when jumpstarting (Y page 282). Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer. Tow-starting (emergency engine starting) ! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started. You could otherwise damage the automatic transmission. i You can find information on "Jump-starting" under (Y page 282). All vehicles ! You may only secure the vehicle by the wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). X Shift the transmission to position i. As soon as the vehicle has been loaded: Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the electric parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position j. X Turn the SmartKey to position g in the ignition lock and remove it. X Secure the vehicle. The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter for transporting purposes. X Fuses Important safety notes G WARNING If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric cables could be overloaded. This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always replace faulty fuses with the specified new fuses having the correct amperage. ! Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system concerned. Only use fuses marked with an "S". Other- Z Breakdown assistance Permitted towing methods 287 Fuses 288 wise, components or systems could be damaged. ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. Breakdown assistance ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions stop operating. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart. The fuse allocation chart is in the fuse box in the front-passenger footwell (Y page 289). If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Before changing a fuse Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 142). X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The vehicle electronics are now in position g. This corresponds to the SmartKey being removed from the ignition. The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: RFuse box in the engine compartment on the left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel RFuse box in the front-passenger footwell The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in the front-passenger footwell (Y page 289). X Fuse box in the engine compartment G WARNING When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood. Open the hood. Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture from the fuse box. X To open: open clamps ;. X Fold up cover : in the direction of the arrow and remove it. X X To close: check whether the seal is lying correctly in cover :. X Insert cover : at the back into openings = on the fuse box. X Fold down cover :. X Fuses 289 Remove cover = forwards. Fuse allocation chart ? is located on the lower right-hand side of cover =. X To close: insert cover = on the left-hand side of the fuse box into the retainer. Cover = engages in the retainers. X Fold down cover = until clamps ; lock audibly. X Fold back perforated floor covering :. X Install the floormats. X X X Hook clamps ; into the fuse box and close. Close the hood. Breakdown assistance Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell To open: open the front-passenger door. Remove the floormat. X Fold out perforated floor covering : in the direction of the arrow. X X To release cover =, press retaining clamp ;. X Fold out cover = in the direction of the arrow to the catch. X Z 290 Operation Important safety notes G WARNING If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, the wheel brakes or suspension components may be damaged. There is a risk of an accident. Always replace wheels and tires with those that fulfill the specifications of the original part. When replacing wheels, make sure to use the correct: Rdesignation Rmodel Operation When replacing tires, make sure to use the correct: Information on driving Rdesignation Rmanufacturer Rmodel Wheels and tires Further information regarding wheels and tires can be found under "Wheel/tire combinations" (Y page 315). You can ask for information regarding permitted wheel/tire combinations at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Information on tire pressure can be found: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 301) Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap (Y page 141) Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 293) G WARNING A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steering and braking characteristics of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Tires without run-flat characteristics: Rdo not drive with a flat tire. replace the flat tire with your emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or consult a qualified specialist workshop. Tires with run-flat characteristics: Rimmediately Rpay attention to the information and warning notices on MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics). Accessories that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used correctly can impair the operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and inquire about: Rsuitability Rlegal stipulations Rfactory recommendations Check the tire pressure when the vehicle is heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip. While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that a tire is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden tire damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. When parking your vehicle, make sure that the tires do not get deformed by the curb or other obstacles. If they cannot be avoided, drive over obstacles such as curbs slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tires. Regular checking of wheels and tires G WARNING Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately. Operation Notes on tire tread G WARNING Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction. The tire is no longer able to dissipate water. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk of hydroplaning increases, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the driving conditions. There is a risk of accident. If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires may exhibit different levels of wear at different locations on the tire tread. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires. Minimum tire tread depth for: RSummer tires: â in (3 mm) tires: ã in (4 mm) For safety reasons, replace the tires before the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tire tread depth is reached. RM+S Marking : shows where bar indicator ; for tread wear is integrated into the tire tread. Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread. They are visible once a tread depth of approximately á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. If this is the case, the tire is so worn that it must be replaced. Selecting, mounting and replacing tires G WARNING Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There is a risk of accident. Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same type and make. Exception: it is permissible to install a different type or make in the event of a flat tire. Observe here the "MOExtended tires (tires Z Wheels and tires Check wheels and tires for damage at least once a month. Check wheels and tires after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particular attention to damage such as: RCuts in the tires RPunctures in the tires RTears in the tires RBulges on tires RDeformation or severe corrosion on wheels Regularly check the tire tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tire (Y page 291). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tire surface. All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems. Regularly check the pressure of all the tires particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pressure as necessary (Y page 293). Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel (Y page 315). The service life of tires depends, among other things, on the following factors: RDriving style RTire pressure RDistance covered 291 292 Winter operation with run-flat characteristics)" section (Y page 275). ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the wheels. RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for the first 60 miles (100 km). The new tires only reach their full performance after this distance. RDo not drive with tires which have too little tread depth, as this significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). RReplace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel (Y page 315). Wheels and tires MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an activated tire pressure loss warning system (Canada only) or tire pressure monitor (USA only) and only on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz. Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with a flat tire (Y page 275). Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Winter operation General notes Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 310). Driving with summer tires At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold temperatures could cause cracks to form, thereby damaging the tires permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage. G WARNING Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately. M+S tires G WARNING M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter and do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of an accident. M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in (4 mm) must be replaced immediately. At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use winter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire are identified by the M+S marking. Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. Only these tires will allow driving safety systems such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in winter. These tires have been developed specifically for driving in snow. Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics. Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tires you have mounted. Tire pressure Snow chains G WARNING If snow chains are mounted on the rear wheels, the snow chains could cause abrasion to the vehicle body or to chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. There is a risk of an accident. To avoid hazardous situations: Rnever mount snow chains on the rear wheels Ronly mount snow chains in pairs on the front wheels. ! On some tire sizes there is not enough space for snow chains. To avoid damage to the vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel and tire combinations" section under "Tires and wheels". For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains that have been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding standard of quality. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. If you intend to mount snow chains, please bear the following points in mind: RSnow chains may not be mounted on all wheel/tire combinations. Permissible wheeltire combinations (Y page 315). ROnly use snow chains when driving on roads completely covered by snow. Remove the snow chains as soon as possible when you come to a road that is not snow-covered. RLocal regulations may restrict the use of snow chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if you wish to mount snow chains. RDo not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 30mph (50 km/h). RIf snow chains are installed, you cannot use Active Parking Assist (Y page 167). You may wish to deactivate ESP® when pulling away with snow chains installed . This allows the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, achieving increased propulsive force (cutting action). ESP® (all vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) (Y page 65) RDeactivate ESP® (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) (Y page 66) Information about driving with an emergency spare wheel (Y page 315). RDeactivate Tire pressure Tire pressure specifications Important safety notes G WARNING Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the following risks: Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures and check the pressure of all the tires including the spare wheel: Rmonthly, at least the load changes Rbefore beginning a long journey Runder different operating conditions, e.g. off-road driving If necessary, correct the tire pressure. Rif i The data on the Tire and Loading Informa- tion placard and tire pressure table shown here are examples. Tire pressure specifications are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data shown here. The tire pressure specifications that are valid for your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pressure table on the vehicle. Z Wheels and tires When you have mounted the M+S tires: X Check the tire pressures (Y page 293). X Restart the tire pressure monitor (USA only) (Y page 300). X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Canada) (Y page 297) 293 294 Tire pressure General notes The recommended tire pressures for the tires mounted at the factory can be found on the labels described here. Operation with an emergency spare wheel: information on operation with an emergency spare wheel can be found in the general notes in the "Emergency spare wheel" section (Y page 315). Further information on tire pressures can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Wheels and tires Tire and Loading Information placard The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions. If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the following tire pressure information is only valid for that tire size; see illustration (example). : Recommended tire pressures The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 301). The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different numbers of occupants and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ. Tire pressure table The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap. It shows the tire pressure for all tires permitted at the factory for this vehicle; see illustration (example). Some tire pressure tables show only the rim diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18. Rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire sidewall (Y page 305). If the tire pressures have been set to the lower values for lighter loads and/or lower road speeds, the pressures should be reset to the higher values: Rif you want to drive with an increased load and/or Rif you want to drive at higher speeds i The tire pressures for increased loads and/ or higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure table, may have a negative effect on driving comfort. If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can lead to an excessive build-up of heat and a sudden loss of pressure. For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Important notes on tire pressure G WARNING If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire pressure that is too low may result in a tire blow-out. There is a risk of an accident. RCheck the tire for foreign objects. RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking. If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pressure monitors keep the tire valve open. This can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a risk of an accident. Only screw the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve. Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with the electronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressure can be checked in the on-board computer. The tire temperature and pressure increase when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent on the driving speed and the load. Therefore, you should only correct tire pressures when the tires are cold. The tires are cold: Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires out of direct sunlight for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has been driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) The tire temperature changes depending on the outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the tire load. If the tire temperature changes by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking the pressure of warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is too low for the current operating conditions. If you check the tire pressure when the tires are warm, the resulting value will be higher than if the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tire pressure to the value specified for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be too low. Observe the recommended tire pressures for cold tires: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap (Y page 141) Underinflated or overinflated tires Underinflated tires G WARNING Tires with pressure that is too low can overheat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from excessive and/or irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the tires, including the spare wheel. Underinflated tires may: Roverheat, leading to tire defects Radversely affect handling Z 295 Wheels and tires Tire pressure 296 Tire pressure Rwear Rhave excessively and/or unevenly an adverse effect on fuel consumption Overinflated tires G WARNING Tires with excessively high pressure can burst because they are damaged more easily by road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the tires, including the spare wheel. Overinflated tires may: Rincrease the braking distance Radversely affect handling Rwear excessively and/or unevenly Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort Rbe more susceptible to damage Wheels and tires Maximum tire pressures : Example: maximum permissible tire pres- sure Never exceed the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure. Always observe the recommended tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting the tire pressure (Y page 293). i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. Checking the tire pressures Important safety notes The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of: set tire pressure Rsudden loss of tire pressure, e.g. from a foreign object that has penetrated the tire Observe the notes on tire pressure (Y page 293). Information on air pressure for the tires on your vehicle can be found: Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap (Y page 141) Rin the "Tire pressure" section Rincorrectly Checking tire pressures manually To determine and set the correct tire pressure, proceed as follows: X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be checked. X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve. X Read the tire pressure and compare it to the recommended value on the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure table (Y page 293). X If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tire pressure to the recommended value. X If the tire pressure is too high, release air. To do so, press down the metal pin in the valve, using the tip of a pen for example. Then check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure checker. X Screw the valve cap onto the valve. X Repeat these steps for the other tires. Tire pressure loss warning system (Canada only) General notes While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressure loss warning system monitors the set tire pressure using the rotational speed of the wheels. This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure, Tire pressure Important safety notes The tire pressure warning system does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure (Y page 293). The tire pressure loss warning does not replace the need to regularly check the tire pressure. An even loss of pressure on several tires at the same time cannot be detected by the tire pressure loss warning system. The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering movements. The function of the tire pressure loss warning system is limited or delayed if: Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's tires. Rroad conditions are wintry. Ryou are driving on sand or gravel. Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cornering at high speeds or driving with high rates of acceleration). Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehicle or on the roof) Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system Restart the tire pressure loss warning system if you have: Rchanged the tire pressure Rchanged the wheels or tires Rmounted new wheels or tires X Before restarting, make sure that the tire pressures are set properly on all four tires for the respective operating conditions. The recommended tire pressure can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar. Additionally, a tire pressure table is attached to the fuel filler flap. The tire pressure loss warning system can only give reliable warnings if you have set the correct tire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressure is set, these incorrect values will be monitored. X Also observe the notes in the section on tire pressures (Y page 293). X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tire Pressure. Pressure X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator Active Press 'OK' to Restart message appears in the multifunction display. If you wish to confirm the restart: Press the a button. The Tire Pressure Now OK? message appears in the multifunction display. X Press the 9 or : button to select Yes Yes. X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator Restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After a teach-in period, the tire pressure loss warning system will monitor the set tire pressures of all four tires. X If you wish to cancel the restart: X or Press the % button. If the Tire Pressure Now OK? message appears, press the 9 or : button to select Cancel. Cancel X Press the a button. The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. X Tire pressure monitor (Canada only) General notes If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehicle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one or more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only functions if the corresponding sensors are installed in all wheels. Z Wheels and tires a corresponding warning message will appear in the multifunction display. You can recognize the tire pressure loss warning by the Run Flat Indicator Active Press 'OK' to Restart message in the multifunction display in the Serv. menu. Information on the message display can be found in the "Restarting the tire pressure loss warning" section (Y page 297). 297 298 Tire pressure Information on tire pressures is displayed in the multifunction display. After a few minutes of driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the Serv. menu of the multifunction display, see illustration (example). For information on the message display, refer to the "Checking the tire pressure electronically" section (Y page 299). Important safety notes Wheels and tires G WARNING Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked at least once every two weeks when cold and inflated to the pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard or, if available, the tire pressure label, you should determine the proper tire pressure for those tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale lights up, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will flash for approximately a minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will be repeated every time the vehicle is started as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of incompatible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate Tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to that recommended for cold tires which is suitable for the operating situation (Y page 293). Note that the correct tire pressure for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If a substantial loss of pressure occurs, the warning threshold for the warning message is aligned to the taught-in reference values. Restart the tire pressure monitor after adjusting the pressure of the cold tires (Y page 300). The current pressures are saved as new reference values. As a result, a warning message will appear if the tire pressure drops significantly. The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure (Y page 293). The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a Tire pressure Checking the tire pressure electronically Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tire Pressure. Pressure X Press the a button. The current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the multifunction display. If the vehicle was parked for longer than 20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes message is shown. After a teach-in process, the tire pressure monitor automatically detects new wheels or new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tire pressure value to the individual wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Active message is shown instead of the tire pressure display. The tire pressures are already being monitored. If an emergency spare wheel is mounted, the system may continue to show the tire pressure of the wheel that has been removed for a few minutes. If this occurs, note that the value displayed for the position where the spare wheel is fitted is not the same as the current tire pressure of the emergency spare wheel. X Tire pressure monitor warning messages If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure loss in one or more tires, a warning message is shown in the multifunction display. The yellow tire pressure warning lamp then lights up. the Please Correct Tire Pressure message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low. The tire pressure must be corrected when the opportunity arises. RIf the Check Tire Pressure message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The tires must be checked. RIf the Tire Pressure Warning Tire Fail‐ ure message appears, the tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The tires must be checked. Observe the instructions and safety notes in the display messages in the "Tires" section (Y page 213). If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated, the tire pressures may be displayed for the wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pressures are displayed for the correct positions. RIf Z Wheels and tires halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering movements. The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating pressure loss or a malfunction. Whether the warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning: Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire pressure on one or more tires is significantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is not malfunctioning. Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a minute and then remains lit constantly, the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. In addition to the warning lamp, a message appears in the multifunction display. Observe the information on display messages (Y page 213). It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunction of the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. A malfunction will be indicated by the tire pressure warning lamp flashing for approximately one minute and then remaining lit. When the malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of driving. The tire pressure values indicated by the onboard computer may differ from those measured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. The tire pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to those measured at sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures. The operation of the tire pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle. 299 Tire pressure 300 Wheels and tires Restarting the tire pressure monitor When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tire pressures as the reference values for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference values after you have changed the tire pressure. However, you can also set reference values manually as described here. The tire pressure monitor then monitors the new tire pressure values. X Set the tire pressure to the value recommended for the corresponding driving situation on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's side B-pillar (Y page 293). You can find more tire pressure values for various operating conditions in the tire pressure table inside the fuel filler flap (Y page 141). X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on all four wheels. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Pressure Tire Pressure. X Press the a button. The multifunction display shows the current tire pressure for each tire or the Tire pres‐ sure will be displayed after driving a few minutes message. X Press the : button. The multifunction display shows the Use Current Pressures as New Reference Values message. If you wish to confirm the restart: X Press the a button. The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tire pressures are within the specified range. The new tire pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored. If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the % button. The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. Radio type approval for the tire pressure monitor Country Radio type approval number USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433A FCCIC ID:MRXGG4 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with license exempt RSS standards of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions. (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Le present appareil est conforme d'industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est authorisee aux deux conditions suivantes. (1). L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) L'autisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies Canada technical specifications were met. FCC ID:MRXMC34MA4 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with license exempt RSS standards of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions. (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Le present appareil est conforme d'industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de license. L'exploitation est authorisee aux deux conditions suivantes. (1). L'appareil Loading the vehicle Canada Radio type approval number ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) L'autisatuer de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies Canada technical specifications were met. IC: 2546A-MW2433A IC:2546A-GG4 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with license exempt RSS standards of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions. (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Le present appareil est conforme d'industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de license. L'exploitation est authorisee aux deux conditions suivantes. (1). L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) L'autisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies Canada technical specifications were met. IC: 2546A-MC34MA4 Loading the vehicle Instruction labels for tires and loads G WARNING Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and driving characteristics and lead to brake failure. There is a risk of accident. Observe the load rating of the tires. The load rating must be at least half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Never overload the tires by exceeding the maximum load. Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the maximum possible load. (1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the maximum permissible number of occupants and the maximum permissible vehicle load. It also contains details of the tire sizes and corresponding pressures for tires mounted at the factory. (2) The vehicle identification plate is on the Bpillar on the driver's side. The vehicle identification plate informs you of the gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You can also find information about the maximum gross axle weight rating on the front and rear axle. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed the maximum load or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle. : B-pillar, driver's side Z Wheels and tires Country 301 Loading the vehicle 302 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating Maximum number of seats : indicates the maximum number of occupants allowed to travel in the vehicle. This information can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard. i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The number of seats is vehiclespecific and can differ from the details shown. The number of seats in your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Specification for maximum gross vehicle weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading Information placard: "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs." The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage must not exceed the specified value. X Wheels and tires i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific and may differ from that in the illustration. You can find the valid maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Number of seats Determining the correct load limit Step-by-step instructions The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information placard. X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs. X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4. Example: steps 1 to 3 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of Loading the vehicle 303 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 301). The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load. Step 1 Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants) 5 3 1 Distribution of the occupants Front: 2 Rear: 3 Front: 1 Rear: 2 Front: 1 Weight of the occupants Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg) Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg) Occupant 2: 190 lbs (86 kg) Occupant 3: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Gross weight of all occupants 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 540 lbs (245 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 150 lbs (68 kg) = 1350 lbs (612 kg) Combined maximum weight of occupants and cargo (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard) Wheels and tires Step 2 Step 3 Permissible load (maxi- 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò mum gross vehicle 750 lbs (340 kg) = weight rating from the 750 lbs (340 kg) Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants) Vehicle identification plate Even if you have calculated the total cargo carefully, you should still make sure that the gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 301). Z 304 All about wheels and tires Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if applicable) must not exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maximum permissible weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible values (gross vehicle weight and maximum gross axle weight rating), have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable) weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge. All about wheels and tires Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards Wheels and tires Overview of Tire Quality Grading Standards Example: RTreadwear grade: 200 grade: AA RTemperature grade: A All passenger car tires must conform to the statutory safety requirements in addition to these grades. RTraction i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified U.S. government course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction G WARNING Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S. government specifications. Their purpose is to provide drivers with uniform reliable information on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers have to grade tires using three performance factors: : tread wear grade, ; traction grade and = temperature grade. These regulations do not apply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in North America are provided with the corresponding quality grading markings on the sidewall of the tire. Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. ! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to the drive train. The traction grades – from highest to lowest – are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is always lower than on dry road surfaces. You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point. Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires. All about wheels and tires Observe the legally required minimum tire tread depth (Y page 291). Winter tires can reduce the braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in comparison with summer tires. The braking distance is still much further than on surfaces that are not icy or covered with snow. Take appropriate care when driving. Further information on winter tires (M+S tires) (Y page 292). 305 Tire labeling Overview Temperature G WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure. : Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (Y page 309) ; Department of Transportation, Tire Identifi- cation Number (Y page 308) Maximum load rating (Y page 307) Maximum tire pressures (Y page 296) Manufacturer Tire material (Y page 308) Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating (Y page 305) D Load index (Y page 307) E Tire name = ? A B C The markings described above are on the tire in addition to the tire name (sales designation) and the manufacturer's name. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating G WARNING Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There is a risk of accident. Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the Z Wheels and tires The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. 306 All about wheels and tires tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. Wheels and tires : ; = ? A B Tire width Nominal aspect ratio in % Tire code Rim diameter Load bearing index Speed rating General: depending on the manufacturer's standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may not contain any letters or may contain one letter that precedes the size description. If there is no letter preceding the size description (as shown above): these are passenger vehicle tires according to European manufacturing standards. If "P" precedes the size description: these are passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards. If "LT" precedes the size description: these are light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards. If "T" precedes the size description: compact emergency wheels with high tire pressure that are only designed for temporary use in an emergency. Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal tire width in millimeters. Aspect ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size ratio between the tire height and tire width and is shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by the tire height. Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type. "R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires. Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18). Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in inches (in). Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A is a numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 301). Example: Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear. For further information on the maximum tire load in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 307). For further information on the load bearing index, see "Load index" (Y page 307). Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Regardless of the speed rating, always observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. Summer tires Index Speed rating Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h) ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in All about wheels and tires Index Speed rating Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h) T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h) M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) V i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide the driving characteristics of winter tires. In addition to the M+S marking, winter tires also have the i snowflake symbol on the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow. They have been especially developed for driving on snow. An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory may be higher than the maximum speed that the electronic speed limiter permits. 1 Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The required speed rating for your vehicle can be found in the "Tires" section (Y page 315). Further information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. Load index In addition to the load-bearing index, load index : may be imprinted after the letters that identify speed rating on the sidewall of the tire. Speed rating (Y page 305). RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the example above), represents a standard load (SL) tire RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire RLight Load: represents a light load tire RC, D, E: represents a load range that depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Maximum load rating Or M+S i for winter tires. Z Wheels and tires the size description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18). The service specification is made up of loadbearing index A and speed rating B. RIf the size description of your tire includes "ZR" and there are no service specifications, ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out the maximum speed. If a service specification is available, the maximum speed is limited according to the speed rating in the service specification. Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is the service specification. The letter "Y" represents the speed rating. The maximum speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph (300 km/h). RThe size description for all tires with maximum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h) must include "ZR" and the service specification must be given in parentheses. Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed of the tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire manufacturer about the maximum speed. All-weather tires and winter tires 307 308 All about wheels and tires Maximum tire load : is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 301). i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) Date of manufacture: date of manufacture A provides information about the age of a tire. The first and second positions represent the week of manufacture, starting with "01" for the first calendar week. Positions three and four represent the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that is marked with "3208", was manufactured in week 32 in 2008. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Tire characteristics Wheels and tires US tire regulations stipulate that every tire manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tire produced. This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in sidewall : and under tire tread ;. The TIN is a unique identification number. The TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders to inform purchasers of recalls and other safetyrelevant matters. It makes it possible for the purchaser to easily identify the affected tires. The TIN is made up of manufacturer identification code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? and manufacturing date A. DOT (Department of Transportation): tire symbol : marks that the tire complies with the requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Manufacturer identification code: manufacturer identification code ; provides details on the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. For further information about retreaded tires, see (Y page 315). Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size. Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Definition of terms for tires and loading Tire ply composition and material used Describes the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon, polyester and other materials. Bar Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar. DOT (Department of Transportation) DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of the U S Department of Transportation. Normal occupant weight The number of occupants for which the vehicle is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs). All about wheels and tires Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. The quality grading assessment is made by the manufacturer following specifications from the U.S. government. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire. The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Recommended tire pressures Maximum loaded vehicle weight The recommended tire pressure applies to the tires mounted at the factory. The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maximum permissible vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions. The maximum weight is the sum of: Rthe curb weight of the vehicle Rthe weight of the accessories Rthe load limit Rthe weight of the factory installed optional equipment The combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not. Rim This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is mounted. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight rating. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Speed rating The speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range for which the tire is approved. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accessories installed, occupants, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Kilopascal (kPa) Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar. Load index In addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity more precisely. Curb weight The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning system and optional equipment if these are installed in the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage. Maximum load rating The maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved. Maximum permissible tire pressure Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire. Maximum load on one tire Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by two. Z Wheels and tires Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment 309 310 Changing a wheel PSI (pounds per square inch) Load bearing index A standard unit of measure for tire pressure. The load bearing index (also load index) is a code that contains the maximum load bearing capacity of a tire. Aspect ratio Relationship between tire height and tire width in percent. Tire pressure This is pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to each square inch of the tire's surface. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold. Traction Traction is the result of friction between the tires and the road surface. Treadwear indicators Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Cold tire pressure Occupant distribution The tires are cold: Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires out of direct sunlight for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1 mile (1.6 km) The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions. Total load limit Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle. Wheels and tires Tread The part of the tire that comes into contact with the road. Changing a wheel Bead Flat tire The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from the wheel rim. Sidewall The part of the tire between the tread and the bead. The "Breakdown assistance" section (Y page 274) contains information and notes on how to deal with a flat tire. Information on driving with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat tire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" (Y page 275). Weight of optional extras Rotating the wheels The combined weight of those optional extras that weigh more than the replaced standard parts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These optional extras, such as high-performance brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-performance battery, are not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories. G WARNING Interchanging the front and rear wheels may severely impair the driving characteristics if the wheels or tires have different dimensions. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. There is a risk of accident. Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tires are of the same dimensions. TIN (Tire Identification Number) This is a unique identifier which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example for a product recall, and thus identify the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date. ! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitor, electronic components are located in the wheel. Changing a wheel Direction of rotation Tires with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydroplaning. These advantages can only be gained if the tires are installed corresponding to the direction of rotation. An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its correct direction of rotation. Mounting a wheel Preparing the vehicle Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Apply the electric parking brake manually. X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position. X Shift the transmission to position j. X Switch off the engine. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The vehicle electronics are now in position u. This is the same as “key removed”. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 123). X Make sure that the engine cannot be started via your smartphone (Y page 83). X If included in the vehicle equipment, remove the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 142). X i Apart from certain country-specific varia- tions, the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more information on which tools are required to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Necessary tire-changing tools can include, for example: RJack RWheel chock RLug wrench Storing wheels Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel. Z Wheels and tires Tire-mounting tools should not be used near the valve. This could damage the electronic components. Only have tires changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 310). The wear patterns on the front and rear tires differ, depending on the operating conditions. Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tires. Front tires typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in the center. On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, you can rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your vehicle documents. If no warranty book is available, the tires should be rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km). Depending on tire wear, this may be required earlier. Do not change the direction of wheel rotation. Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is rotated. Check the tire pressure and, if necessary, restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Canada only) or the tire pressure monitor (USA only). 311 Changing a wheel 312 Securing the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle. ! Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. Otherwise, you could damage the vehicle. Observe the following when raising the vehicle: RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-spe- Wheels and tires If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it can be found in the tire-change tool kit (Y page 274). The folding wheel chock is an additional safety measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling away, for example when changing a wheel. X Fold both plates up :. X Fold out lower plate ;. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the openings in base plate =. X Place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. Raising the vehicle G WARNING If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk of injury. Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack cific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. It must not be used for performing maintenance work under the vehicle. RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and downhill slopes. RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from rolling away by applying the parking brake and inserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is raised. RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, flat, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats. RDo not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restricted height. RMake sure that the distance between the underside of the tires and the ground does not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm). RNever place your hands and feet under the raised vehicle. RDo not lie under the vehicle. RDo not start the engine when the vehicle is raised. RDo not open or close a door or the trunk lid when the vehicle is raised. RMake sure that no persons are present in the vehicle when the vehicle is raised. Changing a wheel Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely. Take ratchet wrench A out of the vehicle tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of jack ? so that the letters AUF are visible. X Position jack ? at jacking point =. X Jacking points The jacking points are located just behind the front wheel housings and just in front of the rear wheel housings (arrows). Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG Line: to protect the vehicle body, the vehicle has covers installed next to the jacking points on the outer sills. X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly beneath the jacking point. Turn ratchet wrench A until jack ? sits completely on jacking point = and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. X Turn ratchet wrench A until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground. X Removing a wheel ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could otherwise be damaged when you screw them in. X Unscrew the wheel bolts. X Remove the wheel. Covers, front (example: vehicles with AMG Line) X Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG Line: fold cover ; upwards. Mounting a new wheel G WARNING Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel Z Wheels and tires X 313 Changing a wheel 314 bolts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Have the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving. Wheels and tires G WARNING If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury. Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground. Lowering the vehicle G WARNING The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed. Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters AB are visible. X Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground. X Place the jack to one side. X Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 310). Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel. ! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold the wheel securely against the wheel hub while screwing in the first wheel bolt. Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces. X Place the new wheel on the wheel hub and push it on. X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fingertight. X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A). The specified tightening torque is 96 lb-ft (130 Nm). X Turn the jack back to its initial position. X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle tools in the vehicle again. X Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG Line: use the cover of the outer sill. X Check the tire pressure of the newly mounted wheel and adjust it if necessary. Observe the recommended tire pressure (Y page 293). Canada only: as long as you are driving with the emergency spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning system cannot function reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with tire pressure monitor (USA only): all mounted wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors. X Wheel and tire combinations General notes You can ask for information regarding permitted wheel/tire combinations at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. You should regularly check the pressure of the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary (Y page 293). The value on the wheel is valid. ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- mends that you only use tires and wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle. These tires have been specially adapted for use with the control systems, such as ABS or ESP®, and are marked as follows: RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tires) Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tire dimension variations could cause the tires to come into contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tires or the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tires, wheels or accessories other than those tested and approved. Information on tires, wheels and approved combinations can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. ! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec- ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires if you have no information about their previous usage. The recommended pressures for various operating conditions can be found: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap Observe the notes on recommended tire pressures under various operating conditions (Y page 293). Check tire pressures regularly, and only when the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance recommendations of the tire manufacturer in the vehicle document wallet. Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equip the vehicle: Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle (left and right) Rwith the same type of tire (summer tires, MOExtended tires, winter tires) Exception: it is permissible to install a different type or make in the event of a flat tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 275). Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Emergency spare wheel Important safety notes G WARNING The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type of the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. Mounting an emergency spare wheel may severely impair the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. To avoid hazardous situations: Radapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Rnever mount more than one spare wheel or emergency spare wheel that differs in size. Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency spare wheel of a different size briefly. Z 315 Wheels and tires Emergency spare wheel 316 Emergency spare wheel not switch ESP® off. Rhave a spare wheel or emergency spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions as well as the tire type must be correct. Rdo When using an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size, you must not exceed the vehicle's maximum design speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). You should regularly check the pressure of the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary (Y page 293). The value on the wheel is valid. Snow chains must not be mounted on emergency spare wheels. Wheels and tires General notes You can ask for information regarding permitted emergency spare wheels at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. An emergency spare wheel may also be mounted against the direction of rotation. Observe the time restriction on use as well as the speed limitation specified on the emergency spare wheel. Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the emergency spare wheel. Tire pressure loss warning system (Canada only): as long as you are driving with the emergency spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning system cannot function reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with tire pressure monitor (USA only): after an emergency spare wheel has been mounted, the system may still display the tire pressure of the removed wheel for a few minutes. The value displayed for the mounted emergency spare wheel is not the same as the current tire pressure of the emergency spare wheel. Removing the emergency spare wheel Vehicles with the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel The "Minispare" emergency spare wheel is secured in emergency spare wheel bag : in the trunk. X Open the trunk lid X Release securing straps ; on emergency spare wheel bag :. X Remove emergency spare wheel bag : with the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel. X Open emergency spare wheel bag : and remove the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel. Observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 311). Vehicle electronics Information regarding technical data i The data stated here specifically refers to a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the data for all vehicle variants and trim levels. Vehicle electronics Installing two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters) G WARNING 317 In particular, the following conditions must be complied with: Ronly approved wavebands may be used Robserve the maximum permissible output in these wavebands Ronly approved antenna positions may be used Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and the health of others. Using an exterior antenna takes into account current scientific discussions relating to the possible health hazards that may result from electromagnetic fields. G WARNING If you incorrectly operate two-way radios in the vehicle, the electromagnetic radiation may interfere with the vehicle electronics, for example if: Approved antenna positions : Front roof area ; Rear roof area = Rear fender ? Trunk lid Rthe i On vehicles with panorama roof with power two-way radio is not connected to an exterior antenna Rthe exterior antenna is not correctly mounted or is not low-reflection This could jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Have the low-reflection exterior antenna installed at a qualified specialist workshop. Always connect two-way radios to the lowreflection exterior antenna when operating in the vehicle. ! The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of two-way radios are not observed. tilt/sliding panel, installing an antenna to the front or rear roof area is not permitted. On the rear fenders, it is recommended to position the antenna on the side of the vehicle closest to the center of the road. Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 when retrofitting RF transmitters (Road Vehicles - EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment). Observe the legal requirements for accessory parts. If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply or antenna connections intended for use with the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's Supplement when installing. Deviations with respect to frequency bands, maximum transmission outputs or antenna positions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz. Z Technical data The electromagnetic radiation from two-way radios can interfere with the vehicle electronics if two-way radios are manipulated or retrofitted incorrectly. This could jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. 318 Identification plates The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the antenna must not exceed the following values: Technical data Frequency band Maximum transmission output Short wave 3 - 54 MHz 100 W 4 m waveband 74 - 88 MHz 30 W 2 m waveband 144 - 174 MHz 50 W Trunked radio system/ Tetra 380 - 460 MHz 10 W 70 cm waveband 400 - 460 MHz 35 W Mobile communications (2G/3G/4G) 10 W Identification plates Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN) X The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: RRF transmitters with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW RRF transmitters with transmitter frequencies in the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (trunked radio system/Tetra) RMobile phones (2G/3G/4G) There is no restriction for antenna positions on the outside of the vehicle for the following frequency bands: RTrunked radio system/Tetra R70 cm waveband R2G/3G/4G Open the driver's door. You will see vehicle identification plate :. Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only) : VIN ; Paint code Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only) : VIN ; Paint code i The data shown on the vehicle identification plate is used only as an example. This data is Service products and filling capacities different for every vehicle and can deviate from the data shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle identification plate. Vehicle identification number (VIN) 319 Service products and filling capacities Important safety notes G WARNING Service products may be poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Comply with instructions on the use, storage and disposal of service products on the labels of the respective original containers. Always store service products sealed in their original containers. Always keep service products out of the reach of children. H Environmental note The VIN can also be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 318). The VIN can also be found at the lower edge of the windshield (Y page 319). Engine number : Emission control information plate, includ- ing the certification of both federal and Californian emissions standards ; VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield) = Engine number (stamped into the crankcase) Service products include the following: RFuels RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) RCoolant RBrake fluid RWindshield washer fluid RClimate control system refrigerant Components and service products must match. Only use products recommended by MercedesBenz. Damage which is caused by the use of products which have not been recommended is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. Products approved by Mercedes-Benz are listed in this Operator's Manual in the appropriate section. Information on tested and approved products can be obtained at a Mercedes-Benz Service Center or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. You can recognize service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on the containers: RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51) Other designations or recommendations indicate a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Z Technical data Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost position. X Fold floor covering : upwards. You will see VIN ;. X Dispose of service products in an environmentally responsible manner. 320 Service products and filling capacities Other identifications, for example: R0 W-30 R5 W-30 R5 W-40 Fuel Tank capacity Model Total capacity CLA 250 13.2 US gal (50.0 l) All other models 14.8 US gal (56.0 l) Important safety notes G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. Risk of fire and explosion by improper handling of fuel. You must avoid fire, open flames, smoking and creating sparks. Switch off the ignition before refueling and, if present, switch off the auxiliary heating. Technical data G WARNING Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel vapors. Keep fuel away from children. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water. RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel. Model Of which reserve Mercedes‑AMG vehicles Approx. 2.1 US gal (8.0 l) All other models Approx. 1.6 US gal (6.0 l) Gasoline Fuel grade Observe the notes on operating fluids. ! Damage caused by the wrong fuel Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. ROnly refuel using unleaded, sulfur-free gasoline that conforms to European standard EN 228, or an equivalent specification. Fuel of this specification may contain up to 10vol.% % ethanol. Your vehicle is compatible with E10 fuel Never refuel using: RDiesel RRegular gasoline with an octane number lower than 91 RON RGasoline with more than 10 vol. % ethanol, e.g. E15, E20, E85, E100 RGasoline with more than 3 vol. % methanol, e.g. M15, M30 RGasoline with metalliferous additives If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel: RDo not switch the ignition on RConsult a qualified specialist workshop. Service products and filling capacities In accordance with European standard EN 16942, you can find the following compatibility labels for fuel: ROn the instruction label on the fuel filler flap of your vehicle ROn the fuel pump or pump nozzle for your vehicle, throughout Europe 321 Alternatively, you can also refuel using premium grade gasoline with at least 95 RON. All models: as a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use unleaded regular gasoline with at least: RE 180, E 250, E 300 e: 93 RON RAll other models: 91 RON This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. Never refuel using gasoline with a lower RON. Further information on fuel is available: Rat gas stations Ra qualified specialized workshop Additives : For gasoline with a maximum ethanol con- tent of 5 vol. % ; For gasoline with a maximum ethanol con- tent of 10 vol. % ! Damage to the emissions control system caused by fuel with too high a sulfur content ROnly use sulfur-free fuel (sulfur content ≤ 10 ppm). added later can lead to engine failure. Do not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not include additives for the removal and prevention of residue buildup. gasoline must only be mixed with additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructions for use on the product label. More information about recommended additives can be obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use branded fuels that have additives. The fuel quality available in some countries may not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In such cases, and in consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container. Unpleasant odors may be produced if the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sulfur. E 400 4MATIC: observe the information on sulfur content on the instruction label on the fuel filler flap. All models: the recommended octane number for your vehicle can be found on the instruction label on the fuel filler flap. E 300, E 350, E 350 4MATIC: only refuel using super unleaded gasoline with at least 98 RON, if you wish to achieve maximum engine output. Z Technical data ! Operating the engine with fuel additives 322 Service products and filling capacities Filling capacities Engine oil The following values refer to an engine oil change, including the oil filter. General notes Model Capacity Mercedes‑AMG vehicles 5.8 US qt (5.5 l) All other models 5.9 US qt (5.6 l) Additives ! Do not use any additives in the engine oil. This could damage the engine. Technical data ! Do not use engine oil or an oil filter with specifications deviating from those expressly required for the prescribed service intervals. Do not change the engine oil or oil filter in order to set replacement intervals longer than those prescribed. This could otherwise cause damage to the engine or exhaust gas aftertreatment. Follow the instructions on the service interval display for changing the engine oil. This could otherwise cause damage to the engine or exhaust gas aftertreatment. When handling engine oil, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 319). The engine oils are matched to the performance of Mercedes-Benz engines and service intervals. You should therefore only use engine oils and oil filters that are approved for vehicles with maintenance systems. For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or visit the website http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. The table shows which engine oils have been approved for your vehicle. Model All models MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.5 Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils for Mercedes-AMG vehicles. i MB approval is indicated on the oil containers. Brake fluid G WARNING The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This would impair braking efficiency. There is a risk of an accident. You should have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals. When handling brake fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 319). The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. Only use brake fluid approved by MercedesBenz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MBApproval 331.0. Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet. Service products and filling capacities Important safety notes G WARNING If antifreeze comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Let the engine cool down before you add antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from components before starting the engine. ! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine. You can find additional notes on the coolant in the following places: Rin the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1 - on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com - on the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app Ra qualified specialized workshop ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating. i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet. Comply with the important safety notes for service products when handling coolant (Y page 319). The coolant is a mixture of water and corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze concentrate. It performs the following tasks: Ranti-corrosion protection Rantifreeze protection Rraising the boiling point If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolant during operation is approximately 266 ‡ (130 †). The antifreeze concentrate/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system should: Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine cooling system against freezing down to approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †) Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not be dissipated as effectively Mercedes-Benz recommends a coolant or corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze concentrate in accordance with MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1. i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate antifreeze and anti-corrosion protection. i The coolant is checked with every mainte- nance interval at a qualified specialist workshop. Filling capacities Model Capacity Mercedes‑AMG vehicles Approx. 12.6 US qt (11.9 l) All other models Approx. 8.2 US qt (7.8 l) Windshield washer system Important safety notes G WARNING Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck. ! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit washer fluid should be mixed together. The spray nozzles may otherwise become blocked. Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Otherwise, the level sensor may give a false reading. Z Technical data Coolant 323 324 Service products and filling capacities When handling washer fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 319). At temperatures above freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit. Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water. At temperatures below freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit. For the correct mixing ratio refer to the information on the antifreeze reservoir. i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum- merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all year round. Climate control system refrigerant Important safety notes The climate control system of your vehicle is filled with refrigerant R‑134a. The instruction label regarding the refrigerant type used can be found on the left, on the underside of the hood. Technical data ! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used. The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with any other PAG oil that is not approved for R-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climate control system may be damaged. Service work, such as refilling with refrigerant or replacing component parts, may only be carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable regulations, as well as SAE standard J639, must be adhered to. Always have work on the climate control system carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Refrigerant instruction label Example: refrigerant instruction label : Symbol ; Refrigerant filling capacity = Applicable standards ? PAG oil part number A Type of refrigerant Symbols : advise you about: RPossible dangers RHaving service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop Filling capacities Model Refrigerant Mercedes‑AMG vehicles 23.6 ± 0.4 oz (670 ± 10 g) All other models 22.9 ± 0.4 oz (650 ± 10 g) Model PAG oil All models 4.2 oz (120 g) Vehicle data Vehicle data Model General notes Mercedes‑AMG vehicles 183.8 in (4669 mm) All other models 182.7 in (4640 mm) Please note that for the specified vehicle data: RThe heights specified may vary as a result of: - Tires - Load - Condition of the suspension - Optional equipment ROptional equipment reduces the maximum payload Vehicle length Vehicle height Mercedes‑AMG vehicles 55.7 in (1416 mm) All other models 56.0 in (1423 mm) Model Dimensions and weights Model Model Maximum roof load Mercedes‑AMG vehicles 220.5 lb (100 kg) All other models 220.5 lb (100 kg) 68.0 in (1727 mm) All other models 68.3 in (1737 mm) Technical data : Height when opened Mercedes‑AMG vehicles All models Vehicle width including outside mirrors 80.0 in (2032 mm) Wheelbase 106.3 in (2699 mm) Turning radius 36.1 ft (11.0 m) Turning circle, Mercedes-AMG vehicles 36.2 ft (11.04 m) 325 Z 326 327 328